C-550 Lanovia Scanner Engineer's Reference Guide

 

C-550 Lanovia Scanner Engineer’s Reference Guide 6700800003

IMPORTANT Fujifilm products are so designed and constructed as to be safe and without risk to health when properly used (in accordance with the supplied documentation) documentation) and when the safety precautions contained in this document are fully observed.

This document was produced by the Technical Publications Department, FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd.

© 1999 FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd. Fujifilm House Boundary Way Hemel Hempstead Hertfordshire HP2 7RH England

Tel: 01442 213440 Fax: 01442 343432 Registered Number: 3244452

 

Preliminaries

This document must not be copied without prior written authorization, and although correct at the time of writing is subject to change without notice. For further information contact the Product Information Manager, Manage r, FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd, at the address given on the front page of  this manual. (ii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

WARNING All precautions mentioned in this document must be strictly observed at all times. Personnel MUST therefore read the contents of the document BEFORE commencing any work on the equipment described in the document. Improper use of controls and switches, failure to comply with warnings, and the performance of adjustments or procedures not specified in this document, may expose personnel to danger. danger.

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(iii)

 

Preliminaries

CAUTION The attention of the engineer is particularly particula rly drawn to the requirement for ensuring that the site for installation and operation of the C-550 Lanovia  Scanner at the customers premises shall accord in all respects and at all times with the following environmental conditions. Verify the environmental conditions. c onditions. The temperature te mperature in the work area must be within the range 20°C to 24°C. The humidity shall be within the range 50% to 70% RH (non-condensing),, with a rate of change not exceeding 2% (non-condensing) per hour. Low humidity causes a build up of static electricity which, if discharged, can cause data errors. High humidity leads to condensation and corrosion problems. Regularly inspect the scanner ventilation fans, to make sure they are working and that their grills have not been accidentally covered. If temperature limits are exceeded, the scanner switches off.

(iv)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to be compliant with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(v)

 

Preliminaries

Electromagnetic Compatibility Information - Europe This product has been found to satisfy the Class A limits for radio interference of information technology equipment. Class A equipment is intended for use in a light industrial i ndustrial or commercial environment for which the 30 metre protection distance is used. Operation of this equipment in a domestic or residential environment may result in interference to other equipment, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. In some countries this equipment may be subject to restrictions on its use. Where applicable the user should inform the relevant local authority that Class A Information Technology Technology Equipment has been taken into service. This equipment may also be susceptible to strong electromagnetic fields and should not be sited close to high power radio transmitters or radar installations. If the intended site of operation is prone to electromagnetic disturbances due to lightning strikes, additional precautions should be taken to protect the equipment from the resulting electromagnetic disturbance. Typical examples for the intended environment of this equipment would include: •

business premises, for example, offices, banks, etc.

•

retail outlets, for example, shops, supermarkets, etc.

•

light industrial locations, for example, workshops, service centres, etc.

Locations which are characterised by being supplied directly at low voltage from the public mains are considered to be residential, commercial or light industrial. This equipment conforms to the requirements of EC directives:

73/23/EEC - Low Voltage Voltage Directive 89/336/EEC - EMC Directive.

(vi)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

About this Document The purpose of this Guide is to provide suitably qualified service personnel with sufficient information to maintain mainta in a C-550 Lanovia Scanner. This Guide includes details of the system syste m and PCB configurations, field replacements, setup procedures, fault diagnosis, and the routine maintenance maintenance procedures. It also gives a comprehensive technical description of the main sub-systems for use by engineers during an approved training course. Description. Describes the main features of the C-550 Lanovia • Chapter 1 - System Description.

Scanner and shows its construction and connections to peripheral equipment. • Chapter 2 - Safety Practices. Explains the Fujifilm recommended safety guidelines,

identifies relevant precautions and interlock strategy, and the antistatic precautions. This chapter  must be read before any servicing or replacement procedures are implemented. • Chapter 3 - Functional Description. Provides brief functional descriptions about the

optical system, the electronic systems, and motion control. • Chapter 4 - Field Replacements .  Provides recommended procedures for the

replacement of spared modules. • Chapter 5 - Terminal Diagnostics . Describes the terminal diagnostics system for the

C-550 Lanovia Scanner and provides the useful menu commands. • Chapter 6 - Alignments and Calibrations. Describes the test targets, the setup menus,

the carriage alignments, and system calibrations. Before any alignments or calibrations are performed, C-550 Lanovia Scanner must be free of any functional problems. • Chapter 7 - Workstation Diagnostics. Diagnostics. Describes the screen menus, the Electronic

Repro test for quality conformance - performed after fault diagnosis, corrections, alignments, and system calibrations - and the identities of the SCSI buffers. Maintenance. Describes the safety interlock checks, cleaning procedures • Chapter 8 - Maintenance. for the optical components, and the health (confidence) check of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner. Data..  Shows the locations of the electrical • Appendix A - Electrical Reference Data

modules and provides the physical data of the PSU, system board, CCD headboard, digitizer board, lamp driver board, distribution boards and display board. Diagnosis  Describes certain image defects and provides fault • Appendix B - Fault Diagnosis 

diagnosis tables in support to the customer service engineer.

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(vii)

 

Preliminaries

Associated Documents C-scan Application Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008610 C-scan Application User ’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008600 C-550 Lanovia Scanner with C-scan User ’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008620 C–550 Lanovia Safety Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008890 C-550 Lanovia Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67008370 Sprint Option Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67009280 Sprint Upgrade Installation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67009290

Trademarks and Copyright C-scan and Lanovia are trademarks of FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Ltd that may be registered in certain jurisdiction jurisdictions. s. Fuji and Fujifilm are trademarks of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd that may be registered in certain jurisdiction jurisdictions. s. Apple, AppleShare AppleShare,, AppleTalk, , System 7, Power Macintosh and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Kermit is a trademark of Columbia University that may be registered in certain  jurisdictions.  jurisdictions. Sun, Sun Ultra, Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc. that may be registered in certain jurisdictions. All other company names, products or brand names are trademarks of their respective holders.

(viii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Contents Chapter 1

System Description 1.1

1.2

Overview of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1.1

Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.1.2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.1.3

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

C-550 Lanovia Scanner Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1.2.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.2.2

Mechanical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Main Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 X-slide Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Lens Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 CCD Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.2.3

Optical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Transmission Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Reflection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Light Table Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Mirror Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.2.4

Electrical Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Lamp Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Lamp Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Main Carriage Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 X-slide Carriage Stepper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Enlargement Stepper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(ix)

 

Preliminaries

Focus Stepper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 1.2.5

Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 FLASH Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Sensors and Interlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Image Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 SCSI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Synchronization Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Environment Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Digitizer Board Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.2.6

Interlocks and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Datum Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Limit Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

1.3

C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 1.3.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Workstation Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Terminal Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

1.4

1.5

(x)

System Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 1.4.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1.4.2

Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Alignment and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 1.5.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

1.5.2

Alignment and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

1.6

1.7

Chapter 2

Workstation Diagnostics and Electronic Repro . . . . . . . . 1-19 1.6.1

Workstation Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

1.6.2

Electronic Repro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Accessory Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 1.7.1

Long Registration Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

1.7.2

Coded Copyholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

1.7.3

A3 Cover Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Safety Practices 2.1

Health and Safety at Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1.1

2.2

Site Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Si . . . 2-2 2.2.1

2.3

Chapte terr 3

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Safety Signs, Labels, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.3.1

Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3.2

Unattended Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.4

Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.5

Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.6

Antistatic Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.7

Interlock Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.8

Lamp Driver Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Fun Fu ncti tio onal De Desc scri rip ptio ion n 3.1

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1.2

System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xi)

 

Preliminaries

3.1.3

Optical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.1.4

Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Power Supply and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Image Data Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Illumination System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.2

3.1.5

Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3.1.6

Electrical Reference Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3.1.7

Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 3.2.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

3.2.2

Basic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Line Scan CCD Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Fixed Platen - Moving Camera Scanning . . . . . . . . 3-11 Fluorescent Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Variable Magnification Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Autofocus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 X-Slide Carriage Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Image Re-alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Graphics and Line-art Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Reading Copyholder Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Automatic Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

3.2.3

Sequence of Scanning Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Stabilize Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 X-Slide Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Enlargement Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Focus Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Exposure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Autofocus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

(xii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Black Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 White Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 3.3

Optical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 3.3.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

3.3.2

Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 White Balance Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Transmission Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Transmission White-balance Area . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Reflection Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Reflection White-balance Area . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

3.3.3

Light Table Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pl . . 3-25 Aqua Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Copy Holder Registration Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Reflection Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

3.3.4

M irror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mi . . 3-28

3.3.5

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Optical Baffles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

3.3.6

CCD Image Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 CCD Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 CCD Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

3.4

Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3.4.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3.4.2

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 +5 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 +24 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 +18 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 -12 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

3.4.3  Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 (xiii)

 

Preliminaries

CCD Clock Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Output Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 3.4.4

Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 CCD Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Input Multiplexer and Level Shifter - RGB RGB . . . . . . 3-38 Correlated Double Sampling (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 RGB Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Voltage Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Digital Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Image Processing (Formatting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3.4.5

System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Image Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Clock Generation and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . 3-49 SCSI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Stepper Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

3.4.6

Lamp Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 Lamp Driver Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Lamp Driver Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Input RFI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 Soft Inrush Current Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 +5 V and +14 V Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Low Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Boost Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Temperature Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Serial DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 Serial ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 Five Lamp Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

(xiv)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCO) . . . . . . . . 3-62 Heater Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 Ballast Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63 3.4.7

Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 Enlargement Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 Focus Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 X-Slide Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 Main Carriage Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 Main Carriage Limit Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

3.4.8

Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

3.4.9

Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

3.4.10 Distribution Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70 Flexicable Di Distribution Bo Boards As Assembly . . . . . . . 3-71 3.5

Motion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 3.5.1

Main Carriage Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 Main Carriage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 Forward Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Reverse Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73

3.5.2

Stepper Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Software Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74

3.6

3.5.3

X-Slide Carriage Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

3.5.4

Enlargement Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76

3.5.5

Focus Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78

Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79 3.6.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79

3.6.2

Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79

3.6.3

Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

3.6.4

Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xv)

 

Preliminaries

Chap Ch apte terr 4

3.6.5

Platen Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

3.6.6

Enclosure Fan Filter Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82

3.6.7

Main Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83

3.6.8

Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83

Unit Un it Re Repl plac acem emen entt Pr Proc oced edur ures es 4.1

Recommended List of Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2

Preparation for Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3

Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4

Lightbar Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4.4.1

Lightbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.4.2

Transmission Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Lamp Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Checking, Cleaning and Removing the Diffus Di ffuseer 4-7 Lamp Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4.4.3

Transmission Lamp Detector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.5

Lightbar Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.6

Reflection Tray and Transmission Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4.7

Stand Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

(xvi)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.8

Enclosure Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

4.9

RFI Box Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.9.1

RFI Box Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.9.2

System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4.9.3

Dongle for Sprint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.9.4

PSU and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.9.5

RFI Box Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

4.9.6

Main Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

4.10 Protective Covers and Gas Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4.10.1 Lid Gas-Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 4.10.2 Lid Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xvii)

 

Preliminaries

4.11 Main Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Open Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Close Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 4.11.1 Reflection White-Balance Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 4.11.2 Main-Cover Gas-Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 4.11.3 Main-Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 4.12 Moving the Main Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4.12.1 Workstation Diagnostics Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4.12.2 Terminal Diagnostics Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 4.12.3 Mechanical Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 4.13 Safety Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 4.13.1 Main Cover Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 4.13.2 Lid Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 4.14 Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 4.15 Reflection Lamps Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 4.15.1 Reflection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

(xviii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

4.15.2 Reflection Lamp Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 4.15.3 Reflection Lamp Detector Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 4.15.4 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 4.16 Light Table Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 4.16.1 LT -Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 4.16.2 LT-Lamp Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 4.17 Lamp Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 4.18 Base and Structure Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 4.18.1 Flexicable - 50-Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 4.18.2 Flexicable - 62-Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 4.18.3 Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly . . . . . 4-68 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xix)

 

Preliminaries

4.18.4 Main Carriage Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 4.18.5 Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 4.18.6 Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 4.18.7 Standby Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 4.18.8 Standby Switch Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 4.18.9 Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 4.18.10 Display Board Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 4.18.11 LH LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 4.18.12 LH Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 4.18.13 RH RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 4.18.14 RH Ribbon Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

(xx)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

4.18.15 Enclosure Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 4.19 Main Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 4.19.1 Leadscrew Nut Clamp Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 4.19.2 Main Carriage Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 4.19.3 Main Leadscrew Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 4.19.4 Main Leadscrew Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 4.19.5 C-Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 4.19.6 Fit Front Transit Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 4.19.7 Remove Front Transit Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97 4.19.8 Main Carriage Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Two-Wheel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-99 One-Wheel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-100 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 4.20 X-Slide Carriage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-101 4.20.1 Moving the X-Slide Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 4.20.2 Moving the Lens Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 4.20.3 Moving the CCD Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103  Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xxi)

 

Preliminaries

4.20.4 X-Slide Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106 4.20.5 X-slide Carriage Bearings Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-108 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-108 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-109 4.20.6 Digitizer Board Cover Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-110 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-110 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-111 4.20.7 Digitizer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-111 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112 4.20.8 Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-112 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-113 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-114 4.20.9 Focus Motor Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-114 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-114 Replacement/Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-115 4.20.10 Focus Motor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-116 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-116 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-117 4.20.11 Focus Datum Sensor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-117 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-118 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-118 4.20.12 Enlargemen Enlargementt Datum Sensor and and Cable Lo Loom om . . .  .  4-119 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-120 4.20.13 En Enlargement Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-120 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-121 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-122 4.20.14 Enlargement Leadscrew Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123

(xxii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

4.20.15 Enlargement Motor and Cable Loom . . . . . . . . . 4-123 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124 4.20.16 Cam Follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-124 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-125 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-125 4.21 X-slide Leadscrew Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-127 4.21.1 X-slide Datum Sensor and Cable Loom . . . . . . .  .  4-127 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-127 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-128 4.21.2 X-slide Leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-128 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-129 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-129 4.21.3 X-s 4.21.3 X-slid lidee Leads Leadscre crew w Motor Motor and and Cabl Cablee Loom Loom . . . .  .  4-130 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-131 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-131 4.21.4 X-slide Leadscrew Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-132 Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-132 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-132

Chapte terr 5

Ter erm min ina al Dia iag gnost stic icss 5.1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2

Power-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.2.1

5.3

Power-on Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Terminal Diagnostics User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5.3.1

The Terminal Diagnostics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 VT100 Emulation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Access on a Macintosh/PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 The VT100 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Entering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xxiii)

 

Preliminaries

5.3.2

Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Command Line Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Soak Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.3.3

Verbose Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Standard Monitor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Monitor Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Servo Motor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Stepper Motor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5.3.4

Display Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5.4

Terminal Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

5.5

System Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5.5.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5.5.2

CPU Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 cpu_test Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.5.3

Sys_brd Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 SCSI_Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 scsi_tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 DSP_Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 dsp_tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Sync_Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 sync_tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.5.4 5.6

Mcb_brd Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 mcb_brd Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Digitizer Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 5.6.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.6.2

Digitizing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.6.3

Dig_brd Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Basic Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Function Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

(xxiv)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

5.7

Lamp Driver Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 5.7.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Lamp_brd Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

5.8

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 5.8.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Utilities Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

5.9

Optics Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 5.9.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Optics Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

5.10 Me M echanical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 5.10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Mech Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 5.10.2 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Service Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Chapte terr 6

Ali lig gnments and Ca Cali lib bra rati tio ons 6.1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Camera Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Carriage Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 System Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 C-dot SP Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2

Test Films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.3

Setup Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6.3.1

6.4

Setup Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Carriage Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6.4.1

Carriage Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Carriage Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6.4.2

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

Light_bar Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

(xxv)

 

Preliminaries

Lightbar Alignment Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 6.4.3

Diff_Focus Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Adjustment Procedure for Two-wheel Carriag Carriagee . 6-11 Adjustmentt Procedure for One-wheel Carriage Adjustmen Carriage . 6-14

6.5

System Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 6.5.1

Calibrate Menu Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Calibrate Tests Menu Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6.5.2

System Calibration Target Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

6.5.3

Main Carriage Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

6.5.4

X-slide Carriage Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

6.5.5

Enlargement & Focus Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.5.6

Start of Scan Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.5.7

Bad (CCD) Pixel Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

6.5.8

All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

6.5.9 Registration Bar Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 6.5.10 Copyholder Search Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 6.6

(xxvi)

C-dot SP Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 6.6. 6. 6.1 1

C-dott Pla C-do Plate ten n Cal Calib ibra rati tion on fo forr Shar Sharpn pnes esss at 36 Lines/mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

6.6. 6. 6.2 2

C-dott Pla C-do Plate ten n Cal Calib ibra rati tion on fo forr Shar Sharpn pnes esss at 45 Lines/mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

6.6.3

Swathe Scanning Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

6.7

Chapte terr 7

Saving Calibration Data to a Secure Location . . . . . . . . . 6-41

Wor ork kst stat atio ion n Dia Diag gnost stic icss 7.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2

Launching the Diagnostics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.3

Workstation Diagnostics Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.3.1

File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Verbose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Temperature Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Clear Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7.3.2

View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7.3.3

Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Scanner 0 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7.3.4

Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Rescan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Scanner 0 - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Carriage Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.3.5

Buffers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Load Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Write Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Read Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

7.3.6

SCSI Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Scanner Application System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 DRAM Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xxvii)

 

Preliminaries

Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Scanner Application System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Diagnostics FLASH Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Diagnostics RAM Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Scripts Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 7.3.7

Tests Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Diagnostic Tests (Ctrl+T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Electronic Repro (Ctrl+R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Soak Tests (Ctrl+S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

7.3.8 7.4

Tool Bar Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

7.5

Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

7.6

Electronic Repro Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

7.7

Chapter 8

Calibrate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7.6.1

Electronic Repro Test Subjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

7.6. 7. 6.2 2

Posi Po siti tion onin ing g the the Elec Electr tron onic ic Rep Repro ro Tes Testt Sub Sub ject . . 7-33

7.6.3

Electronic Repro Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Downloading Firmware to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Maintenance 8.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1.1

Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2

Safety Interlock Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.3

Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.3. 8. 3.1 1

Hand Ha ndli ling ng an and d Cl Clea eani ning ng of Op Opti tica call Co Comp mpon onen ents ts . 88-3 3 Recommended List of Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Approved Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

(xxviii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Cleaning Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 8.3.2 8.3.3

Cleaning Preparations and Completions . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Platen Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Topside Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Underside Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

8.4

Appendix

8.3.4

Mirror Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

8.3.5

Lens Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

8.3.6

CCD-Window Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Scanner Health (Confidence) Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Electrical Reference Data A.1

Module Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A.1.1

Flexicable Looms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A.2

Power Supply Unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

A.3

System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 A.3.1

System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 PL1 to LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 SK1 to RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . A-14 SK3 to Lamp Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 SK4 to Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

A.4

A.3.2

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

A.3.3

S witches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19 Sw

A.3.4

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

A.3.5

Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

A.3.6

Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20

CCD Headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 A.4.1

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

CCD Headboard Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 (xxix)

 

Preliminaries

SK1 to Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 A.5

Digitizer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 A.5.1

Digitizer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 PL2 to Enlargement Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26 PL3 to Focus Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26 PL4 to Digitizer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27

A.5.2 A.6

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27

Lamp Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 A.6.1

Lamp Driver Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 PL1 to Reflection Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 PL2 to Transmission Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30 PL3 to Light Table Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31 SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32

A.6.2

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33

A.6.3

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33

A.6.4

Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

A.6.5

Lamp Detector Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34 Lamp Detector Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

A.7

RH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 A.7.1

RH Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . A-36 PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor Sensor . . . A-36 PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . A-37 PL6 to Lid Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37

A.8

LH Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 A.8.1

LH Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 PL1 to Enclosure Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 PL2 to Display Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . A-40

(xxx)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

PL4 PL 4 to to Ma Main Ca Carr rria iag ge Fo Forw rwar ard d Lim Limit it Sen enssor . . . A-4 -40 0 A.9

Flexicable Distribution Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41 A.9.1

Flexicable Di Distribution Bo Boards Co Connectors . . . . A-42 PL4 to X-slide Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42 PL5 to Lightbar Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43 PL6 to X-slide Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43 PL7 to Focus Datum Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44

A.10 Di Display Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44

Appendix

Fault Diagnosis B.1

I mage Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Im B.1.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1.2

Lack of Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.1.3

Streaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Light Streaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Deep Streaks in Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.1.4

Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Compression or Stretching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

B.1.5

Tonal Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

B.1.6

Subtle Colour Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

B.1.7

Patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B.1.8

Cropping Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

B.1.9

Graininess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Analogue Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Lack of Smoothness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B.2

Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 B.2.1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

B.2.2

Symptom Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

B.2.3

Loss of Power Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xxxi)

 

Preliminaries

B.2.4

POST Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

B.2.5

Application Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

B.2.6

Image Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21

B.2.7

Diagnostic Test Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . .

Index-1

Figures Figure 1.1 C-550 Lanovia Scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Figure 1.2 C-550 Lanovia Scanner construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Figure 1.3 Electrical module locations within the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Figure 2.1 Figure 2.2 Figure 2.3 Figure 2.4 Figure 2.5

Warning label inside RFI box and on lamp-driver module . . . . . . . . . Serial rating label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning label in front of enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caution labels under main cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servo motor encoder labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Se . . .

2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-7

Figure 3.1 O Ov verview of system blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Figure 3.2 Transmission scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Figure 3.3 Transmission and reflection scan illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Figure 3.4 Mirror, lens mount and CCD mount (camera sub-assembly) . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.5 Tr Transmission illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.6 Reflection illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.7 Transmission format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.8 Reflection format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.9 CCD image sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.10 Electrical module locations within the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.11 CCD headboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.12 Digitizer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.13 Digitizer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3.14 Sy S ystem board block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(xxxii)

3-21 3-23 3-24 3-27 3-28 3-30 3-32 3-36 3-40 3-42 3-44

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Figure 3.15 Scanner image-data flow – original system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Figure 3.16 Scanner image-data flow – Kicker system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Figure 3.17 A stepper motor electronic block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Figure 3.18 Figure 3.19 Figure 3.20 Figure 3.21 Figure 3.22 Figure 3.23 Figure 3.24 Figure 3.25 Figure 3.26 Figure 3.27 Figure 3.28

Servo motor electronic blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L amp driver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . Lamp driver switched-mode PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp driver system board interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission lamp driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tr . . Reflection lamps driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light table lamps driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Li . . Flexicable sensor interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ribbon cable sensor interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-53 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-63 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-68

Figure 3.29 Figure 3.30 Figure 3.31 Figure 3.32 Figure 3.33 Figure 3.34 Figure 3.35

Flexicable distribution boards assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-Slide leadscrew backlash nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic of X-slide carriage interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enlargement drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus drive mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fo . . C-550 Lanovia scanner structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base and platen support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ba . .

3-71 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-81

Figure 4.1 Service tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Figure 4.2 Lightbar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Figure 4.3 Transmission lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Figure 4.4 Transmission lamp detector board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.5 Lightbar interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.6 Reflection Tray and Transmission Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.7 Stand covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.8 Enclosure fan filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.9 RFI box - removing cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.10 System board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.11 Removing and fitting the dongle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.12 WA WA 304 PSU and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.13 Sirius 250 PSU and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4.14 RFI-box cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

4-8 4-10 4-12 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-21 4-23 4-24 4-26

(xxxiii)

 

Preliminaries

Figure 4.15 Mains power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Figure 4.16 Lid gas-struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Figure 4.17 Lid assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

(xxxiv)

Figure 4.18 Figure 4.19 Figure 4.20 Figure 4.21 Figure 4.22 Figure 4.23 Figure 4.24 Figure 4.25 Figure 4.26 Figure 4.27 Figure 4.28

Opening the main cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection white-balance strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main-cover gas-struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workstation diagnostics display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carriage positions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mech - service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the main carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mo . . Main cover interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lid interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-34 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-43 4-45 4-47 4-49

Figure 4.29 Figure 4.30 Figure 4.31 Figure 4.32 Figure 4.33 Figure 4.34 Figure 4.35 Figure 4.36 Figure 4.37 Figure 4.38 Figure 4.39 Figure 4.40 Figure 4.41 Figure 4.42 Figure 4.43 Figure 4.44 Figure 4.45 Figure 4.46 Figure 4.47 Figure 4.48 Figure 4.49 Figure 4.50

Reeflection lamps assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . 4-51 Reflection lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Light table assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 LT lamps removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Lamp driver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Flexicables: 50-way and 62-way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Flexicable distribution boards assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Main carriage datum and reverse limit sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Main carriage left-end limit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Standby power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Display board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 LH distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 RH distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Leadscrew nut clamp plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Le . . 4-87 Main carriage leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Main leadscrew motor and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 C-bearing assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-94 C-bearing alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Main carriage wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Main carriage wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Figure 4.51 M Mo oving the X-slide carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 Figure 4.52 Moving the lens mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103 Figure 4.53 Moving the CCD mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104 Figure 4.54 Figure 4.55 Figure 4.56 Figure 4.57 Figure 4.58 Figure 4.59 Figure 4.60 Figure 4.61 Figure 4.62 Figure 4.63 Figure 4.64

X-slide leadscrew nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104 X-slide bearing alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X.  . . . . . .  .  4-106 X-slide carriage bearing on guide bar assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-108 X-slide guide bar alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X. . . . . . .  .  4-109 Digitizer board cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Di .  . . . . . .  .  4-110 Digitizer fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-111 Digitizer board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-113 Focus motor rack alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fo . . . . . . . 4-115 Focus motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-116 Focus datum sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-118 CCD baffle and enlargement sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-119

Figure 4.65 Figure 4.66 Figure 4.67 Figure 4.68 Figure 4.69 Figure 4.70

Enlargement leadscrew and clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-121 Enlargement motor and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-123 Cam follower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-125 X-slide datum sensor and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-127 X-slide leadscrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .  .  4-129 X-slide leadscrew motor and cable loom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  .  4-130

Figure 5.1 Figure 5.2 Figure 5.3 Figure 5.4

Menu Map for the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-up and software access diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal diagnostics opening screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elec/menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2 5-3 5-6 5-20

Figure 5.5 Terminal view of the mtr_sens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Figure 5.6 Terminal view of the lmp_sens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Figure 5.7 Terminal view of the sys_sens display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Figure 6.1 Figure 6.2 Figure 6.3 Figure 6.4 Figure 6.5 Figure 6.6 Figure 6.7

En E ngineer ’s Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lightbar alignment target, 75524070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment target fitted to the lightbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of interface plate adjustment screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineer ’s Calibration Chart on platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential focus bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-11 6-13 6-15

Figure 6.8 Placement of Engineer ’s Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20  Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xxxv)

 

Preliminaries

Figure 6.9 Registration bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Figure 6.10 Fitting registration bars to platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Figure 6.11 C-dot scanner calibration target on platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Figure 6.12 Swathe scanning calibration target on platen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Figure 6.13 6.13 Swathe scanning scanning calibration calibration target target on platen showing cross-h cross-hairs airs . . 6-39 Figure 7.1 Electronic Repro Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Figure 7.2 Engineer ’s Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Figure 7.3 Electronic repro image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Figure 8.1 Optical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Figure A.1 E Ellectrical module locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Figure A.2 Ar A rrangement of flexicables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Figure A.3 Ma M ain system interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Figure A.4 Distribution board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.5 Lamp driver board interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.6 PSU Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.7 System board layout: pre-Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.8 Ki Kicker System board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.9 CCD headboard layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Figure A.10 Digitizer board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Figure A.11 La Lamp driver board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Figure A.12 Lamp detector board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.13 RH distribution board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure A.14 LH distribution board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-5 A-6 A-7 A-9 A-10 A-21 A-24 A-28 A-34 A-35 A-38

Figure A.15 Flexicable distribution boards layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41 Figure A.16 LE LED display board layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44 Figure B.1 Figure B.2 Figure B.3 Figure B.4 Figure B.5 Figure B.6 Figure B.7

(xxxvi)

Laack of sharpness example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L Example of a light streak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tonal problem example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a cropping error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ex Example of graininess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Tables Table 3.1 En Enlargement resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 Table 5.1 Fl Flashing fault-lamp modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.2 Global commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.3 St Standard monitor commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.4 Se Servo motor test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.5 St Stepper motor test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.6 Display logs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.7 CPU_test menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.8 Sys_brd tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.9 SCSI_tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.10 dsp_tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.11 Sync_tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.12 mcb_brd tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.13 Dig_brd tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.14 Basic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.15 Function tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.16 la lamp_brd utilities and tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.17 Utils menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.18 Optics tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.19 Mechanical tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5.20 Service tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4 5-8 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-18 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-27 5-28 5-30 5-30 5-31 5-33 5-34 5-36 5-38 5-39

Table 6.1 Setup Menu Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Table 6.2 Carriage tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Table 6.3 Calibrate tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Table 7.1 SCSI Buffer identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Table A.1 Table A.2 Table A.3 Table A.4 Table A.5

PSU AC-connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . PSU DC-connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sy System board to LH distribution board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System board to RH distribution board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-7 A-8 A-11 A-12 A-13

Table A.6 System board to main carriage servo motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . A-14  Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

(xxxvii)

 

Preliminaries

Table A.7 System board board to traverse traverse distribution distribution board to to lamp driver board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.8 System board board to traverse traverse distribution distribution board to to digitizer board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.9 Fuses on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.10 Sw Switches on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Table A.11 LEDs on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Table A.12 Relays on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Table A.13 Links on system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Table A.14 CCD headboard to digitizer board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.15 Di D igitizer board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Table A.16 Enlargement datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.17 Enlargement motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A.18 Fo Focus motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .

A-15 A-17 A-19 A-19 A-19 A-20 A-20 A-22 A-25 A-25 A-26 A-26

Table A.19 Table A.20 Table A.21 Table A.22 Table A.23 Table A.24 Table A.25 Table A.26 Table A.27 Table A.28 Table A.29

Diigitizer fan connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D .  . . . . . . Digitizer board test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Di .  . . . . . . Lamp driver board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflection lamps connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission lamp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light table lamps connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp detector board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test points on lamp driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs on lamp driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LE .  . . . . . . LEDs on lamp driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LE .  . . . . . . Lamp detector connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . .

A-27 A-27 A-29 A-29 A-30 A-31 A-32 A-33 A-33 A-34 A-34

Table A.30 Table A.31 Table A.32 Table A.33 Table A.34 Table A.35 Table A.36 Table A.37 Table A.38 Table A.39 Table A.40

RH distribution board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage reverse limit sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main cover RH interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lid interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Li .  . . . . . . LH distribution board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure fan connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . En .  . . . . . . Display board connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Di .  . . . . . . Main cover LH interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main carriage forward limit sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors on Traverse and X-slide distribution boards . . . . . . . . . .

A-35 A-36 A-36 A-37 A-37 A-38 A-39 A-39 A-40 A-40 A-42

(xxxviii)

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Preliminaries

Table A.41 X X--Slide motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42 Table A.42 Lightbar interlock connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43 Table A.43 X-slide datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43 Table A.44 Focus datum sensor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44 Table B.1 Table B.2 Table B.3 Table B.4 Table B.5

Loss of power faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . POST failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  . . . . . . Application error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ap Image Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic test numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Engineer’ss Reference Guide 6700800003  Engineer’ 6700800003

B-10 B-11 B-12 B-21 B-24

(xxxix)

 

Preliminaries

Issue Records Chap

Pages

Issue

Date

Comments/Changes

Prelim 1 2 3

40 22 8 84

02 02 02 03

06/99 06/99 06/99 11/99

4

132

03

11/99

5

40

02

06/99

6

44

02

06/99

7 8 App A

48 12 44

02 02 03

06/99 06/99 11/99

Third issue Changes to Accessories Kit section Minor technical change New section on reading copymount details. Also revised for new system board and power supply Changes in replacement procedures for transmission lightbar, lightbar, the main carriage leadscrew + bearings, system board /  dongle and power supply. Also other minor changes. New procedure for moving stepper motor and changes to diagnosic commands Revised for differential focus adjustment, register bar calibration, C-dot calibrations and other changes Change to Electronic Repro procedure and other changes Non-technical change Changes for new system board and PSU

App B Index

28 8

02 02

06/99 06/99

Non-technical changes only Third issue

Note:

(xl)

The ISSUE ISSUE STA STATE of a document document or chapter is is indicated indicated by the last two digits digits of its document document number number (e.g. (e.g. the first first re-issue of document 6500123000 becomes 6500123001, and the second re-issue becomes 6500123002 etc.). A change of issue state indicates that substantial changes have been made to the document or chapter, although this does not necessarily mean that the contents of each page have changed.

C–550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

1

System Description This chapter provides a general overview of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner and describes its major features.

1.1

Overview of Features The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a versatile A3-format scanning system. The two major components are: • a Macintosh workstation, • the scanner.

Figure 1.1 shows the typical  C-550 Lanovia Scanner system. WORKSTATION

C-550 LANOVIA SCANNER

Figure Fig ure 1.1 C-5 C-550 50 Lano Lanovia via Scanner system

The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a floor-standing unit designed and styled to fit in a desktop publishing environment.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-1

 

System Description

The C-550 Lanovia Scanner will scan transmission and reflection originals up to a maximum size of 470 mm x 350 mm. The flush platen allows oversize originals to be scanned. The C-550 Lanovia Scanner will scan copy objects up to 4 mm thick, without removing the lightbar assembly (transmission-light source). For thicker copy or 3D objects, the lightbar assembly must be removed.

1.1.1

Workstation The function of the workstation is to control the scanner, provide workflow management and job setup tools, perform colour corrections and image sharpening processes on scanned images, and also report the status of the scanner. The workstation is also used to operate the diagnostic software, the system setup, the alignment and calibration software, and the electronic repro software. The workstation is connected to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner by a single-ended SCSI cable.

1.1.2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner The C-550 Lanovia system is an A3-size flatbed input scanner which supports a variety of scan techniques: • transmission copy, • reflection copy, • line-art, • 3D objects, • oversized originals.

Images are captured by a CCD image sensor, digitized, and then stored as image files.

1-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

The scanner has a horizontal fixed-glass platen. Scanning is performed by moving the camera head sub-assembly under the platen. Illumination for transmission copy is from a lightbar, mounted above the platen, which moves in unison with the mirror and the camera. The scanner will scan both reflection and transmission copy in sizes from 35 mm to A3. Copy may be mounted directly on to the platen or on special copy holders. The scanner provides an RS232 interface port for terminal diagnostics by way of a VT100 type terminal. The scanner has four casters. It also has two adjustable feet to raise the base and so fix its position. The scanner is provided with an extensive suite of diagnostics which are available to both the customer and the field service engineer. However, the customer does not have access to the terminal diagnostics facility.

1.1.3

Modules The design of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner allows the equipment to be built and serviced in modular form. Modules are available as field replaceable units (FRUs). The diagnostics test the functionality of the modules with a pass or fail status. The major physical modules are summarized in Figure 1.2. The electrical/electronic modules are summarized in Figure 1.3.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-3

 

System Description

LIGHTBAR ASSEMBLY MAIN CARRIAGE DRIVE

LAMP DRIVER MODULE REFLECTION LAMPS

PLATEN

MIRROR

LIGHT TABLE

CAMERA HEAD

ENLARGEMENT DRIVE STEPPER MOTORS

MAIN LEADSCREW MAIN CARRIAGE

FOCUS DRIVE

X-SLIDE LENS LEADSCREW X-SLIDE CARRIAGE

BASE AND STRUCTURE

Figure Fig ure 1.2 C-5 C-550 50 Lano Lanovia via Scanner construction

1-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

DIGITIZER BOARD

CCD HEADBOARD

LAMP DRIVER BOARD RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DISPLAY BOARD LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS RFI BOX REFER TO Figure 3.29 FOR FLEXICABLES

 

PSU MAIN SWITCH

STANDBY SWITCH SYSTEM BOARD

VIEWED FROM FRONT

Figure 1.3 1.3 Elect Electrical rical module module locations locations within within the scanner scanner

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-5

 

System Description

1.2

C-550 La Lanovia Scanner Modules 1.2.1

Introduction The scanner has several aspects of operation which influence its modular construction: • Mechanical, • Optical, • Electrical, • Electronics, • Interlocks and Sensors.

1.2.2

Mechanical Modules The mechanics involve the hardware modules which control the movements and positioning of the scanning components. The structure module provides the base for the main carriage, the platen supports and the positive pressure cooling fan. At the back  of the pedestal, the RFI box houses the PSU and system control electronics. The main carriage supports the X-slide carriage, the light table, and the Reflection column. The X-slide carriage supports the the camera-head assembly. This consists of the lens, the CCD mount and drive mechanisms mechanisms to enable accurate positionin positioning. g.

Main Carriage The main carriage moves in the slow scan direction. The forward direction is from right-to-left and the reverse direction is from left-to-right.

1-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

The datum and park positions of the main carriage are at the right-hand end of the scanner. The main carriage provides support for the X-slide drive mechanism.

X-slide Carriage The X-slide carriage provides the platform for the lens mount, the CCD-mount, and the stepper motors which position the camera for focussing and enlargement of the received image. The X-slide carriage supports the camera-head slide and trays. This carriage is moved to bring the centre line of the camera into alignment with the copy positioned on the platen.

Lens Mount This mount supports the lens which can be moved along the camera-head slide in a variable relation to the CCD mount. The lens mount is fixed to the enlargement leadscrew assembly which mechanically moves the mount along the camera-head slide. The lens is positioned by its own stepper motor in relationship with the CCD mount. The datum sensortoisthe situated under the camera head and itenlargement references the distance lens mount.

CCD Mount The CCD mount supports the CCD headboard, the digitizer board, two stepper motors, and the digitizer fan. The CCD mount is moved by the focus motor pinion along a fixed rack relative to the X-slide carriage. A focus-datum sensor is situated behind the enlargement motor and it references the position of the CCD mount.  Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-7 

 

System Description

1.2.3

Optical Components The optical components include: • Illumination system (fluorescent lamps), • Image forming system (mirror and lens), • Three-stripe CCD image sensor.

Illumination Three sources of light are provided. They are as follows: • Transmission lightbar, • Reflection lamps, • Light table.

Transmission Lamp The lightbar source provides variable illumination for transmission scanning. Transmission scanning uses a light source that is above the platen. Transmission light passes through the original which is placed on the platen.

Reflection Lamps The reflection lamps provide variable illuminatio illumination n for reflection scanning. Reflection scanning uses the illumination provided under the platen. Reflection light reflects off the original placed on the platen.

1-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

Light Table Lamps The light table source provides fixed illumination to the underside of a diffused sheet having grid lines. These grid lines have been provided to assist the user in mounting an original. The light table uses a front and a rear lamp to illuminate the underside of transparencies transparencies.. The diffuser sheet provides uniform illumination over the whole area of the platen.

Platen The glass platen supports originals, whether they are 2-dimensional or 3-dimensional objects. A portion of the platen is used for Transmission white-balance referencing. This area may be also used for reflection scanning but not transmission scanning.

Mirror Mount 

The fixed mirror is mounted on the main carriage at 45  to the platen face. The mounted mirror travels with the main carriage. The mirrored image is reflected to the lens of the camera.

Lens The lens is mounted on the lens mount and is moved by the enlargement drive-mechanism. Together the mirror and lens form an image of the copy, received through the platen, on the CCD array. The relative positions of  the copy, the lens, and the CCD array are controlled by the enlargement and focussing drive-mechanisms. The lens mount is a part of the X-slide carriage assembly.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-9

 

System Description

CCD Headboard The camera uses a tri-linear CCD sensor array. One line is used to detect redto spectral Another is used to detect the blue and thethe third detect region. the green. The CCD assembly is mounted on the CCD headboard which sits in front of the digitizer board. Both boards are housed in a metal enclosure which also supports a cooling fan.

1.2.4

Electrical Modules A single PSU provides all of the required DC voltages for the whole scanner system.

Power Supplies The power supply voltages produced are listed as follows: • +5 V Logic for system and digitizer boards, • +24 V Power for the motors, fans and lamps, • +18 V For the CCD and digitizer analogue circuits, • -12 V For the CCD and digitizer analogue circuits.

Lamp Driver Module The lamp driver module is located at the rear of the light table. It receives its +24 V supply from the system board by way of the flexicable distribution system. Power to all five fluorescent lamps is delivered from the lamp-driver module.

1-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

Lamp Driver Control The light-table lamps have a fixed intensity level, whereas the transmission and reflection lamps have dimmer and detection controls. The transmission and reflection lamps have opto-sensors to measure the presence and intensity of light.

Main Carriage Servo Motor The DC-servo motor encoder drives the leadscrew which traverses the main carriage. The encoder output is 2,000 clock  pulses per rotation. With such accuracy the main carriage can be positioned in steps of 1 micron.

X-slide Carriage Stepper Motor The X-slide stepper-motor drives the leadscrew which traverses the X-slide carriage. One rotation of the pinion is completed in 400 half-steps. One step (running in half-step mode) moves the carriage by 10 microns.

Enlargement Stepper Motor The enlargement stepper-motor drives the leadscrew which traverses the lens mount along the camera slide. One rotation of  the pinion is completed in 400 half-steps. One step (running in half-step mode) moves the lens mount by 10 microns.

Focus Stepper Motor The focus stepper-motor uses a rack and pinion drive to traverse the CCD mount along the camera slide. One rotation of the pinion is completed in 800 quarter-steps. One step (running in quarter-step mode) moves the CCD mount by 15.707 microns.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-11

 

System Description

Fans There are three cooling fans. They are used as follows: • The enclosure fan is internally located at the left-hand end of 

the base and structure assembly. If the safety interlocks are activated, then the fan is disabled. • The RFI box fan is located at the rear of the scanner. • The digitizer fan is located on the backplate of the digitizer

module.

1.2.5

Electronic Co Components The electronics involve thewhich hardware on the printed circuit boards and the interfacing control synchronize the mechanics and optics to produce the required imaging output.

System Board The system board is the central control board of the scanner and has the functional blocks described below. It also provides the plug for the connection of the dongle which enables Sprint funtionality.

System Controller This system controller manages all operating functions and communication links with all of the other control blocks.

FLASH Memory The system controller uses FLASH memory. The FLASH memory is divided into the following sections: • Application software,

1-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

• Diagnostic software, • System profile data from the calibration tests.

The contents of the FLASH memory can be changed by the system controller by downloading new data from the workstation.

Sensors and Interlock Control The system board contains the circuits for the scanner interlock  system.

Image Processor The image processor performs the image processing functions, using a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).

SCSI Controller The SCSI controller controls the SCSI communications link with the workstation.

Motion Control The system board contains the motion circuits that control the servo motor and the three stepper motors. The three stepper-motor drives are identical except for their resolution, which is quarter or half-step. They drive the X-slide carriage leadscrew, the focus rack, and the enlargement leadscrew.

Synchronization Control Synchronization ensures that lines of the image data are captured Synchronization at the correct position in the scan.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-13

 

System Description

Environment Environme nt Monitoring The system board contains circuits that perform voltage monitoring and temperature sensing.

CCD Headboard The CCD headboard buffers the CCD clock signals. It also connects the signal outputs to the digitizer board.

Digitizer Board The digitizer board is part of the camera head and it provides the front-end analogue electronics for the CCD array.

Digitizer Board Monitoring The digitizer board contains circuits that perform voltage monitoring and temperature sensing.

Display Board The display board has three LEDs to indicate status conditions. The three display LEDs are used as follows: • Status reporting while in boot mode, • Scanner operating states, • Power.

1.2.6

Interlocks an and Se Sensors Interlocks and sensors are used to:

1-14

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

• provide safety switching of motor driven mechanisms, lamps

and the fan when the lid or main cover is opened, • provide datum and limit sensing of the moving carriages.

The transmission lightbar has a switch interlock to indicate the presence of the lightbar. This interlock activates the lid interlocks. The magnetic lid interlocks prevent the operation of the main carriage drive when the lid is opened and the lightbar is present. The magnetic main cover interlocks prevent the operation of all mechanical parts, the enclosure fan and fluorescent lamps whenever the main cover is opened.

Datum Sensors The main carriage, X-slide carriage, lens mount, and CCD mount each have a datum sensor to initialize the carriage positions when the scanner is booted up.

Limit Sensors The main carriage has limit sensors to cut the supply of power to its servo motor under fault conditions.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-15

 

System Description

1.3

C-550 La Lanovia Sc Scanner Di Diagnostics 1.3.1

Introduction There are two levels of diagnostics diagnostics.. They are the workstation diagnostics and the terminal diagnostics.

Workstation Diagnostics Diagnosti cs The workstation diagnostics are used by both the customer and the field-service engineer. Communication between the workstation and the scanner is via the single-ended SCSI link.  Note: Using this method, it is only possible to run a subset of the terminal diagnostics. For access to the full set, refer to the terminal diagnostics section.

The workstation diagnostics diagnostics can perform most of the available tests and it can use its SCSI buffers to either upload existing program code from the system board or download new code to a remote facility.

Terminal Diagnostics Dia gnostics The terminal diagnostics program is only available to the field service engineer. With a RS232 cable fitted, the scanner can run its own diagnostic routines using either a remote terminal or a terminal-emulation program that runs on a Macintosh or PC. The terminal diagnostics program can run the complete range of  tests. Chapter 5 covers the use of the terminal-diagnostic routines. Chapter 6 covers the use of the alignment and calibration routines via the Setup menu of the diagnostics program. Chapter 7 covers the workstation-diagnostics menus and access paths.

1-16

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

1.4

System Fault Diagnosis 1.4.1

Introduction System faults are broadly categorized into four levels (See Appendix B). • Non-active scanners in which the power supply - or the

system processor - has completely failed. • Power-up Self Test (POST) failures which are discovered by

the boot routines. • Error message reporting at the workstation. • Image defects which affect the quality of the scan even

though the scanner passes all of the diagnostic tests.

1.4.2

Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic tests are provided to test most of the field replacement units (FRUs). A systematic approach to diagnostics is as follows: • If the scanner develops a fault, run the diagnostic tests. • The diagnostic tests will detect many of the electrical, optical,

and mechanical problems and so help to identify the relevant unit that is associated with the failure. Always investigate the first test to fail. • If the diagnostic tests all pass, then it is probably an optical or

a mechanical problem. Refer to Appendix B for fault diagnosis guidelines. • Special care must be exercised to maintain the cleanliness

standards of all the optical components. components. • Within the scanning application that operates on the

workstation, error messages are raised when a problem with the scanner is detected.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-17 

 

System Description

1.5

Alignment and Calibration 1.5.1

Introduction The alignment and calibration procedures procedures are only run after a successful pass of the diagnostic tests. These procedures are first run at the factory after the scanner has been built. They are then run when either an important FRU has to be replaced with a new unit and after scan failures have been reported. The alignment and calibration procedures provide valuable feedback for making the required mechanical adjustments. The calibration procedures measure the various characteristics of the scanner for producing a system profile. This system profile is then used during each scan operation. When certain units have to be replaced with new units, it is necessary to run some, or all, of the alignment and calibration procedures to rebuild the system profile. The camera-head assembly which is mounted on the X-slide carriage is pre-aligned in a special test rig at the factory. factory.

1.5.2

Alignment and Ca Calibration When certain modules have been replaced, it is necessary to use the appropriate software to set up the various alignments and calibrations which ensure the scanner system operates correctly. The calibration task assists a user to measure any inaccuracies in the scanner system operation, so that a characterization profile can be used to alter the raw data that is stored in FLASH memory. However, the service engineer may need to perform setup procedures using the workstation diagnostics diagnostics software.

1-18

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

1.6

Worksta tati tio on Dia Diagnostics an and El Electr tro onic Re Repro 1.6.1

Workstation Di Diagnostics Workstation diagnostics are completed across the SCSI link. The purpose is to perform a selection of the diagnostic tests that are available on the scanner.

1.6.2

Electronic Re Repro The purpose of electronic repro test is to check that the scanner can produce images of the required quality. Electronic repro of a tests seriesare of able software tests performed on a scanned testconsists image. The to identify subtle image quality faults, such as jitter on sharp edges, noise, or flare, which cannot be detected using other diagnostics. See Section 7.6 for more information information..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-19

 

System Description

1.7

Accessory Kit The accessory kit comprises the following: • a long registration bar, • a selection of coded copyholders, • an A3 cover glass.

1.7.1

Long Registration Bar The two registration bars fit into the registration holes on the platen surround. The short bar (supplied as basic equipment) fits on the right-hand edge of the platen and the long bar fits along the rear edge of the platen. 

The two bars provide a 90  corner into which the copyholders can be located.

1.7.2

Coded Copyholders Coded copyholders enable automatic image cropping of  transparencies. They have a series of holes moulded along the edges of the holder. When the scanner lid is closed a platen scan is performed and the orientation, location and size of any holders present is detected. As with the earlier copymounts, the copyholders allow transparencies to be mounted off-line and the holders can be placed quickly on the platen without the need for accurate positioning. A range of copyholder sizes provide an opaque surround suitable for common transparency sizes. This eliminates the need for masking the platen.

1-20

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

System Description

1.7.3

A3 Cover Glass The cover glass is used to hold flat transmission originals. The glass has an anti-Newton ring coating.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

1-21

 

System Description

1-22

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

2

Safety Practices This chapter explains the Fujifilm recommended safety guidelines  for completing any approv approved ed form of maintenance maintenance or  modification to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner , its interlock strategy, and its antistatic precautions. This chapter  must be read before any work is performed.

2.1

Health and Safety at Work All personnel are advised to familiarize themselves with any local or national legislation relating to health and safety at work. Particular attention should be given to those sections covering personal responsibility regarding safe working practices which must be strictly observed at all times. This chapter explains the safety conventions used in this manual and highlights safety practices specific to this equipment. It also covers the interlocking systems to protect the scanner, the user, and the service engineer from any harm due to normal, or foreseeable abnormal circumstances.

2.1.1

Warnings an and Ca Cautions There are two safety categories: • WARNINGS are given for conditions which may endanger

life. • CAUTIONS are given for conditions which may cause

damage to equipment or materials.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800001 6700800001

2-1

 

Safety Practices

2.2

Site Safety Most accidents can be avoided if you follow these simple rules. • Familiarize yourself with the location of the main and

standby switches on the scanner and all equipment on/off  switches. • Always obey the warnings, cautions, and any other

instructions included in this guide, and in other associated equipment manuals. • Never attempt to perform procedures that are not included in

this guide. • Always perform the replacement procedures as recommend recommended ed

in this guide.

2.2 .2..1

Safe fety ty Sig ign ns, La Labels ls,, an and In Indic ica ato torrs Safety labels are fitted to the equipment to warn you of potential hazards. These labels must not be defaced or removed. Typical warning labels, for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner, are shown in Figure 2.1, Figure 2.2, Figure 2.3, and Figure 2.4. Attention! high tension Vorsicht! Hochspannung Precaution! haute tension Precaucion! alta tension

Figure 2.1 2.1 War Warning ning label label inside RFI box box and on lamp-driver lamp-driver module module

2-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Safety Practices

92206 CONFORMS TO UL STD 1950

Product:

C-550 Lanovia

Model No:

75484700A0

Serial No:

C550ANnnnn

Volts

110/230 V

50/60 Hz

~

Max Current:

4/2 A

Manufactured:

May 1999

Thisisdevice complies with Parttwo 15 conditions: of the FCC rules and subject to the following 1. This device may not cause any harmful harmful interference. and 2. This device must accept any interference interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causin Interference-Causingg EquipmentRegulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. FUJIFILM ELECTRONIC IMAGING LTD. PETERBOROUGH ENGLAND 7550 878D 01 Figure Fig ure 2.2 2.2 Ser Serial ial rati rating ng label label

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800001 6700800001

2-3

 

Safety Practices

WARNING MOVING PARTS KEEP LOOSE CLOTHING, HAIR, AND JEWELLERY ETC. CLEAR. 7541-5800

Figure 2.3 War Warning ning label label in front front of enclosure enclosure fan fan

CAUTION PINCH POINT

KEEP HANDS CLEAR ELOIGNER LES MAINS HÄNDE FERNHALTEN TENERE LE MANI AL SICURO MANTENGA LAS MANOS ALEJADAS

Figure 2.4 Cautio Caution n labels labels under under main main cover cover

2-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Safety Practices

2.3

General Precautions The following basic precautions apply to the scanner, and also to its associated equipment.

WARNING  Do not attempt to equipment by yourself.

2.3.1

lift

heavy

Safety Devices Read all warning labels as shown in Figure 2.1 to Figure 2.4. Make sure that all safety controls, such as the interlocks, are working correctly:

CAUTION   Do NOT attempt to override, negate,  or bypass any of the safety devices.

• Always close covers to prevent internal access. • Avoid leaving electrical cables trailing where anyone may trip

over them. • Make sure that servicing is undertaken only by authorized

personnel (i.e. trained by Fujifilm).

2.3.2

Unattended Equipment Never leave equipment unattended unless it is in a safe condition.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800001 6700800001

2-5

 

Safety Practices

2.4

Electrical Safety Electrical safety is ensured by interlocks, which make access to ‘live’ parts impossible without the intentional use of tools. High tension exists inside the lamp driver module. A double-pole isolating switch, located on the RFI box, is marked ‘1’ and ‘0’. All mains voltages are contained within the main RFI box. There is an additional low-voltage low-voltage standby switch located at the front right-hand corner of the scanner. The power-on green LED is extinguished when the standby switch is activated.

WARNING  Hazardous voltages exist behind the  protective covers. Do not remove any  protective cover, unless directly instructed to do so by this guide. • Do not move or lift the unit while it is switched on or

connected to its electrical supply. •

Regularly, damaged. verify that the mains cable is not worn or • Make sure that water and other liquids do not come into

contact with the scanner or its associated equipment. • Do not attempt to operate the equipment while flammable or

volatile substances are present in the atmosphere. • Make sure that electrical servicing is undertaken only by

skilled personnel authorized by Fujifilm.

2-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Safety Practices

2.5

Mechanical Safety Mechanical safety is ensured by making access to moving parts impossible without the intentional use of tools. It is possible to trap fingers at the back by the light-bar support, when the lid is open. Care must be taken while changing lamps. Mechanical damage may result, if the traversing lightbar assembly hits an object on the platen.

2.6

Antistatic Pr Precautions Apply the full antistatic practices when handling any PCB or similar static sensitive devices. This includes the main carriage servo motor.

WARNING Precision Optical Encoder Fitted Handle With Care Do Not Strike Shaft

Figure 2.5 Servo motor encode encoderr labels labels

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800001 6700800001

2-7 

 

Safety Practices

2.7

Interlock Strategy The strategy is to de-activate the associated interlock by removing the 24 V supply to de-energize the isolating relay, and so remove the supply of power: • to the electronic systems that control all moving parts, and • to all lamps.

When the main cover is opened (mainly for changing the lamps) the high-voltage supply to the lamps and the enclosure fan is disabled. All motors are disabled to prevent powered movement. If the lightbar is fitted, then main carriage motor will not move until the lid is closed. If the lightbar is not fitted, f itted, the main carriage motor will move, whether the lid is open or closed.

2.8

Lamp Driver Precautions The lamp driver module is contained within a metal enclosure that is located on the rear support of the main carriage. High voltages, for driving the lamps, are generated on board. Lamp wiring and holders are located behind suitable protection which prevents the operator from touching any contacts.

2-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

3

Functional Description This chapter provides a description of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner and its major functions for the hardware modules.

3.1

System Overview 3.1.1

Introduction The C-550 Lanovia Scanner is a flatbed scanner, which uses the three-plane (x, y, and z) principle to give high-resolution scanning over the entire platen and focus at any point above the platen. The scanner has a stationary platen for placing various types of  original, or objects, to be scanned. A copy holder kit is provided to mount various sizes of media up to 4 mm above the platen. Illumination is by fluorescent lamps which have apertures to concentrate the intensity of light. Scans can be either transmission or reflection copies from multiple 35 mm originals to a single A3 original. The A3 original can only be mounted in the landscape orientation. The largest portrait original is the A4 size. Since the original is stationary, the scanning system has to traverse (normally from right to left) during the scanning process. The X-slide carriage can position the camera anywhere across the width of the platen for high resolution scanning.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-1

 

Functional Description

LIGHTBAR ASSEMBLY MAIN CARRIAGE DRIVE

LAMP DRIVER MODULE REFLECTION LAMPS

PLATEN

MIRROR

LIGHT TABLE

CAMERA HEAD

MAIN LEADSCREW

ENLARGEMENT DRIVE

MAIN CARRIAGE

STEPPER MOTORS

FOCUS DRIVE X-SLIDE LENS LEADSCREW X-SLIDE CARRIAGE

BASE AND STRUCTURE

Figure 3.1 Overv Overview iew of of system system blocks blocks

3-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

3.1.2

System Operation The CCD headboard is fixed to a moveable CCD mount and its lens is fixed to a lens mount. Both mounts are independently moved along the camera slide by two dedicated stepper motors. The camera slide is positioned parallel to the front of the scanner. The CCD mount is moved by the focus stepper-motor, and the lens mount is moved by the enlargement stepper-motor. These units are collectively known as the ‘camera head’ sub-assembly sub-assemb ly and they are an integral part of the X-slide carriage assembly. The camera head is traversed along its slide from left to right. The X-slide carriage is moved independently independently by a leadscrew and drive system. The X-slide leadscrew is turned by the X-slide stepper-motor. front to back. The X-slide carriage traverses along a guide from The X-slide carriage is mounted on the main carriage assembly which is driven by a leadscrew mechanism. mechanism. The main carriage is moved by the main leadscrew that is driven by a DC servo-motor This has an integral encoder for closed-loop control. control. When the scanner is ready, an original piece of film or media is placed on the platen. The scan details are planned at the workstation and the application software instructs the scanner to perform the required scanning process. From the original piece of film or media, either a transmissio transmission n or a reflection image is mirrored to the lens of the camera. The camera head is moved to its optimum position on the X-slide carriage. The X-slide carriage is then moved to centralize the camera with the centre of the mirrored image. The X-slide carriage is now set up for the scanning process. The DC servo-motor moves the main carriage forward and the CCD captures the image one line at a time as each line is imaged onto it. As each scanned line is processed to the workstation display, so the image begins to develop until the original is fully scanned.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-3

 

Functional Description

3.1.3

Optical System The functions of the optical system are concerned with the following: • All aspects of illuminatio illumination, n, • An original on the platen, • The mirror, • The lens, • The CCD baffle, • The CCD.

3.1.4

Electronics The electronics can be divided functionally into five main areas: • Power supply and distribution, • System control, • Image data path, • Motion control, •

Illumination system.

Power Supply and Distribution The scanner is powered from a single power supply unit (PSU) connected to the AC mains. The mains switch located at the bottom right-hand side of the scanner is only normally used to completely power down the machine e.g. when a service is required. The remote standby switch is also connected to the PSU. This disables all the DC outputs from the PSU but leaves the AC mains connected.

3-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

The PSU DC outputs are distributed to the rest of the scanner via the system board. The exception is the RFI box fan which is directly connected to the PSU output. The system board also provides a connection from the signal andthe power grounds to chassis ground. The DC outputs provide following functions: • Digital +5 V supply for the system board, the digitizer board

and the distribution boards to power the sensors. • Analogue +18 V and -12 V supplies for the digitizer board.

The system board also regulates the +18 V supply down to +11.5 V for the digitizer board. • +24 V supply for the motors, the lamp driver board and the

enclosure fan.

System Control The scanner is controlled via commands issued from the workstation across the SCSI link. All of the operations of the scanner are controlled and monitored by a Motorola 68332 microprocessor. The control functions are as follows: • Set up and control the devices on the system board i.e. the

SCSI controller, the DSP and the motor controllers, • Set up and control the digitizer board, lamp driver board, and

the display board, • Synchronize the scanned lines received from the digitizer

with the main carriage servo-motor drive,

• Control stop/start when the workstation cannot remove data

quickly enough, • Monitor all sensors and safety interlocks.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-5

 

Functional Description

Image Data Path Image data is generated by the CCD and passes through the CCD headboard, digitizer board, system board, and finally to the workstation where the image is stored on disk. Light from the original is directed onto a 3-line CCD where it is converted into red, green, and blue voltage outputs. The voltage levels are proportional to the original light intensities. These analogue signals are buffered by the CCD headboard and then passed to the digitizer board. The digitizer board conditions the signal levels and multiplexes the RGB channels into a single serial stream. This is then fed through an analogue to digital converter to generate a digital output. The digital data, multiplexed as sequential RGB is passed down a flexicable to the system board. A digital signal processor (DSP) on the system board is used to manipulate the digital data into a suitable form for the workstation. Some of the functions performed by the DSP are black and white balance, line cropping, line reversal, and thresholding of line-art data. Since there is a physical gap between the RGB lines on the CCD, the data needs to be realigned within the DSP. This is implemented using memory on the DSP which stores sufficient lines so that realigning can be done. The memory is also used to store intermediate calculations from the DSP e.g. when averaging data across scan lines. The DSP then passes the data through the SCSI interface and down a SCSI cable to the workstation.

Motion Control All the mechanisms within the scanner are controlled by electronic drivers on the system board. The mechanisms which are driven are: • Main carriage using a DC servo motor, • X-slide using a stepper motor, • Optical enlargement using a stepper motor,

3-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

• Focus using a stepper motor.

Since the CCD is a linear array, the camera must be traversed across the image during scanning. A brushed DC servo-motor is used to drive the main carriage. The motor has an optical encoder built in which indicates its position. The system board uses a servo controller and a power-driver stage to control the motor, with the encoder providing feedback. Software is used to control the positioning, velocity, and acceleration of the motor. A datum sensor is used to indicate the home position of the motor. Forward and reverse limit switches prevent the main carriage from being driven into the mechanical end stops. The scanner can scan at the maximum resolution for originals placed anywhere on the platen. This is implemented by moving the camera across the platen on a X-slide carriage that is driven by a stepper motor. Software is used to control the number of  steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor. Optical enlargement is adjusted by varying the lens-to-CCD distance. A stepper motor controlled by a driver on the system board varies the distance. Software is used to control the number of steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor. Focus is adjusted by varying the lens-to-mirror distance. A stepper motor controlled by a driver on the system board varies the distance. Software is used to control the number of steps, direction, velocity, and acceleration applied to the motor.

Illumination System The electronic system is required to drive five fluorescent lamps. These are as follows: • Transmission lamp, • Reflection lamps (2 off), • Light table lamps (2 off).

The lamp-driver board drives all 5 lamps. The lamp-driver board is powered from the +24 V supply, routed via the system board interlocks and down the flexicables. Control signals are also passed down the cables which switch the lamps on and off and  Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-7 

 

Functional Description

control the lamp brightness. The +24 V supply is converted into +320 V DC using a switch mode power supply. This is then chopped and applied to the lamps via ballast circuits. The transmission lamp is preheated by applying a voltage to the lamp cathodes. This ensures rapid starting. A ballast circuit is used to generate a constant arc current through the lamp when it lights up. The lamp brightness is controlled by varying the arc current. This is implement implemented ed by varying the chopped frequency applied to the ballast. An optical-detector diode is used to monitor the brightness of the lamp. This is passed back to the lamp-driver board, converted into digital form and fed back to the system board. The system board monitors the lamp brightness and adjusts the arc current to maintain a constant brightness using closed-loop feedback control. The optical-detecto optical-detectorr diode feedback  is also used in diagnostics to prove that the lamp is working. The reflection lamps work a similar way except there is a separate detector diode for in each lamp. Both signalsthat are passed back to the system board where they are summed in software. Only one signal is passed back to control the average lamp currents. The light table lamps do not have detector diodes and can only be switched on or off at full brightness. Diagnostics cannot be used to prove that the lamps are working. This must be done visually.

3.1.5

Structure The structure of the scanner has been designed to provide suitable supports for the major assemblies and to enclose them with covers to keep out dirt, dust and moisture.

3.1.6

Electrical Re Reference Data All data relating to the layouts of boards and their associated connectors, links, LEDs, fuses, and cable looms are available in Appendix A.

3-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

3.1.7

Fault Diagnosis Failure charts are available in Appendix B.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-9

 

Functional Description

3.2

System Operation 3.2.1

Introduction This section describes the basic principles of the scanner, and follows the sequence of operations necessary to perform a scan.

3.2.2

Basic Principles The scanner has the following functional features: • Line scan CCD camera, •

Fixed platen, moving camera scanning, • Fluorescent illumination, • Variable magnification optics, • Autofocus, • X-Slide carriage movemen movement, t, • Three-stripe CCD colour separation,

re-alignment,, • Image re-alignment • Graphics and line-art scanning, • Automatic calibration system, • Control system.

Line Scan CCD Camera The scanner uses a line-scan system. This means that the optical system can read only one line of the image at a time. The complete image is built up by moving the optical system relative to the original, one line at a time. The line-scan optical system, also called the camera, consists of a CCD and a lens. The CCD

3-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

converts light intensity intensity into an electrical signal for one line at a time. The lens focuses one line of the original onto the CCD. TRANSMISSION LIGHTBAR

CCD HEADBOARD ‘CAMERA HEAD’

LENS

MIRROR

Figure 3.2 Tr Transmis ansmission sion scanni scanning ng

 Note: The platen remains remains stationary while the illumination illumination and  optical elements move in unison.

Fixed Platen - Moving Camera Scanning The original is stationary on a fixed, horizontal glass platen, and the line-scan optical system is moved underneath it by an electro-mechanical system using a leadscrew and servo motor. So that the camera can be fitted more easily into the space available, a mirror is used; this means that the camera can be mounted horizontally, but still look up at the underside of the platen via the mirror.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-11

 

Functional Description

Fluorescent Illumination Two sources of illumination are provided. Transparent originals must be illuminated from above, and reflective originals from below. In each case, only the single line of the original that is being read needs to be illuminated, so a long, thin light source is used.

Variable Magnification Magnifi cation Optics To read the whole of the platen, the optical system must be designed so that the whole width of the platen is imaged onto the length of the CCD. However, because the CCD has limited resolving power, this is not ideal when originals much smaller that the platen are being scanned. To get the best performance, the optical system is made variable, so that the width of original which is imaged onto the length of the CCD is controllable over a wide range. To achieve this the components of the camera, the lens and CCD are independently positioned.

Autofocus Having the lens and CCD moveable also allows the camera to be able to focus on originals which are not actually in contact with the platen, for example a picture in a frame. To find the best focus position, a part of the original is imaged at a number of different positions of the lens and CCD and a special algorithm applied to the data read to determine the sharpness for each position. The algorithm then uses interpolation to find the position for best sharpness.

X-Slide Carriage Movement When the optical system is set to image less than the full width of  the platen, there will be areas of the platen which cannot be read. To overcome this, another mechanism is used to drive the camera from side-to-side over the width of the platen, so that the camera 3-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

is able to use its high-resolution setting on a small original anywhere on the platen.

Three-Stripe CCD Colour Separation To read colour information in a single pass, the scanner uses a CCD that has three lines of optical sensors in the same device, very close together. Each CCD stripe has a colour filter in front of  it, one red, one green, and one blue.

Image Re-alignment The data produced by the CCD during a scan is not in the same format that is required in the output image file. The most important difference is that, as the red, green and blue colour channels are read by three lines of CCD elements that are close together, but not co-incident, it is necessary to delay the signal from two of the lines so that they are properly aligned with the third line. It may also be necessary to select only part of each line, or reverse the order along the line, to suit the output required. All of this is done by a special format processor known as the DSP that is within the system board. After the formatting, the image data are passed out of the scanner over the output interface.

Graphics and Line-art Scanning When scanning colour images, such as photographs, the C-550 Lanovia Scanner converts the image into a digital representation with a colour value at each pixel. It is also capable of operating in a line-art mode, in which internal software thresholding thresholding replaces each pixel value with just a single-bit on-off value.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-13

 

Functional Description

Reading Copyholder Details When the top lid is closed a scan of the platen is performed to detect the position, orientation and size of any copyholders. This data is obtained from the coded holes along the edge of the copyholders. For successful detection it is necessary that the first copyholder is positioned to top right of the platen (as viewed from the front of  the scanner) and located with its edges against the horizontal and vertical registration edges. Subsequent copyholders must first be butted against this copyholder, then against each other to form a regular pattern. Copyholders Copyholders may be rotated r otated in 90 degree increments to obtain optimum image orientation. When called for by the application software this data is processed to display the crop areas (the windows in the copyholders) on the platen display in the Acquire Image window.

Automatic Calibration System There are two levels of automatic calibration within the scanner. One level is operated on every scan, and is designed to compensate for irregularities in the optical system, and the other is operated at manufacture and in certain service situations, and is designed to compensate for mechanical tolerances. The once-per-scan calibration comprises the following: • exposure control, • black balance, • white balance.

Exposure control adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD to match the available illumination, ensuring that the best use is made of the operating range of the CCD. Black balance is used to cancel the variation in dark signal from the CCD. It is measured by putting the CCD into the dark, and measuring the response of each CCD element. This value is then used to correct that element during the following scan.

3-14

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

White balance is used to cancel the combined effects of CCD sensitivity variation and the illumination being non-uniform. The CCD is shown the illumination at the white point (clear platen for transmission and a white stripisfor reflection)This and the correction factor for each CCD element determined. value is then used to correct that element during the following scan. This process is very sensitive. Any errors built in during the balance procedures will affect the same pixel all through the scan, causing streaks. The service calibrations are designed to reduce the amount of  mechanical setting up required, both in the factory and in the field, when major components are changed. By scanning a special chart, the scanner is able to measure various critical dimensions, and save them in the non-volatile storage. These settings are then used during all subsequent scans.

Control System All of the operations of the scanner are controlled and monitored by a microprocessor system that is located on the system board.

3.2.3

Sequence of of Sc Scanning Op Operations A scan is initiated by a scan request sent from the workstation. On receipt of the request, the following functional operations occur in sequence: • Stabilize lamps, • X-slide setting, • Enlargement setting, • Focus setting, • Exposure control, • Autofocus, • Black balance,

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-15

 

Functional Description

• White balance, • Scan control, • Lamp control.

Stabilize Lamps If necessary, the appropriate lamp (reflection or transmission) is switched on, and the other switched off. The scan carriage remains at the park position while the brightness of the lamps is monitored by the optical feedback sensors. When the lamp is sufficiently sufficientl y stable for the type of scan to be performed (e.g. overview, preview, or high-resolution), the lamp control system is set and the next operation is initiated. Once the lamp is stable, this step is omitted until the next time the lamp is switched on.

X-Slide Setting The X-slide carriage is moved to bring the centre-line of the camera into line with the centre-line of the area of platen to be scanned. This movement may overlap the following two movements.

Enlargement Setting The enlargement drive is moved to the pre-set position for the optical magnification required for the scan.

Focus Setting The focus drive is moved to the pre-set position for the optical magnification required. required. This position will focus the camera either onto the surface of the platen or on the grain of the original.

3-16

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

Exposure Control The carriage is moved to the white balance position and the exposure control on the CCD is checked and adjusted if necessary to suit the light level.

Autofocus The carriage is moved to the centre of the region to be scanned and the camera is focused onto the copy. This step is omitted in overview and preview scans.

Black Balance The carriage is moved to the black-balance area and, for reflection scans only, the lamp is switched off briefly, for the CCD black compensation to be set up.

White Balance The carriage is moved to the white-balance area for the CCD white compensation to be set up.

Scan The carriage is then re-positioned close to the start point of the area to be scanned. The servo and CCD are synchronized, and the carriage is run up to the start of scan. At the start-of-scan point, image data start to flow from the CCD through the image processor (DSP) (see Figure 3.15) and out through the SCSI interface to the workstation. If, during a scan, the workstation is unable to accept data from the scanner, the flow will stop, and the scanner will back up. When the workstation becomes ready to accept further f urther data, the

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-17 

 

Functional Description

servo and CCD are again synchronized, run up to speed, and data flow re-started with the next line after the stop.

Lamp Control At the end of a scan, the carriage is returned to the park position. The lamps are switched according to a set of rules designed to minimise the waiting time before the next scan. If the scanner is unused for two hours, the lamp or lamps will switch off to save power and extend their life.

3-18

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

3.3

Optical System 3.3.1

Introduction The optical system comprises the following components: • Illumination - transmission, reflection, and light table, • Platen, • Mirror, • Lens, • CCD Image Sensor.

Originals, mounted on the platen surface, are illuminated by fluorescent lamps. A single fluorescent lamp, used for transmission scanning, is mounted in a removable lightbar that sits above the platen. Two fluorescent lamps, used for reflection scanning, are mounted in a tray that sits on the reflection column of the main carriage which is under the platen.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-19

 

Functional Description

Figure 3.3 3.3 Tr Transmi ansmission ssion and reflec reflection tion scan illumin illumination ation

A further pair of fluorescent lamps, together together with a reflector and diffusing sheet comprise the light-table which sits below the platen. The light table lamps help the operator to mount originals on the platen. A mirror, located on the end of the main carriage, reflects the optical path through 90 . The function of the mirror is to compact the optical system. 

The fixed focal-length lens forms an image of the original at the CCD. The CCD has a linear array of three channels. One channel for red (R), another for green (G), and the third for blue (B). The CCD image sensor is mounted on the CCD headboard. The lens is housed on the lens mount and the CCD headboard is housed on the CCD mount. Both mounts are independently moved along the same camera slide so that they maintain alignment at different optical resolutions.

3-20

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

Figure 3.4 Mirror Mirror,, lens mount mount and CCD mount mount (camera sub-assembly)

To achieve high quality scans over the specified range of  resolutions, the system software has the ability to change the optical magnification over a wide range of settings. The camera sub-assembly is a part of the X-slide carriage assembly. The electro-mechanical X-slide assembly can move the camera sub-assembly to any position across the width of the platen. These functions, in conjunction with the main (scan) carriage movements, allow high resolution scans to be performed anywhere on the whole surface area of the platen.

3.3.2

Illumination Illumination is provided by five aperture fluorescent lamps. A single lamp is used for transmission scanning, a pair of lamps are used for reflection scanning, and another pair of lamps are used for the light table. All lamps are of an identical type. The uniformity of illumination, over the full field width at all resolutions, is better than 2:1. This allows the full dynamic range to be achieved anywhere on the platen. Illumination uniformity is

Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-21

 Engineer s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3 21

 

Functional Description

affected by the lamp output, the lens quality, and the CCD non-uniformity. Fluorescent lamps are susceptible to light output and colour variations during the warm-up period of the lamps. An adequate time period, and the use of closed-loop control, allows the lamps to stabilize before a scanning operation is begun. Feedback opto-detectors, opto-detectors, in the transmission and reflection lamp circuits, monitor the light levels and provide the feedback needed for closed-loop control.

White Balance Areas There are two white-balance areas. One is the transmission white-balance area and the other is the reflection white-balance area. At the white balance area the CCD image sensor is exposed to full illumination where there is a direct view of either the transmission light light source, through the platen, or of the white calibration strip for the reflection light-source. The function of these white-balance areas is to provide a reference level for each CCD pixel in white light so that compensation can be introduced for the non-uniformity of  illumination.

3-22

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 

Functional Description

Figure 3.5 Tr Transmis ansmission sion illumi illumination nation

Transmission Illumination Illuminat ion The transmission light-source consists of a single-apertu single-aperture re fluorescent lamp, mounted within the lightbar. The light source provides illumination illumination over a narrow rectangular area covering the full width of the platen. The lightbar has an optical-feedb optical-feedback ack detector for monitorin monitoring g the transmission-light transmission -light level. The height of the lightbar, above the platen surface, allows the optimum image quality performance between scratch rejection and sharpness. The aperture of the lamp must face downward towards the platen surface when the lightbar has been assembled on the scanner.

 Engineer s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3 23

 

Functional Description

Transmission White-balance Area The transmission white-balance white-balance area is a strip of clear glass that is part of the platen area adjacent to the aqua strip. Transmission light is passed to the mirror through the transmission white-balance area.

Reflection Illumination The two aperture fluorescent lamps are positioned to give the necessary light level and also to prevent shadows appearing from non-flat originals, such as paste ups and textured surfaces. The reflection lamps are covered by the reflection-tray baffle that has slots to allow a path for the light to reach the scan line of the original placed on the fixed platen.

FIXED PLATEN

SCAN DIRECTION

Figure 3.6 Reflec Reflection tion illumi illumination nation

The reflected image passes through the bottom slot of the reflection tray to reach the angled mirror. Each lamp has an optical feedback detector for monitorin monitoring g its light level. The reflection tray forms part of the reflection column which is mounted on the main carriage above the mirror. The reflection

3 24

C 550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

tray is extendable, to allow easy access to the lamps for replacement.

Reflection White-balance Area The reflection white-balance area is a white strip of plastic fitted to the underside of the main cover at the right-hand end of the platen. Light from the reflection white-balance strip is reflected onto the mirror.

Light Table Illuminati Illumination on The light table assists the operator in viewing originals placed on the platen area prior to a scanning operation, and also to provide a basic light table for on-line mounting. The platen viewing area is illuminated by two aperture fluorescent lamps that are housed at the front and rear of the light table structure. Light from the lamps is reflected from a profiled reflector and projected upward through a diffuser to produce a uniform level across the whole platen area. The light-table lamps come on when the main carriage is in the parked position and the lid is open.

3.3.3

Platen The fixed platen provides a suitable support for various types of  originals. Any combination of 35 mm to A3 reflection or transmission originals originals can be arranged on the platen area. If  required, transmission originals may be oil mounted on the platen. The mounted originals are held flat relative to the imaging plane at the CCD array. The flatness tolerance limit of 0.5 mm is

 

 Engineer s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-25

 

Functional Description

determined by the the depth of focus of the lens at the highest optical magnification setting. The platen is directly supported by four pads in for the the aluminium alloy casting. These pads actmachined as a datum plane platen. The fixed platen will support a maximum weight of 4 kg. The optical clear aperture of the platen is 470 mm x 350 mm. An area 350 mm x 15 mm at one end of the platen is reserved for white balance for the transmission mode. Extra care should be taken to ensure that this area is free from dirt and surface scratches. Both sides of the platen glass have an anti-reflection coating. This reduces the effect of any image ghosting which may be caused by any multiple reflections between surfaces. The glass type and coating allows adequate transmission of light, at all visible wavelengths, to achieve the required optical performance of the scanner. The colour performance of the C-550 Lanovia Scanner is not affected by the spectral transmission of the platen glass. The platen has a ringed groove with three locating pots at the left-hand end and three at the rear end. This ringed groove is used to locate the copy holder registration edges or the registration ruler.

Aqua Strip The function of the aqua strip is to provide a suitable reference point on the platen. Originals should not be placed over the transmission white-balance area during transmission scanning. This aqua strip is also used to locate the various test targets on the platen for alignment and calibration. The aqua strip has graduations marked in centimetres and covers a distance of about 35 cm.

3-26

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

Copy Holder Registration Edges There are three edges as follows: • Short registration edge fits over the aqua strip, • Long registration edge fits over the rear edge of the platen, • Registration ruler fits across the width of the platen.

The registration edges are used to form a right-angle point of  reference at which any of the provided copy holders can be accurately positioned positioned.. The registration ruler allows the operator to precisely locate an original on the platen. This ruler has both straight line graduations and radial graduations in 10  elements. 

Transmission Format F ormat The maximum transmission scan area is shown in Figure 3.7. 455 mm 25 mm A3 350 mm

Figure Fig ure 3.7 Tran ransmi smissi ssion on forma formatt

Reflection Format The maximum reflection scan area is shown in Figure 3.8.

 

 Engineer s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-27 

 

Functional Description

470 mm 25 mm A3 + 350 mm

Figure Figu re 3.8 3.8 Ref Reflec lectio tion n format format

3.3.4

Mirror 

The function of the mirror is to re-direct the optical path by 90 . The reflecting surface is an aluminium coating coating on the front face. The mirror has a high quality optical flat finish to ensure good imaging performance.

3.3.5

Lens A single lens covers the full range of resolutions, from 22.5 lines/mm (580 dpi) to 192 l/mm (4900 dpi). The lens has a fixed aperture setting of f 5.6. The lens has been specifically designed for use with linear CCDs and is targeted mainly for the input scanner industry. It has been designed for an image field length of 72 mm and its magnification range accommodates original sizes from 35 mm to an A3 format. Care has been taken to minimize distortion and in particular the longitudinal longitudin al and lateral chromatic aberrations.

3-28

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

Optical Baffles Optical baffles are mounted on the CCD-mount casting and on the lens-mount casting. These baffles have been coated with a special non-reflective paint to help prevent stray light being reflected from the inside surfaces of the scanner which could fall directly onto the CCD array.

3.3.6

CCD Image Sensor The CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor is part of the camera head and is horizontally mounted mounted into a socket in the CCD headboard. The CCD image sensor contains three lines of  photodiodes photodiod es (photosites) with integral red (R), green (G), and blue (B) colour filters over each line. Light from the original is imaged via the lens onto the CCD lines which creates charge packets within the photosites. Voltage outputs are obtained by clocking each line out serially through a charge to voltage converter. The three analogue outputs are passed via the CCD headboard to the digitizer board. The CCD is accurately mounted into the camera-head mounting-plate during the factory camera alignment process. It must not be disturbed otherwise a new camera head will need to be fitted.

CCD Description Each CCD line consists of a linear array of 8000 photosites (see Figure 3.9). When photons fall onto the photosites, electrons are generated which fill the photosite wells. The number of electrons in each well is proportional to the light intensity. To avoid the wells filling up (saturation) and spreading into adjacent wells (blooming), a variable exposure time is used for each colour depending on the maximum light intensity. At the end of the exposure time, the charge packets are transferred to an analogue shift register via the transfer gates.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-29

 

Functional Description

Charge packets in the analogue shift-register are clocked serially along and out of the register. The charge packets are fed through a charge to voltage converter and an output amplifier which generates a voltage output. Prior to each charge packet, the charge to voltage converter is reset. This defines an output voltage which is the dark-reference level. When the charge packet is shifted into the charge to voltage converter, a valid video level is generated. The resulting output is a square wave in which the difference between the dark_reference and valid video levels is proportional to the original light intensity. All three lines operate operate in parallel parallel producing producing three concurrent concurrent analogue outputs. outputs. While the analogue shift registers are being clocked out, the photosites are accumulating the charge packets for the next line.

RED CHANNEL

RESET PHIR

ANALOGUE OUTPUT RED

CHARGE TO VOLTAGE

OUTPUT AMP

ANALOGUE SHIFT REGISTER PHI1A/B PHI2A/B TRANSFER GATE 2 TG2 TRANSFER GATE 1 TG1

PHOTO SITES – RED

ANALOGUE LOG R

GREEN CHANNEL

BLUE CHANNEL

RESET PHIR

OUTPUT GREEN

CHARGE TO VOLTAGE

OUTPUT AMP

RESET PHIR

ANALOGUE OUTPUT BLUE

CHARGE TO VOLTAGE

OUTPUT AMP

Figure Fig ure 3.9 CCD imag image e sensor sensor

3-30

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

CCD Clocks The CCD uses the following clocks: • Exposure control clocks, LOGR, LOGG and LOGB for the

red, green, and blue lines. These determine the exposure times to prevent saturation. The exposure times are determined by measuring the light from the white balance strip to ensure that the pixel with the highest level is out of  saturation. • Transfer Gates 1 and 2 clocks, TG1 and TG2. These allow the

charge packets to be transferred between the the photosites and the analogue shift registers. • Transport clocks PHI1A, 1B, 2A and 2B. These move the

charge packets along the analogue shift registers into the charge-to-voltage converters. • Reset Clock PHIR. This resets the charge to voltage converter

for each pixel prior to moving the charge packet into it.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-31

 

Functional Description

3.4

Electronics 3.4.1

Introduction The electronics are physically divided into several modules which can be individually tested using diagnostics. The use of modules enables faults to be found and repaired more quickly thereby reducing the cost of replacement in the field. Figure 3.10 shows the electronic modules. DIGITIZER BOARD

CCD HEADBOARD

LAMP DRIVER BOARD RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DISPLAY BOARD LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS RFI BOX  

PSU MAINS SWITCH

STANDBY SWITCH SYSTEM BOARD

VIEWED FROM FRONT

Figure 3.10 3.10 Elect Electrical rical module module locations locations within within the scanner scanner

There are a number of ancillary components, sensors, interlocks and stepper motors which are connected via distribution boards so that they can be individually replaced. Each ancillary component can also be checked using diagnostics.

3-32

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

This chapter describes each electronic module functionally. Physical details (e.g. connector pin-out information) are given in Appendix A, the Electrical Reference Data section. The analogue electronics relating to the CCD and headboard are part of the camera. The power circuits driving the illuminatio illumination n systems are located within the lamp-driver module. Minor PCBs are also used for distribution and display panel purposes. All PCBs are connected with either ribbon or flexicables.

3.4.2

Power Supply The power supply unit converts the AC mains supply into the low-voltage DC supplies required by the electronic modules. The supply uses switch-mode technology and provides four fully-regulated outputs. It has no service adjustments or exchangeablee internal parts. Dangerous voltages are present exchangeabl inside the unit, possibly even after disconnection from the supply. Two versions of power supply may be fitted: • The original supply (WA 304) is suitable for mains supplies

of 85 V to 132 V or 176 V to 264 V (it will automatically select the correct input range). • The replacement supply is a Sirius 250 series. It is suitable

for a mains supply of 85 V to 264 V a.c. with a frequency range of 47 to 63 Hz. This PSU is power-facto power-factorr corrected. The DC-outputs from the power supply are: +5 V at 15 A (minimum 3 A), +24 V at 6 A, +18 V at 500 mA and -12 V at 500 mA. These outputs are used for the following purposes: purposes:

+5 V • System board logic,

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-33

 

Functional Description

• Power-on LED, • Digitizer-bo Digitizer-board ard logic, • Digitizer fan, • On the original system board the +5 V is also used to

generate the 3.3 V supply. On the later Kicker board the +5 V generates the 3.3 and 2.75/2.5 V supplies.

+24 V • RFI box fan, • Enclosure fan, • All stepper motors, • Carriage servo-motor, • System-board motor-control circuits, • Interlock system, • Power to lamp-driver module, • +12 V regulated supply.

+18 V • Analogue circuits on the digitizer board, • +11.5 V supply for the digitizer board.

-12 V • Analogue circuits on the digitizer board and servo system.

3-34

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

There are no connections between these supplies within the power supply itself; all ground connections are made within the system board. The power supply contains an over-temperature trip which will disable the unit completely if the cooling fails. This trip will reset on cooling. There is also a remote-switch remote-switching ing capability via a separate connector above the output terminals which is connected to the standby switch on the front of the scanner; closing the switch disables the power-supply unit. If the WA 304 PSU is disabled, the output voltages will be low, but not zero. If the later Sirius 250 PSU is disabled the output voltage will be zero. All supplies are protected against short circuit. If the current taken from any output exceeds the maximum, the whole supply will shut down. The attempt to restart at intervals of a few seconds until thePSU faultwill is cleared.

3.4.3

CCD Headboard The CCD headboard is part of the camera sub-assembly and is used to provide the electrical interface to the CCD sensor. The CCD headboard contains the clock drivers which take TTL signals from the digitizer board and produce clocks of the correct voltage levels, rise, and fall times and overlaps required by the CCD sensor. The CCD headboard also buffers the red, green and blue analogue outputs before sending the signals down a flexible cable to the digitizer board. The CCD sensor is mounted into the CCD headboard using a socket. The CCD sensor is accurately clamped onto the CCD mounting plate while the CCD headboard is flexibly attached to it. Both the CCD sensor and the CCD headboard must not be disturbed otherwise the alignment of the scanner will be affected.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-35

 

Functional Description

RED

VIDEO

GREEN

RED

VIDEO

BLUE

GREEN

VIDEO

BLUE

CCD IMAGE SENSOR (see Figure 3.9)

Log G Log R

Log B

EXPOSURE CONTROL GREEN EXPOSURE CONTROL RED

PHI2B

PHI1B

EXPOSURE CONTROL BLUE

PHI1A

TRANSFER GATE-2

PHI2A TRANSFER GATE-1

RESET CLOCK

Figure Fig ure 3.1 3.11 1 CCD head headboa board rd

CCD Clock Drivers The CCD clock drivers required by the CCD sensor are: • Exposure control clocks for the RGB channels. These are low

to accumulate charge in the photosites. • Transfer Gate 1 and 2 clocks. These clocks are common to all

three channels and are high to transfer charge from photosites to shift registers. • Transport clocks PHI1A, 1B, 2A and 2B. These square-wave

clocks are common to all three channels and they transport the charge down the shift registers.

3-36

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

• Reset clock. This clock is common to all three channels and

is high to reset the charge to voltage converters. Each clock comprises a discrete transistor amplifier which produces thedriver correct voltage levels for the CCD image sensor. The rise and fall times of each output are controlled by the output impedance of each driver in conjunction with the capacitance of  the CCD input pins.

Output Buffers The red, green, and blue (RGB) analogue output signals are buffered by emitter followers and series resistors which provide an impedance match to the 30-way flexicable. These allow the signals to be sent to the digitizer board without degradation. degradation.

3.4.4

Digitizer Board The digitizer board (see Figure 3.12 and Figure 3.13) is part of  the camera head and it provides the front end analogue electronics for the CCD image sensor. The digitizer board provides clock signals and power to the CCD headboard and receives back the analogue signals from the red, green, and blue CCD stripes. These are converted to digital using an ADC and passed to the system board. The interface to the system board (including power) is via a flexicable. f lexicable. A voltage sensor indicates if one of the incoming power supply rails has failed. A temperature sensor indicates if there is an over-temperature in the vicinity of the camera head.

Operating Modes The digitizer board can operate in either the normal CCD input mode or in diagnostics modes. In normal CCD mode, the digitizer performs the following functions: • Level shifts each analogue input to around 0 V.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-37 

 

Functional Description

• Performs correlated double sampling on each analogue input

i.e. converts the CCD square-wave signals into continuous video signals. • Multiplexes the three colour-channels into sequential RGB

analogue data. • Converts the sequential data into digital form using a 16 bit

ADC. • Passes the data as 2 bytes-per-pixel to the system board. • Continuously monitors the power-supply volts and the

temperature. • Distributes signals to the focus and enlargement stepper

motors and to the enlargement datum sensor. In the diagnostics modes, operation is similar to the above except test data is injected via input multiplexers into the three analogue inputs via a diagnostic DAC controlled by the system board. This allows the entire image data path to be checked from the digitizer input through to the system board.

CCD Signal The CCD generates simultaneou simultaneouss RGB analogue signals, each being a square wave, offset from 0 V. The amplitude of each square wave signal is proportional to incident light intensity. For no light, the signal is at the dark reference-level. As the light level is increased, the square wave switches between the dark-reference level and a valid-video level. The valid-video level is negative relative to the dark-reference level.

Input Multiplexer and Level Shifter - RGB A square wave similar to the CCD output for diagnostic purposes is generated by chopping between the diagnostic DAC output and 0 V. The input multiplexer selects either the CCD or diagnostic square waves for the three colour channels. The circuit also

3-38

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

includes level shifters which shifts the CCD dark-reference offsets close to 0 V.

Correlated Double Sampling (CDS) The wanted video signal is obtained by taking the difference between the valid video signal and the dark reference signal on a pixel by pixel basis. This is done by clamping the dark reference accurately to 0V and then applying a sample/hold during the valid video period. After CDS, the square wave becomes a continuous video signal which is updated at each pixel. CDS is performed in parallel on all three colour channels.

RGB Multiplexer The three video channels are pixel interleaved using the RGB multiplexer. This selects one channel at a time, using the control signals: MUXRED, MUXGREEN, and MUXBLUE, and passes these analogue signals to the ADC for conversion.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-39

 

Functional Description

DIAG DAC 0 V (A) CCD RED

INPUT MULTIPLEXER AND LEVEL SHIFT RED

SELECT MUX

CORRELATED DOUBLE SAMPLING

CLAMP

SAMPLE

DIAG DAC 0 V (A)

INPUT MULTIPLEXER AND LEVEL SHIFT GREEN

CORRELATED DOUBLE SAMPLING

CCD GREEN

SELECT MUX

CLAMP

SAMPLE RGB MULTIPLEXER

DIAG DAC 0 V (A)

INPUT MULTIPLEXER AND LEVEL SHIFT BLUE

RGB MUX OUT SEE Figure 3.13

CORRELATED DOUBLE SAMPLING

CCD BLUE SELECT MUX

CLAMP

SAMPLE

MUX MUX RED GREEN

MUX BLUE

Figure Fig ure 3.1 3.12 2 Dig Digiti itizer zer 1

Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) The ADC (see Figure 3.13) takes the colour interleaved analogue analogue signals and converts each one to 16 bit resolution. Digital multiplexers are then used to send first the high byte and then the low byte along the interface to the system board. The data transfer rate is at 3.2 MHz or twice the input sampling rate to the ADC.

3-40

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

Voltage Sensor A window comparator is used to check that the input supply voltages to the digitizer are within limits. If any supply is outside limits or if the interface cable is not properly connected, a power fail signal is sent back to the system board. The supplies checked are: • + 18 volts, • + 11.5 volts, • - 12 volts.

Temperature Sensor An on-board temperature sensor is used to monitor the operating temperature in the vicinity of the camera head. The sensor is a digital device in which an over-temperature trip point can be programmed from the system board via the serial interface. If the board temperature exceeds the trip point, a temperature fail signal is sent back to the system board. The temperature of the digitizer can also be directly read back by the system board.

Digital Control The digitizer is controlled from the system board by the following interfaces: • A 3-bit parallel interface which sets up the operating mode. • A bi-directional serial interface which is used to write to the

diagnostic DAC, set up the temperature sensor, and read back  the board temperature. The pixel transfer rate is determined by a pixel demand clock  generated by the system board. This is received by the digitizer which then returns pixel data in byte form with a double speed digitizer clock back to the system board. To correctly time the CCD clocks, multiplexers, CDS and ADC, a high speed clock is required on the digitizer. This is generated by multiplying up the

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-41

 

Functional Description

1.6 MHz pixel demand clock to 25.6 MHz using a phase lock  loop (PLL). RGB MUX OUT (see Figure 3.12)

16-BIT DATA BUS

16-BIT ADC

DATA D 0:7

OUTPUT MULTIPLEXER

DIG DATA VALID CLOCK 3.2 MHz

3-BIT MODE CONTROL SERIAL INTERFACE PIXEL DEMAND CLOCK 1.6 MHz

VOLTS INPUT

PALL PA

PHASE LOCKED LOOP

VOLTAGE SENSOR

DIAGNOSTIC DAC

25.6 MHz

VOLTS OK

DIAG DAC

CCD CLOCKS

TEMP OK

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

DIGITIZER FAN

ENLARGEMENT ENLARGEMEN T DATUM DATUM SENSOR

BUFFERED DATUM SENSOR

ENLARGEMENT STEPPER MOTOR

MOTOR STEPS

FOCUS STEPPER MOTOR Figure Fig ure 3.1 3.13 3 Dig Digiti itizer zer 2

Image Processing (Formatting) A single programmable logic device (PAL) provides all of the digital timing on the digitizer board. The functions in the PAL are: • Generation of the CCD clocks,

3-42

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

• Generation of the clocks for input multiplexer, CDS, RGB

multiplexer, ADC and output multiplexer, Implementation n of 3-bit parallel interface for mode control, • Implementatio • Implementatio Implementation n of serial interface, • Divide-by-16 used in the PLL, • Interface to the temperature sensor.

3.4.5

System Board The system board, mounted upright in the RFI box at the rear of  the pedestal, provides overall control of the scanner. While the system board is a single module, it can be considered as having several functional blocks (see Figure 3.14). The functions of the system board include: • Interfacing with the digitizer board and processing the picture

signal data received. • Controlling the lamps in the scanner via the lamp driver

board. • Controlling the motor drive system within the scanner. • Monitoring all sensors and safety interlocks located in the

scanner. • Controlling the data transfers via the single-ended SCSI

interface. • Providing the means to test the scanner through its

diagnostics software.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-43

 

Functional Description

DIGITIZER BOARD

IMAGE PROCESSOR

FIFO (ON KICKER BOARD ONLY)

SCSI CONTROLLER

SCSI INTERFACE

DIGITIZER CONTROL 68332 CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT

SERIAL RS232 PORT

CLOCK GENERATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION

MOTION

CONTROLLER

SERVO CONTROL

STEPPER CONTROL

INTERLOCKS/  SENSORS

LAMP INTERFACE

SERVO MOTOR

STEPPER MOTORS

INTERLOCKS/  SENSORS

LAMP DRIVER BOARD

Figure 3.14 Syste System m board board block block diagram diagram

The main blocks within the system board are described below:

System Controller The system-controller block is the intelligent supervisor of the scanner. It receives commands from the peripheral workstation on the single-ended SCSI interface and uses this information to control and drive the electronic sub-systems of the scanner.

3-44

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

The heart of the system controller block is the 68332 CPU with a 32-bit processing core, running at 20 MHz. The CPU has a built-in-time processor unit which is used to drive the stepper motors. Provided on-board are 2 M of Flash PROM and 2 M of  DRAM to run the application and the diagnostics code. The system controller has direct control over the image processor, the SCSI controller, the motion controller, the lamp-driver board, the digitizer board, and the synchroni synchronizer zer block. As a background task, the system controller monitors the environmentt within the scanner and disables scans if a fault environmen condition or an interlock violation is detected. The monitored fault conditions are over temperature on the system board and the digitizer board and out-of-range supply voltages on the digitizer and the lamp-driver boards. The main communications with the workstation is via the single ended SCSI interface. Commands received on this interface allows the scanner to run application or diagnostics procedures. There is also a serial RS232 communications interface to the system board. This is intended for running a more comprehensive range of diagnostics using the same workstation or a separate terminal.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-45

 

Functional Description WORKSTATION

CAMERA

IMAGE DAT DATA A FLOW

SRAM

DRAM

24 DIGITIZER

8

CAMERA INPUT LATCH

16

SRAM

16 SCSI DMA LATCH

16

16

16

BYTE SWAP

SCSI 16

24

DIGITIZER DEBUG LATCH

IMAGE PROCESSOR (DSP)

16

8

8

16 16 CPU

FLASH

8 SYSTEM CONTROLLER

DRAM

Figure 3.15 3.15 Scann Scanner er image-data image-data flow flow – original system system board board

3-46

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description WORKSTATION

CAMERA

IMAGE DAT DATA A FLOW

SRAM

DRAM

24 DIGITIZER

CAMERA INPUT DOUBLE LATCH

8

16 FIFO

16

SCSI 16

16

24

DIGITIZER DEBUG LATCH

IMAGE PROCESSOR (DSP)

16

8

8

16 16 CPU

FLASH

8 SYSTEM CONTROLLER

DRAM

Figure 3.16 3.16 Scann Scanner er image-data image-data flow flow – Kicker Kicker system system board

Image Processor The Image Processor block receives the image data from the Digitizer. It processes this data and passes it onto the SCSI interface. The main component in this block is the digital signal processor (DSP) which performs all the data transfer and image processing functions, functions, under the direction of the main system-control processor. Program code is loaded into the DSP by the system-control processor through a dedicated host processor port. The DSP then runs the downloaded program. The image processor block on the original system board includes 2 M x 16 DRAM, 128 K x 24 SRAM and 384 K x 16 SRAM, which are used to store and process the image data. On the Kicker board

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-47 

 

Functional Description

the image processor block includes 4 M x 16 DRAM and 512 K x 24 SRAM. Once a scantoisthe initiated, the 16-bit in data from the digitizer board transferred image processor 2 bytes, across an 8-bit busis at the rate of 3.2 MHz. This data is then written to the single 16-bit camera input latch (dual on Kicker), in the order RGBRGB etc. Each time the data is received at the latch, the decode circuit will generate one of three sequential interrupts, IRQA, IRQB, and IRQC, one for each colour. Each interrupt drives a separate DMA channel of the DSP which transfer the data from the camera latch to the memory, thus effectively separating the colours on the fly. The incoming data is then processed by the DSP and written to the 16-bit SCSI DMA latch (256 x 16 bit FIFO on Kicker), to be read by the SCSI controller. On the original system board the DSP runs at 66 MHz whereas Kicker runs at 66 MHz without the dongle and 100 MHz with it. Some of the functions performed by the image processor block  are: • Black balance, • White balance, • Tone correction, • Bad-pixel removal, • Tri-linear re-alignment, • Cropping, • Padding, • Averaging, • Line reversal, • A4 C-dot on original board and Kicker board without dongle,

A3 C-dot on Kicker with dongle, • Line-art algorithms, • Autofocus.

3-48

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

During diagnostics, the system controller is capable of injecting test data into the image processor via the digitizer debug latch to test its operation.

Clock Generation and Synchronization The synchronization block controls the timing of the camera and digitizer board and synchronizes synchronizes it to the main (scan) carriage motor and to the DSP to ensure that the lines of image data are captured from the original at the correct position in the scan. The synchronizer gives fine control over the line length in terms of  the number of pixel clocks and coarser control over the three colour-channel integrate timers to control the amount of light captured by the CCD image sensor. During a scan, it is necessary to keep the line time period of the CCD system synchronized to the carriage feed rate and to the integration timers. This is ensured by generating the CCD clock  signals (1.6 MHz pixel clock) and the servo-contro servo-controller ller clock  (8 MHz motor clock) from the same master clock running at 48 MHz. The clock generator produces a pixel clock and a line clock for the digitizer as well as the three integration control clocks for the CCD image sensor. Once the clock generator is set up, the digitizer board sends data continuously to the DSP. This data is rejected by the DSP, until it is primed by the system controller. The line clocks start each scan line, giving an interrupt to the CPU in the system controller. In this way, the DSP data is synchronized with the incoming data.

SCSI Controller The SCSI controller block interfaces the scanner and the workstation. The workstation can send application commands, diagnostics commands or download scanner software through the SCSI interface. The scanner can reply with status information or scanned image data.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-49

 

Functional Description

The scanner only supports a single-ended 8-bit SCSI interface with synchronous and asynchronous data transfers up to 10 Mbytes/s. The SCSI block is controlled from the system-controller block  but receives its data from the image-processor image-processor block. On the original system board the 16-bit image data is transferred into the SCSI block from the SCSI DMA latch (see Figure 3.15). On the Kicker board this data is transferred into the SCSI block via the 256 x 16 bit FIFO (see Figure 3.16). This process is controlled by one of the DMA channels on the DSP. On the original board, when the SCSI controller is ready to accept data, it raises an interrupt (IRQD) on the DSP which then writes the image data to the SCSI DMA latch under DMA control. On the Kicker board data transfer works as follows. The output DMAs are enabled during scanning and the DSP writes processed image data into the FIFO as long as there is space available. The data from the FIFO is then read by the SCSI chip and sent to the workstation. Providing Providing that there is available space in the FIFO, the DSP interrupt IRQD is generated, which causes the DSP to write the next pixel to the FIFO, through the DMA process. The SCSI interface has two parallel connectors on the system board. One of these is used for connecting the scanner to the workstation while the other is used for connecting an external terminator.

Motion Control The system board controls the stepper motors used for the focus, enlargement, enlarg ement, and cross-slide drive mechanism mechanisms, s, and a servo motor used for the main carriage drive.

Stepper Motors The drive for the stepper motors performs the following functions:

3-50

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

• Commutatio Commutation n sequencing sequencing.. (i.e. quarter stepping for the focus

motor and half-stepping for the X-slide and enlargement motor), • Current control, • Short circuit protection,

Over-temperature perature protection for the drive electronics. • Over-tem Over-travel detectors are not provided for any of the stepper-motor driven mechanisms; they all have mechanical end stops. MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM CONTROLLER

PHASE QUADRATURE

TPU (1) TPU

TPU (2)

STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER

X-SLIDE STEPPER MOTOR

STEP(1-4) STEP(10) BRAKE

DAC DIR

PROFILE GENERATOR ENABLE Note: This figure shows only one of the three stepper motors

STEP(5-8) STEP(12) BRAKE

DAC DIR

Figure Figur e 3.17 A stepper stepper motor motor electroni electronic c block

The stepper-motor electronics block diagram (see Figure 3.17) shows the main functional blocks and their connections for a single motor. When a move is requested by the system software it passes a requested position, a starting step period and a slewing step period to the timer processor unit (TPU). The TPU outputs two phase-quadrature signals. The phase difference between these signals determines the direction of  motion and the period between transitions is the step period.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-51

 

Functional Description

VELOCITY

START

STOP

0

TIME RAMP UP

SLEW AT CONSTANT VELOCITY

RAMP DOWN

During the move, the step period is ramped from the starting-step period to the slewing-step period and then back down again, to finish at the requested position. The stepper-motor controller divides down each step out of the TPU into either a half or quarter step at the motor. The DAC, inside the motor driver, allows fine control of the motor current giving fine control of the motor position. One revolution of the stepper motor takes 400 steps when driven in half-step mode or 800 steps when driven in quarter-step mode. The brake line is pulled active by the resistor when the main cover is open and driven inactive by the main-covers interlock  relay when the covers are shut. When the brake line is active +24 V is applied to both sides of the motor-winding setting the motor current to zero and disabling any movement.

Servo Motor The drive for the servo motor performs the following functions: • Closed-loop position control, • Move profile generation, • Servo-loop compensation, • Current drive and control, • Over-travel protection, • Short-circuit protection.

3-52

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

The servo-motor electronics block-diagram (see Figure 3.18) shows the main functional blocks and their connections. The servo controller receives, from fr om the system controller, the target position, position, acceleration rate, and velocity settings. It uses these parameters to drive the servo-motor leadscrew. The servo motor produces encoder clock pulses ENCA, ENCB and ENCI. The ENCA and the ENCB pulses are used to increment or decrement the actual position register of the servo controller. The actual position is then compared with the desired position to give the error measured in encoder counts. This is then multiplied by a scaling factor and written to the DAC, to give the bipolar demand signal.

DESIRED POSITION

SERVO CONTROLLER

ERROR

MULTIPLIER

DAC

ANALOGUE COMPENSATOR

DAC

BIPOLAR DEMAND

12–BITS

+/– 5 V

G(s)

CMP DEMAND +/–12 V

ACTUAL POSITION

ENCI ENCA ENCB

INTERLOCK RELAY

SERVO MOTOR

REF PWM CURRENT CONTROL AMPLIFIER DIR

ENCODER

DEMAND MAGNITUDE ABSOLUTE VALUE 0 TO +5 V CIRCUIT

DEMAND DIRECTION

SIGN CIRCUIT

BRAKE FWD LIM DATUM REVLIM

LIMIT SENSOR LOGIC Figure 3.18 Serv Servo o motor elect electronic ronic blocks blocks

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-53

 

Functional Description

Bipolar demand is fed to the analogue compensator. This is an active analogue filter which corrects the phase and gain of the servo system to maintain its stability. The compensated demand (CMP Demand) is split into sign and magnitude by the sign and absolute value circuit. The Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) current-control amplifier drives a current proportional to the demand magnitude through the motor winding in the direction indicated by demand by  demand direction. direction. The demand magnitude signal is connected to the reference input of  the PWM current-control amplifier. The interlock relay disconnects the motor from the driver when: • The lid is opened and the lightbar is fitted or, • The main cover is open.

When the motor is disconnected from the driver, it is shorted out by a braking resistor. The de-energized state of this relay is with the motor disabled, forcing it to fail to a safe state. The limit-sensors logic disables motion of the carriage in the outward direction only. If the carriage is on the forward limit forward motion is prevented. If the carriage is on the reverse limit reverse motion is prevented. This protects the machine against running into the mechanical end stops but allows it to reverse drive itself from a limit sensor. The limit-sensor signals are pulled high on the system board making them fail to a safe state.

3.4.6

Lamp Driver Board The lamp-driver board is mounted within a metal enclosure fixed to the main carriage casting at the rear of the light table. The lamp driver operates from a +24 VDC supply, from the system board, which provides power to all five lamps in the scanner. The interface to the system board, including power, is via a flexicable. The transmission and two reflection lamps can be switched on and off and driven with variable currents which are set from the system board by writing to a DAC. These three lamps also have associated opto-detectors opto-detectors which feed analogue signals back to the lamp driver. These signals are passed to an ADC which converts

3-54

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

them to digital form. The digital signals are then returned to the system board so that the lamp brightness can be controlled via a software feedback loop. LAMP DRIVER MODULE PL1

PL2

PL3

REFLECTION LAMPS DRIVER

TRANSMISSION LAMP DRIVER

LIGHT TABLE LAMPS DRIVER

VARIABLE BRIGHTNESS LAMP

FIXED BRIGHTNESS LAMPS

VARIABLE BRIGHTNESS LAMPS

Figure Fig ure 3.19 3.19 Lam Lamp p driver driver modul module e

The two light-table lamps can be switched on and off but with fixed brightness only. The lamps need to be warmed up prior to use to maintain good brightness and colour stability. To shorten the warm-up time, it is possible to have several lamps on at once with the following rules: • Up to four lamps can be on at once, e.g. two light-table plus

two reflection lamps. • If all five lamps are demanded at once, an interlock within the

lamp driver switches off the reflection lamps.

Lamp Driver Block Diagram The blocks within the lamp driver board are as follows: • Figure 3.20 shows an overview of all five blocks, • Figure 3.21 shows the switched-mode PSU circuit,

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-55

 

Functional Description

• Figure 3.22 shows the system-board interface circuit, • Figure 3.23 shows the transmission transmission-lamps -lamps driver circuit, • Figure 3.24 shows the reflection-lamps driver circuit, • Figure 3.25 shows the table-lamps driver circuit.

+320 V +24 V

SWITCHED MODE PSU (refer to Figure 3.21) SYSTEM BOARD INTERFACE (refer to Figure 3.22)

+18 V TRANSMISSION LAMP CIRCUIT (see Figure 3.23)

REFLECTION LAMP CIRCUIT (see Figure 3.24)

LIGHT TABLE LAMP CIRCUIT (see Figure 3.25)

TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL TRANSMISSION LAMP ON

SYSTEM BOARD

TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL REFLECTION LAMPS ON REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON Figure 3.20 Lamp driver block diagr diagram am

Lamp Driver Blocks • Input RFI filter.

3-56

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

• Soft inrush current circuit. • +5 V and +14 V regulators. • Low-voltage monitor which checks that the +24 V input

supply reaches a minimum limit. • Boost converter to generate a floating high voltage

DC-supply for the lamps. Since the supply floats, it reduces the danger if a single point is accidently touched. touched. An isolation barrier separates the low-voltag low-voltagee and high-volta high-voltage ge sides. +5 V REGULATORS

+24 V DC SUPPLY

RFI FILTER

+14 V

INPUT VOLTS OK LOW VOLTAGE MONITOR

SOFT INRUSH CURRENT CIRCUIT

+320 V

FLYBACK BOOST CONVERTER

+18 V

SOFT START TEMP OK

TEMPERATURE MONITOR

Figure Figur e 3.21 Lamp driver driver switche switched-mode d-mode PSU

• Temperature monitor which trips out the boost converter if  

the board exceeds 75 C. The circuit restarts when the temperature drops back below the limit. • Dual serial DAC to set transmission and reflection-lamp

brightness. • Serial ADC with 4-channel multiplexer to convert the three

lamp-detector signals to digital form. The fourth channel is used as a loopback via the transmission-DAC output for diagnostic purposes. • Five lamp interlock circuit.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-57 

 

Functional Description

• Voltage controlled oscillators (VCOs) set by the DAC

outputs. The variable-frequency outputs are used to control the lamp currents, the lowest frequency corresponding corresponding to maximum lamp current and brightness. • Heater drivers which are used to provide cathode-heating

currents to each lamp which ensures rapid starting. • Ballast circuits which chop the high-voltage supply, generate

a starting voltage and limit the arc current through each lamp. DAC DATA OUT SERIAL DATA IN

DUAL SERIAL DAC 12-BIT

SERIAL CLOCK

REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL CH1 CH0

CH3 SERIAL CH2 ADC 12-BIT CH1

ADC DATA OUT

CH0

TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL

LOOPBACK REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR

TRANSMISSION LAMP ON REFLECTION LAMPS ON LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON

FIVE LAMP INTERLOCK CIRCUIT

DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS

Figure 3.22 Lamp driver driver system system board interfa interface ce

3-58

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

+18 V SET MAX CURRENT

HEATER DRIVER +320 V

TRANSMISSION LAMP LEVEL

TRANSMISSION LAMP ON

BALLAST CHOKE AND CAPACITOR

HALF BRIDGE

VCO

SWEEP CIRCUIT

TRANSMISSION LAMP DETECTOR

OPTO DETECTOR

LAMP CATHODES

Figure 3.23 Tr Transmi ansmission ssion lamp drive driverr

Input RFI Filter The boost converter and ballast circuits create high levels of  ripple current on the +24 V supply which would appear on the flexible cable. To reduce this, a common-mode choke and in-line choke are used to reduce the ripple which reduces RFI emissions from the cable (see Figure 3.21).

Soft Inrush Current Circuit The main-cover interlock breaks the +24 V supply to the lamp driver. If the cover is closed and the supply reconnected with the power on, the reservoir capacitors on the lamp driver would put a momentary short across the +24 V supply causing the PSU to trip out the +5 V supply. This would cause the system board to reset. To prevent this, the soft inrush current circuit limits the charging current to the reservoir capacitors to a safe limit. In addition, a soft-start circuit on the boost converter limits the current surge when the converter starts up (see Figure 3.21).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-59

 

Functional Description

+5 V and +14 V Regulators These regulators generate +5 V and +14 V supplies from the +24 V input supply. These supplies are used for the DAC, ADC, VCOs and associated amplifiers and comparators (see Figure 3.21).

Low Voltage Monitor The voltage of the +24 V supply is checked and if below +18 V, a power-fail power-fa il signal is sent back to the system board via an opto-isolator. Also, the boost converter is disabled if the input voltage is too low. An LED on the board lights if the supply is higher than the threshold.

Boost Converter A flyback boost converter is used to step up the +24 V supply to +320 VDC. A MOSFET is used to switch the +24 V across an inductor. The current and therefore the flux builds up in the inductor core until the MOSFET is switched off. At this point the flux decays, transferring power to the secondary windings and to an auxiliary winding which generates +320 V and +18 V respectively. The 18 V output is regulated via a switched mode power supply chip while the +320 V output follows the +18 V output by virtue of the turns ratio between them. The +18 V output is used to generate the cathode heating currents while the +320 V output generates the lamp arc currents. An LED on the board lights if the boost converter is generating high voltage).

Temperature Monitor An analogue temperature chip is used to monitor the temperature of the lamp driver. The output of this is checked with a comparator and the output fed back to the system board via an opto-isolator. A temperature higher than 75 C will be reported as an over-temperature failure. An over-temperature also causes the 

3-60

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

boost converter to shut down. This starts up again if the over-temperature condition is removed (see Figure 3.21).

Serial DAC The serial DAC (see Figure 3.22) is a single-chip 12-bit device with dual analogue outputs. The DAC is driven from the system board via opto-isolators to maintain good noise immunity. The system board supplies data and clock to the DAC and the data after passing through the DAC shift register is clocked back to the system board to act as a loopback check. The two channels are used as follows: • Channel 0 sets up the current for the transmission lamp, lamp, • Channel 1 sets up the current for both reflection lamps.

Serial ADC The serial ADC (see Figure 3.22) is a 12-bit device with four analogue inputs switched via a multiplexer. The same serial lines used for the DAC also control the ADC. The digital data from the ADC is fed back serially to the system board via an opto-isolator. The four channels are used as follows: • Channel 0 is used for the transmission lamp detector, • Channel 1 is used for the reflection lamp 1 detector, • Channel 2 is used for the reflection lamp 2 detector, • Channel 3 feeds back DAC channel 0 as a loopback test.

Five Lamp Interlock Circuit This circuit (see Figure 3.22) checks to see if there is a demand for all five lamps. If so, the reflection lamps are disabled.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-61

 

Functional Description

Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCO) To control lamp brightness, three separate VCOs (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25) are used for the transmission,, reflection, and light table lamps. As the frequency transmission is reduced, the lamp current goes up. The minimum frequency of  each VCO corresponds with maximum current which is set up using a potentiometer. The VCO pots are factory preset and should not be changed in the field. The DAC is used to control the transmission and reflection VCOs while the light table VCO is preset and fixed.

Heater Drivers To heat the cathodes of the lamps, the +18 V supply is chopped and the square wave fed via a heater transformer (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25) to the lamp cathodes. The preheating of the cathodes ensures that the lamps will rapidly start.

3-62

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

HEATER DRIVER

+18 V SET MAX CURRENT

+320 V REFLECTION LAMPS LEVEL

REFLECTION LAMPS ON

HALF BRIDGE

VCO

SWEEP CIRCUIT

REFLECTION LAMP 1 DETECTOR

DISABLE REFLECTION LAMPS (see Figure 3.22)

BALLAST CHOKE AND CAPACITOR BALLAST CHOKE AND CAPACITOR

LAMP 1 CATHODES LAMP 2 CATHODES

OPTO DETECTOR

REFLECTION LAMP 2 DETECTOR

OPTO DETECTOR Figure 3.24 Refle Reflection ction lamps drive driverr

Ballast Circuit There are three ballast circuits (see Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24, and Figure 3.25), one for each of the transmissio transmission, n, reflection, and light-table lamps. The +320 V supply is chopped using a pair of  MOSFETS arranged in a half bridge. The square wave is then passed through a ballast choke which limits the square wave current through the lamp. There are five ballast chokes, one for each lamp. In addition, a capacitor across each lamp is used to aid starting. When the lamp is switched on, the frequency of the VCO is swept downwards through the resonance of the ballast choke and capacitor. This causes a high initial voltage across the lamp to ensure efficient starting.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-63

 

Functional Description

HEATER DRIVER

+18 V

SET LIGHT TABLE CURRENT

+320 V

VCO FIXED FREQU

LIGHT TABLE LAMPS ON

HALF BRIDGE

BALLAST CHOKE AND CAPACITOR

BALLAST CHOKE AND CAPACITOR

LAMP 1 CATHODES

SWEEP CIRCUIT

LAMP 2 CATHODES

Figure Figur e 3.25 3.25 Light table lamps drive driverr

3.4.7

Sensors Enlargement Datum Sensor The enlargement-datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position the enlargement leadscrew drive to a known position at power-up. It is an accurate Hall-effect sensor mounted on the CCD carriage, operated by a metal vane attached to the lens carriage. Errors in the position of this sensor will result in images with the wrong size in one direction only; these errors can be corrected by re-calibration.

Focus Datum Sensor The focus-datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position the focus rack-and-pinion drive to a known position at power-up. It is an optical sensor mounted on the X-slide carriage, operated by a

3-64

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

metal vane attached to the CCD carriage. Errors in the position of  this sensor may result in preview scans being out of focus, but will not normally affect high-resolution scans as these use autofocus; such errors can be corrected by re-calibration. PL1

ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR

DIGITIZER BOARD SK2 FOCUS DATUM SENSOR

X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR

É

 É

É

 É

X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD PL7 É

 É

É

 É

TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD É

 É

É

É

É

É

 

É

 É

É

É

É

 

PL6 É

 É

É

 É

É

 É

É

 É

É

 É

PL3

É

PL2

SK3 SK4 SYSTEM BOARD  É

É

 É

Figure 3.26 Flexic Flexicable able sensor sensor interco interconnecti nnections ons

X-Slide Datum Sensor The X-slide datum sensor (see Figure 3.26) is used to position the X-slide leadscrew drive at a known position at power-up. power-up. It is an accurate Hall-effect Hall-effect sensor mounted on the main carriage, operated by a metal vane attached to the X-slide carriage. The datum position is near the middle of the X-slide motion. Errors in the position of this sensor may affect cropping of scans; this can be corrected by re-calibration.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-65

 

Functional Description

Main Carriage Datum Sensor The main-carriage datum sensor (see Figure 3.27) is used to position the main-carriage leadscrew-drive at a known position at power up. It is an optical sensor mounted on the base casting near the park end of the travel, operated by a metal vane attached to the main carriage. This sensor is used in combination with the encoder index pulse to provide an accurate datum position. Errors in the position of this sensor may, under some circumstances, cause gross errors in the alignment of overview scans to the clear area of the platen, which can be corrected by re-calibration. MAIN COVER INTERLOCK LH

LID INTERLOCK LH

DISPLAY BOARD

MAIN COVER INTERLOCK RH

LID INTERLOCK RH

PL1

PL2 PL3 PL1 Ä

Ä 

LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Ä 

CARRIAGE REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH

PL4

CARRIAGE DATUM SENSOR

Ä 

PL6

ENCLOSURE FAN FA N Ä

PL6

PL5

Ä 

PL4 PL3

RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

PL5 PL2

PL1

SYSTEM BOARD

SYSTEM BOARD

(PL1)

(SK1)

CARRIAGE FORWARD LIMIT SWITCH MAIN CARRIAGE MOTOR

Figure 3.27 Ribbon cable sensor sensor interco interconnecti nnections ons

3-66

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

Main Carriage Limit Sensors At each end of travel of the main carriage there is an over-trav over-travel el sensor. These sensors (see Figure 3.27) disable operation of the electronic drive to the main servo-motor in the outwards direction only. For example, the sensor at the forward end of travel (ie. when the main carriage is moving from right to left) prevents further motion in that direction but allows travel in the reverse direction. This protects the machine against damage in the case of  certain fault conditions, while still allowing it to recover itself. The over-travel sensors are optical sensors operated by the same vane on the main carriage that operates the carriage datum sensor.

3.4.8

Interlocks The interlock system (see Figure 3.28) has been designed to protect the user and service engineer from mechanical and electrical hazards. The scanner has been designed so that all user and field service operations can be carried out without the need to override the interlocks. The interlock system associated with the lid is designed to prevent hazards due to the movement of the transmission lightbar above the platen. It disables the main servo-motor when the lid is open with the lightbar fitted. The interlock system associated with the main cover is designed to prevent hazards from the movement of the scanner mechanisms and the high voltages used to power the fluorescent lamps. It disables all of the motors and the main enclosure fan and removes the DC power from the lamp driver when the cover is open. The interlock system associated with the transmission lightbar prevents high voltages from appearing on the exposed connector face when the lightbar is removed. The safety interlocks operate through two relays fitted to the system board. The left-hand (looking from the back of the scanner) relay interrupts the current to the main servo-motor; the right-hand relay interrupts the 24 V supply to the lamp driver and the main enclosure fan and also disables the stepper-motor drive

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-67 

 

Functional Description

circuits via logic on the system board. The relays have a red indicator to show when they are energised; for both relays the energised state is the state in which the corresponding motors can move. +24 V

+24 V MAIN COVER INTERLOCK SWITCHES

SERVO MOTOR DRIVER

PULL UP TO STEPPER MOTOR BRAKE LINES TO LAMP AND FANS

LEFT HAND RELAY

RIGHT HAND RELAY

SERVO MOTOR

+24 V +5 V

LID INTERLOCK SWITCHES 0V

LIGHTBAR INTERLOCK SWITCH 0V Figure Fig ure 3.28 3.28 Int Interl erlock ock syst system em

Two magnetic reed switches, fitted one each side of the main cover and wired in series, supply power from the 24 V supply to both relays. If the cover is open the reed switches are also open and both relays are released. Power to the left-hand relay is also wired through two magnetic reed switches, one on each side of the lid, and a mechanical switch fitted into the transmission lamp support column. For this relay to be energised, as well as the main covers being closed, either both of the lid interlock reed switches must be closed and/or the transmission-lamp column switch must be closed. The column switch is normally closed, and is forced open by the presence of a pin fitted to the transmission bar mounting mounting plate, so that when the bar is present the switch is open. There are current sensing elements within the interlock circuits which enable the control software to monitor the state of the interlock switches, but the operation of the interlocks is completely independent of other circuits on the system board.

3-68

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

3.4.9

Display Board The display board is mounted to the base casting at the front left of the machine. It provides a visual indication to the operator of  the state of the scanner. The board contains three LEDs which are driven by the system board. Current-limitin Current-limiting g resistors for the LEDs are on the system board. The display board is connected via a ribbon cable to the LH distribution board and from there via another ribbon cable to the system board. The display bezel which is part of the main cover uses light pipes to overcome problems with mechanical alignment. The functions of the three LEDs, from left to right are as follows: • Green LED for power on indicates +5 V supply present on

the system board. This LED is off in standby mode. • Yellow LED indicates when the scanner is ready and flashes

when busy scanning. • Yellow LED on during power on diagnostics and flashes if 

diagnostics fails or flashes if a fault develops during normal operation. All of these LEDs are high intensity types so that they are clearly visible.

3.4 .4..10

Dis istr trib ibu uti tio on Boa oarrds The distribution boards allow peripheral devices to be easily replaced in the field without disturbing the main wiring. There are four distribution boards in the scanner as follows: • LH distribution board - mounted on the base casting at the

left of the scanner, • RH distribution board - mounted on the base casting at the

right of the scanner, • Main-carriage distribution distribution board - mounted on the main

carriage and is part of a flexicable distribution boards assembly,

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-69

 

Functional Description

• X-slide distribution board - mounted on the X-slide carriage

and is part of the flexicable distribution boards assembly.

LH Distribution Board This connects via a 15-way ribbon cable to the system board. The devices connected to it are as follows: • Enclosure fan, • Display board, • Main-cover LH interlock, • Main-carriage forward-limit sensor.

PL3

PL1

PL4

PL5

PL6

PL2 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

RH Distribution Board This connects via a 25-way ribbon cable to the system board. The devices connected to it are as follows: • Main-carriage datum sensor, • Main-carriage reverse-limit sensor sensor,, • Main-cover RH interlock, • Lid interlocks.

3-70

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

PL3 PL4 PL5 PL1 PL2

PL6

RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Flexicable Distribution Boards Assembly These are part of a complex flexicable assembly assembly which interconnects via other flexicables to the system board. The devices connected to them are as follows: • X-slide motor, • X-slide datum sensor, • Lightbar interlock, • Focus datum sensor.

Figure 3.29 3.29 Flexi Flexicable cable distribu distribution tion boards boards assembly assembly

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-71

 

Functional Description

3.5

Motion Control 3.5.1

Main Carriage Drive Mechanism This mechanism comprises a DC servo-motor, with an attached encoder, which drives a leadscrew via a coupling. The leadscrew nut is clamped to the main carriage by a clamp plate. The leadscrew has a pitch of 8 mm. The servo motor produces 2000 clock pulses per revolution. Encoder Data A and Data B at 90° phase shift produce 8000 clock edges per revolution. This means, that for every encoder step of the motor, motor, the leadscrew gives a linear motion of 1 micron. The main carriage drive has a datum sensor and two limit sensors which have been described earlier. The main carriage is supported by a pair of C bearings (located at the rear of the scanner) and a pair of wheels that are bridged by the differential focus bar (located at the front). The main carriage has a traversing length of about 540 mm, with a maximum velocity of 100 mm/s. In the operating state, there is no direct access to the drive mechanism. However, when access is required the main cover is opened and the interlocks are activated to remove power from the motor circuit.

Main Carriage Sensors These sensors control the traversing limits and the actual position of the main carriage assembly. The servo motor is disabled if there is no possibility of access to the moving parts. That is when the: • main cover is open, • lid is open and the lightbar is fitted.

3-72

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

Forward Limit Sensor This sensor is located near to the servo motor and it is an opto-electric device that has its beam cut when the main carriage moves too far forward (i.e. toward the motor end of the main leadscrew) beyond the light-table removal position.

Reverse Limit Sensor This sensor is another opto-electric device that has its beam cut when the main carriage moves too far back from the datum sensor (i.e. beyond the park position).

Datum Sensor This sensor is located next to the reverse limit sensor, and is used at power up to find the actual position of the main carriage. The precise datum position is defined by the encoder. However, the datum sensor is needed because the encoder can only define the shaft position within one revolution of the servo motor.

3.5.2

Stepper Motor Control Commutation sequencing is achieved by decoding two TPU Commutation channels inside an ISP to produce a half-step sequence to the stepper-motor driver. The mechanical system has been designed to avoid the use of  holding currents to lock motor positions.

Ramping Ramping has been implemented using the TPU microcode. This gives a maximum number steps in the ramp of 56 and it means that the motor must ramp up to full speed in 56 steps in

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-73

 

Functional Description

full-step mode (quarter of a rev) or 56 half steps in half-step mode (eighth rev). The maximum step rate is determined by the motor torque and the mechanism drag coefficients. Ramping is used when the stepper motor cannot achieve a high enough speed for the mechanism in one step. The maximum speed a mechanism can achieve in one step is called the pull-in speed. The maximum speed a mechanism can achieve when ramped is called the pull-out speed. Ramping is used to accelerate the mechanism from its pull-in speed to the required traversing speed. When the inertia of the motor load is high, the pull-out speed can be a lot higher than the pull-in. The default ramp profile has a constant acceleration rate from a starting rate that is less than the pull-in rate of the mechanism, to a slewing rate that is less than the pull-out rate of the mechanism.  Note: To achieve a constant constant acceleration the acceleration acceleration ratio table is not linear.

An algorithm to generate the ramp table for a linear acceleration has been implemented.

Software Limits On power up the carriage will automatically traverse to the home sensor and achieve datum position. From then on the carriage travel limits will be defined by software for the full position range ( 160 mm from centre).

3-74

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

3.5 .5..3

X-S -Sli lid de Carr rria iag ge Dri riv ve Me Mech cha anis ism m The X-slide drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor attached to the well of the main-carriage casting. This stepper motor drives a leadscrew via a clamp. The anti-backlash nut of the leadscrew is attached to the side of the X-slide carriage.

Figure 3.30 X-Sli X-Slide de leadscre leadscrew w backlash backlash nut

The X-slide leadscrew has a pitch of 4 mm. The stepper motor provides 400 steps per revolution of the leadscrew. This means, that for every step of the motor, the leadscrew will give a linear motion of 10 microns. The X-slide drive mechanism has a midpoint datum-sensor fixed to the well of the main-carriage casting. The sensor vane is fitted to the end of the X-slide carriage. This feature ensures that the X-slide drive datum position can be set to an accuracy of within 10 microns (see Section 3.4.7). The X-slide carriage is supported by a pair of C bearings that are located at the right-hand end and a single cam follower that is located at the left-hand end. A guide bar maintains the perpendicular movement. The maximum travel is +/- 12200 steps

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-75

 

Functional Description

away from the datum position. This translates to +/- 122 mm away from the datum sensor. DS

X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR

X–SLIDE MOTOR

LEADSCREW FAST SCAN LENS

PL6

PL4

   N    A    C    S      W    O    L    S

MAIN CARRIAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DS

FOCUS DATUM SENSOR

DS

RACK

CCD SK1

   T    N    E    M   R    E   O    G   T    R   O    A   M    L    N    E

ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR

DIGITIZER PL1

FAN

SK1

PL3

PL2

X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

   Y    A    W   –    0    3

PL4

FOCUS MOTOR

SK2 30–WAY

PL7

MAIN CARRIAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure 3.31 3.31 Schema Schematic tic of X-slide X-slide carriage carriage interfa interfaces ces

3.5.4

Enlargement Drive Mechanis ism m The enlargement-drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor which directly drives a leadscrew via a clamp. The anti-backlash nut is attached to the lens mount (see Figure 3.32). The enlargement leadscrew has a pitch of 4 mm. The stepper motor provides 400 steps per revolution. This means, that for every step of the motor, the leadscrew gives a linear motion of  10 microns.

3-76

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

Figure Fig ure 3.32 3.32 Enl Enlarg argeme ement nt drive drive

The enlargement-drive mechanism has a datum sensor located  just below the CCD baffle. The sensor sensor vane is fitted to the rear of  the lens mount. This feature ensures that the enlargement-drive enlargement-drive datum can be set to an accuracy of within 10 microns (see Section 3.4.7). The maximum travel of the lens, away from the CCD mount, is 13,600 steps away from the datum position. This translates to 136 mm away from the datum sensor.

Table 3.1 3.1 Enlar Enlargement gement resol resolutions utions Resolution

Image Quality

Horizontal enlargement @ 12 l/mm Vertical Vertic al enlargement @ 12 l/mm Enlargement resolution Enlargement accuracy

20% to 2000% 20% to 2000% 0.1% +/- 0.3%

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-77 

 

Functional Description

3.5.5

Focus Drive Mechanism The focus-drive mechanism comprises a stepper motor with a pinion meshed to a fixed rack that is fixed to the side of the X-slide carriage casting (see Figure 3.33). The rack is a ground helicoidal helicoidal stainless-steel item, with a module of 0.4. The stepper motor provides 800 steps per revolution. This means, that for every step of the motor, the rack  gives a linear motion of 15.7 microns. FOCUS MOTOR PINION RACK

PL3

Figure 3.33 Focus drive mechan mechanism ism

The focus-drive mechanism has a datum sensor fixed to the rear of the left-hand end of the X-slide carriage casting. The sensor vane is fitted to the rear of the CCD mount. This feature ensures that the focus-drive datum can be set to an accuracy of within 15.7 microns (see Section 3.4.7). The maximum focus travel is 15,400 steps away from the datum position. This translates to 241.78 mm away from the datum sensor. Both the CCD mount and the lens mount are traversed along a common camera guide rail which utilizes a linear recirculating ball-bearing system.

3-78

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

3.6

Structure 3.6.1

Introduction The structure supporting the unit modules comprises four main load bearing sub-assemblies and several enclosures which cover the unit modules. These unit modules and enclosures are shown in Figure 3.34.

LID MAIN COVER

BASESUPPORT AND PLATEN

ENCLOSURE FAN FILTER HOUSING STAND

PEDESTAL

STAND COVERS

Figure 3.34 C-550 Lanovi Lanovia a scanner scanner structure structure

3.6.2

Stand The stand is that part of the structure which makes contact with the floor. The stand has four castors for moving the scanner and two adjustable feet for levelling the scanner when in position. The primary function of the stand is to support the pedestal and base. The stand does not form any part of the EMC protection.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-79

 

Functional Description

Two stand covers are provided for an aesthetic effect.

3.6.3

Pedestal The pedestal is that part of the structure which interfaces between the stand and the base. Its height determines a comfortable working level for the fixed platen. The pedestal does not form any part of the EMC protection. However, the RFI box is connected to an external ground connection through the main switch.

3.6.4

Base The base is the major part of the structure because it supports all modules except those which are contained in the RFI box. The base has several functions which are as follows: • to support the main carriage guide rails and to maintain their

parallel relationship relationship,, • to support the main-carriage assembly which supports and

contains several sub-assemb sub-assemblies, lies, • to support the fixed platen support sub-structure and to

maintain its parallel relationship to the main-carriage guide rails,

• to support the main cover and its interlocks, • to support the main carriage datum and limit sensors, • to support the enclosure fan-filter housing, • to house the following major electrical components: •

main-carriage servo-motor servo-motor and its cable loom,

•

standby switch and cable loom,

3-80

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

•

enclosure fan and cable loom,

•

display board and ribbon cable,

•

LH and RH distribution boards and their ribbon cables,

•

50-way and 62-way flexicables.

The base does not form any part of the EMC protection.

Figure 3.35 Base and platen platen suppor supportt

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

3-81

 

Functional Description

3.6.5

Platen Support The support that partofofthe theplaten structure which mounted on toplaten the base. The is functions support areisas follows: • to locate and support the fixed glass platen to maintain the

parallel relationship with the main carriage guide rails in both the vertical and horizontal planes, • to locate and support the lid and its interlocks, • to provide a load base for the following items: •

originals and copyholders,

•

3D objects or bound books up to 4 kg in weight,

• to provide a load-bearing path through the base, pedestal, and

stand, for any loads placed upon the lid and main cover.

The platen support does not form any part of the EMC protection.

3.6.6

Enclosure Fan Filter Housing This housing encloses the filter which prevents the ingress of dust and dirt through the enclosure fan. Its functions are as follows: • to support a filter of adequate size, • to position the filter at an adequate distance from the fan

blades, to ensure consistent cooling for the electrical components housed within the base, and within the main carriage assembly, • to allow for a quick removal of the filter for cleaning or

replacement. The filter housing does not form any part of the EMC protection.

3-82

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Functional Description

3.6.7

Main Cover The main cover encloses theThe scanning assemblies which are the driven by electrical motors. main cover does not enclose fixed platen glass. Its functions are as follows: • to form a safety barrier between the operator and all moving

parts that are contained by the base and the main carriage assembly, • to protect the non-load bearing sub-assemblies, sub-assemblies, • to provide the operator with an access path to the reflection

lamps and to the light-table lamps (that are contained underneath the fixed platen) for changing them, • to minimize any light spillage from the internal fluorescent

lamps, • to provide a suitable support for the reflection white-balance

strip, • to provide the customer-service engineer with an easy access

to the unit modules that may need to be replaced during the life of the scanner, • to protect the internal unit modules from the ingress of dust,

dirt, or moisture, • to provide suitable ventilation for the escape of any heat

generated by the internal electrical componen components. ts. The main cover does not form any part of the EMC protection.

3.6.8

Lid The lid encloses the lightbar assembly and covers the platen area Its functions are as follows: • to form a safety barrier between the operator and the moving

transmission scanning lightbar, • to minimize any light spillage from the transmission

fluorescent lamp,

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800003 6700800003

 

Functional Description

• to protect the platen glass and to minimize the amount of 

falling dust and dirt. The lid does not form any part of the EMC protection.

3-83

3-84

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

4

Unit Replacement Procedures This chapter provides a detailed description of each replaceable unit and any adjustments required.

4.1

Recommended List of Tools The following tools may be required for the removal of certain replaceable units. • Range of metric ball-ended hexagonal wrenches (e.g. Allen

keys), • Range of metric open-ended spanners, • Crosspoint screwdriver set, • Flatpoint screwdriver set, • Disposable antistatic wrist strap, • Antistatic pliers, • Engineer’ Engineer’ss terminal and cable (Laptop PC with terminal

emulation software), • RS232 Terminal diagnostic cable, • Digital multimeter with probes, • Lightbar alignment target, • Lightbar alignment tool, • Differential focus target, • System calibration target,

 

System calibration target,  Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-1

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

• Electronic repro slide, • Protrusion height ruler, • Antistatic cleaning fluid, • Repro wipes, • Cotton buds, • Latex disposable gloves, • Squeeze bulb - without brush • Lint-free cloth for general cleaning, • Sable brush, • VT Terminal or laptop, • Glass polishing cloth, • Selvyt cloth, • Supports for the lid and main cover.

4.2

Preparation for for Re Replacement Pr Procedures The term replacement always relates to the fitment of a new or different unit. This term does not relate to the re-fitment of the same unit as part of a complex replacement procedure. procedure. Before performing any of the following replacement replacement procedures, make certain that the correct units and tools are available. Re-fit always relates to the fitment of the existing unit.

4-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.3

Replacement Pr Procedures Certain modules can be accessed and replaced without having to open the main cover. These are as follows: • Light bar assembly, • Enclosure fan filter, • Stand covers,. • Lightbar interlock, • RFI box components (modules), • Lid assembly and its gas struts.

See Figure 4.1 for the hierarchical menu for reaching the relevant module to be replaced. LEVEL-0 MODULES Lightbar Assembly

Stand Covers Lightbar Interlock

System Board

Enclosure Fan Filter

Lid Assembly

RFI Box Fan

Mains Switch

PSU

Main-Cover

Reflection

Assembly

White Balance Strip

LEVEL-1 MODULES

Standby Switch

Interlocks

Platen Sensors

Light Table

Enclosure Fan Mirror

LEVEL-2 MODULES

Main Leadscrew Drive

Lamp Driver Module

X-slide Carriage Assembly

Main Carriage Assembly

Figure Fig ure 4.1 Ser Servic vice e tree tree

Reflection Column Assembly

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-3

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

The main cover must be opened before any of the Level 1 modules can be replaced. The light table must be removed before any Level 2 modules can be replaced. Once a faulty component has been identified, follow the relevant instructions to ensure a correct operation of the scanner: 1. Replace Replace the the modul modulee as desc describe ribed d in the follo following wing sub-sections of this section. 2. Run termin terminal al diagno diagnostics stics (see Sectio Section n 5.4) via via the RS23 RS232 2 port to validate the elimination of the fault. 3. Perform Perform the the carriage carriage align alignmen mentt procedu procedures res when when require required d (see Section 6.4.2 and Section 6.4.3). 4. Perform Perform the the system system calibr calibration ation proc procedur edures es when when required required (see (see Section 6.5). 5. Perform Perform the the electron electronic ic repro repro test test procedu procedure re (see Secti Section on 7.6) 7.6) before handing the scanner back to the customer.

4-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.4

Lightbar Assembly 4.4.1

Lightbar The following preparations must be made. Open the lid.

Removal Procedure 1. Un Unsc scre rew w the the lig light htba barr knob knob.. 2. Lift the the lightba lightbarr assembly assembly and remov removee it from from the inter interface face plate of the reflection column.

Figure Fig ure 4.2 4.2 Lig Lightb htbar ar assem assembly bly

Replacement Procedure  replacementt always relates to the fitment of a  Note: The term replacemen new or different unit.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-5

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

1. Slacken Slacken the the four four caphead caphead screw screwss securin securing g the the lightba lightbarr interface plate. 2. Fit the the replace replacemen mentt lightba lightbarr assemb assembly ly.. 3. Loo Loosel sely y secu secure re the the lig lightb htbar ar kno knob. b. 4. Perfo Perform rm the the lightbar lightbar align alignmen mentt procedur proceduree (see Sectio Section n 6.4.2). 6.4.2). 5. Ful Fully ly tig tighte hten n the the ligh lightba tbarr knob. knob. 6. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

4.4.2

Transmission Lamp

Figure Fig ure 4.3 4.3 Tran ransmi smissi ssion on lamp lamp

4-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Remo Remove ve the the light lightbar bar assem assembly bly (see Secti Section on 4.4.1 4.4.1). ).

Lamp Removal Procedure 1. Turn Turn lightbar lightbar assemb assembly ly over to revea reveall the transmis transmission sion-baf -baffle fle plate. 2. Und Undo o the the four four slot slotted ted cap captiv tivee screw screws. s. 3. Rem Remov ovee the trans transmi missi ssion on-ba -baff ffle le plate plate.. 4. Rotate Rotate the lamp to align align the the electrica electricall contact contact pins pins with with the the exit slots. 5. Lif Liftt out out the tra trans nsmis missio sion n lamp lamp..

Checking, Cleaning and Removing the Diffuser 1. An opal opal acrylic acrylic diff diffuser user is is attached attached to the the inside inside of of the transmission baffle. This must be checked for cleanliness and signs of deterioration deterioration.. 2. With the the baffle baffle removed removed as describ described ed in the the previous previous secti section, on, inspect the diffuser. 3. If dusty dusty,, brush brush both both surfaces surfaces with an anti-st anti-static atic brush brush.. 4. If the dif diffus fuser er has has deteri deteriora orated ted,, replace replace it. it. a) Remove Remove the old old diffuser diffuser.. It is attached attached with with double double-sid -sided ed tape. b) Remove Remove the protec protective tive backin backing g from the strips strips of of tape on on the new diffuser. c) Attach Attach the diffu diffuser ser to the the inside inside of the the transmiss transmission ion baffl bafflee so that the window in the baffle is covered by the diffuser.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-7 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Lamp Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the the replac replacem ement ent tran transmi smissi ssion on lamp lamp..  Note: Ensur Ensuree the lamp aperture aperture is facing upward upward (i.e. toward the transmission-baffle plate). 2. Rotate Rotate the lamp to align align the the electrica electricall contact contact pins pins with with the the entry slots. 3. ReRe-fit fit the the transmi transmissi ssion on-ba -baff ffle le plate plate.. 4. Fit the fou fourr slott slotted ed capt captiv ivee screw screws. s. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt the the lightb lightbar ar assem assembly bly (see Sect Section ion 4.4.1 4.4.1). ). 6. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

4.4 .4..3

Tra ran nsm smis issi sio on La Lam mp De Dete tect ctor or Boa oarrd

LAMP DETECTOR BOARD

Figure 4.4 Tr Transmis ansmission sion lamp lamp detector detector board board

The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the li lid.

4-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Remo Remove ve the the lightba lightbarr assemb assembly ly (see (see Sectio Section n 4.4.1) 4.4.1).. 3. Remo Remove ve the the trans transmiss mission ion lamp (see Secti Section on 4.4.2 4.4.2). ).

Removal Procedure 1. Di Disc scon onne nect ct ca cabl blee plu plug. g. 2. Remove Remove the the 2 mm mm counte countersun rsunk k screw screw to relea release se the the lamp lamp detector board. 3. Remo Remove ve the plas plastic tic screw screw to relea release se detecto detectorr board board baffle. baffle.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit screw screw to secure secure baf baffle fle to repla replaceme cement nt lamp lamp detecto detectorr board. board. 2. Fit counte countersun rsunk k screw screw to secure secure repla replaceme cement nt detector detector boar board. d. 3. Co Conn nnec ectt cabl cablee plu plug. g. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt trans transmiss mission ion lamp (see Sect Section ion 4.4. 4.4.2). 2). 5. ReRe-fit fit tra transm nsmiss ission ion ba baff ffle le plat plate. e. 6. Re-fi Re-fitt the the lightb lightbar ar assem assembly bly (see Sect Section ion 4.4.1 4.4.1). ). 7. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-9

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.5

Lightbar Interlock The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Remo Remove ve the the light lightbar bar assem assembly bly (see Secti Section on 4.4.1 4.4.1). ).

Figure Fig ure 4.5 4.5 Lig Lightba htbarr interlo interlock ck

CAUTION   Do NOT attempt to adjust the lightbar interface plate.

Removal Procedure 1. Remo Remove ve one one caps capscrew crew retai retaining ning the keep plat plate. e. 2. Lift out out cable cable conn connecto ector, r, with with its its keep plate, plate, from from its its slot. slot.

4-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Disco Disconnec nnectt two two wires wires from the inte interlock rlock swit switch. ch. 4. Remove Remove two screw screwss securing securing the interlo interlock ck switch switch to its keep plate.  Note: Retain the keep plate.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit two screw screwss to secure secure the keep keep plate plate to the the replacem replacement ent switch. 2. Conn Connect ect two wires to the the new new interl interlock ock switc switch. h. 3. Fit keep keep plate and secu secure re with with one one capsc capscrew rew.. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt the the lightb lightbar ar assem assembly bly (see Sect Section ion 4.4.1 4.4.1). ). 5. Close lid.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-11

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.6

Refl fleecti tio on Tray an and Tr Transmission Co Column HIGH V OLTAGE VOLT AGE CONNECTOR

Figure Figur e 4.6 Refle Reflection ction Tray Tray and Transm Transmission ission Column

 Note: If the high-voltage connector connector is damaged the the reflection-tray and transmission column assembly must be replaced using the procedure described below.

The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Remo Remove ve the the light lightbar bar assem assembly bly (see Secti Section on 4.4.1 4.4.1). ). 3. Op Open en th thee mai main n co cove verr.

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove the the plate plate suppor supportt (6 screw screws), s), comple complete te with with the the platen. 2. Remo Remove ve the cov cover er from from the lamp lamp-driv -driver er board board.. 3. Rem Remov ovee the light light tabl table, e, (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

4-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Disconnec Disconnectt the trans transmiss mission ion and and reflect reflection ion connec connectors, tors, PL1 and PL2 from the lamp-driver board. 5. Disconnec Disconnectt the 25-w 25-way ay D-type D-type conn connecto ector, r, SK1, SK1, from from the lamp-driver board. 6. Disconnec Disconnectt the earth earth cable cable betwe between en the colu column mn assemb assembly ly and the lamp-driver board. 7. Remove Remove the the two screw screwss at the the front front of the the reflecti reflection-l on-lamp amp driver tray. 8. Remove Remove the the four, four, 5 mm Allen screw screwss from from the base of the the column. 9. Move the camer cameraa head head to the the front front of of the scann scanner er by rotat rotating ing the X-slide leadscrew. 10. Remove the the two black wires to the transmission transmission-arm -arm interlock switch from the cable guides cutting the tie-wraps where necessary. 11. Disconnect PL5 PL5 from the traverse distribution-bo distribution-board ard (transmission-arm (transmission -arm interlock cable). 12. Lift off the complete complete reflection-tray and column column assembly. assembly.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the the new reflec reflection tion-tray -tray and colu column mn assem assembly bly.. 2. Ti Tighte ghten n the the four four screws screws at at the base of the the column column.. 3. Connect Connect the the transmis transmission sion-int -interloc erlock k cable cable to PL5 on on the the traverse distribution distribution-board. -board. 4. Re-fit Re-fit the tie-w tie-wraps raps and posit position ion the the cable cable under under the cable cable guides. 5. Conn Connect ect PL1 and PL2 to the the lamp lamp-driv -driver er board board.. 6. Con Connec nectt SK1 to the the lamp lamp-dr -driv iver er board board.. 7. Conn Connect ect the the earth earth cable cable from from the colu column mn assemb assembly ly..

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-13

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

8. Check Check the full camer cameraa movemen movementt in all all directio directions ns to ensu ensure re that there is no interference to the cables. 9. Re Re-f -fit it the the th thee ligh lightt tabl table. e. 10. Re-fit the plate support support and and platen. platen. 11. Clos Closee the main cover cover.. 12. Re-fit the transmission lightbar lightbar.. 13. Perform the transmission-b transmission-bar ar alignment alignment as described described in Section 6.4.2. 14. Remove the the transmission transmission lightbar lightbar.. 15. Open the the main cover cover.. 16. Re-fit the transmission lightbar lightbar.. 17. Align the reflection-tray assembly centrally under under the transmission lightbar lightbar using the two screws at the rear of the reflection tray and two screws at the front of the tray. If  necessary, remove the platen support to measure the alignment. 18. Remove the the transmission transmission lightbar lightbar.. 19. Clos Closee the main cover cover.. 20. Re-fit the transmission lightbar lightbar.. 21. Check the the scanner scanner in all modes. modes.

4-14

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.7

Stand Covers There are no preparations to be performed.

Figure Fig ure 4.7 Sta Stand nd cove covers rs

Removal Procedure 1. Grasp the stand stand cove coverr and pull upwa upward rd to relea release se the the four four velcro contact-pads contact-pads..

Replacement Procedure 1. Hold and align align the replac replacemen ementt stand stand cover cover,, then pres presss downward to hold the velcro contact-pads.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-15

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.8

Enclosure Fan Filter There are no special preparations to be performed.

Figure Fig ure 4.8 4.8 Enc Enclos losure ure fan fan filter filter

Removal Procedure 1. Undo two two thumbsc thumbscrews rews securin securing g the lift-of lift-offf hinged hinged cover cover.. 2. Rem Remov ovee cove coverr from from hin hinge ge poi points nts.. 3. Un Unho hook ok fil filte terr retai retaine nerr clip clip.. 4. Rem Remov ovee filter filter and and clea clean n if neces necessar sary y.

Replacement Procedure 1. Re-fi Re-fitt the clea cleaned ned filter filter or fit fit a replace replacement ment filte filterr. 2. ReRe-hoo hook k the the fil filter ter ret retain ainer er clip clip.. 3. ReRe-fit fit cov cover er to hin hinge ge po point ints. s.

4-16

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Locate Locate and and fingerfinger-tigh tighten ten the the thumbscre thumbscrews ws to secure secure filter filter cover.

4.9

RFI Box Modules 4.9.1

RFI Box Cover  Note: To disconnect the flexi and ribbon ribbon cables from from the internal modules, it will be necessary to remove the RFI-box cover.

There are no preparations to be performed.

Removal Procedure

 

Figure Fig ure 4.9 4.9 RFI box box removi removing ng cover cover

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-17 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

1. Undo two captiv captivee screws screws using using a 4 mm hexa hexagon gonal al wrench. wrench. 2. Grasp the RFI-bo RFI-box x cover cover,, lift and and withdraw withdraw from from the the pedestal. pedestal.

Replacement Procedure 1. Prese Present nt the the replacem replacement ent RFI-bo RFI-box x cover cover and fit to the pedes pedestal. tal. 2. Sec Secure ure the two cap captiv tivee scre screws. ws.

4.9.2

System Board The following preparations must be made. 1. If possibl possible, e, save save the syste system m calibrat calibration ion data data to the Macint Macintosh osh or a floppy disk using Read Buffer as described in Section 7.3.5.  Note: This step can be omitted if a previously previously saved  calibration disk is available for the scanner.

2. Power Power off off the machi machine ne at the suppl supply y and leav leavee the main mainss lead lead connected to earth the machine. SK1

PL1

SK2

SK3

SK4

PL2

PSU Figure Fig ure 4.1 4.10 0 Sys System tem boar board d

RS232

SK5

DIAGNOSTICS

SW1

SCSI ADDRESS

PL3

SCSI & TERMINATOR CONNECTORS

4-18

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Rem Remov ovee the RFI RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1) 4.9.1).. 4. Put on on the disp disposa osable ble anti antista static tic wrist wrist stra strap. p.

CAUTION  The static energy in your body can  destroy sensitive components on the  printed circuit board.

CAUTION   Do NOT pull on flexicables to  remove their connectors. To do so will cause damage.

Removal Procedure 1. Affix Affix the free free end end of the the antistati antistaticc strap strap to a suitab suitable le earthing earthing point. 2. Dis Discon connec nectt the the SCSI SCSI inter interfac facee cable cable.. 3. Dis Discon connec nectt the the SCSI SCSI term termina inator tor.. 4. Remo Remove ve sem scre screw w, located located above above the SCSI SCSI termin terminator ator.. 5. Dis Discon connec nectt the RS23 RS232 2 cable cable (if conn connect ected) ed).. 6. Remove Remove the the 3 mm Allen screw screw(s), (s), to to release release the the earthing earthing strip of the 50-way flexicable. 7. Disconnec Disconnectt power power connect connector or (PL2) (PL2) from from the syst system em board board to PSU. 8. Disco Disconnec nnectt the five five conne connectors ctors on the the top of of the RFI RFI box. box. 9. Remo Remove ve one one sem screw secu securing ring syst system em board board belo below w power power connector PL2.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-19

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

10. Remove three sem sem screws securing securing the bottom of the system board. 11. Remove three sem sem screws securing securing the top of the the system board.  Note: As these screws screws are released, released, hold the bottom of the system board to stop it from falling and pull it forward  to ease it away from the RFI box.

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion the the replacem replacement ent syste system m board board in in the the RFI box box.. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt three three sem sem screws screws to the the top of the the system system boa board. rd.  Note: Do not tighten these screws screws until all the screws screws have been fitted.

3. Re-fi Re-fitt three three sem screw screwss to the the bottom bottom of of the syste system m board. board. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt one one sem sem screw screw belo below w power power conn connector ector PL2. 5. Ti Tighte ghten n all seven seven sem screws screws to secure secure the the system system boar board. d. 6. Re-co Re-connec nnectt the five five conne connectors ctors on the the top of of the RFI RFI box. box. 7. Re-fit Re-fit the 4 mm Allen Allen screw screw to to secure secure the the earthing earthing strip of the the 50-way flexicable. 8. Re-fi Re-fitt power power connect connector or (PL2) (PL2) from from the syst system em board board to PSU. 9. Re-fi Re-fitt sem screw loca located ted above above the SCSI term terminat inator or.. 10. Re-connect the SCSI terminator terminator.. 11. Re-co Re-connec nnectt the SCSI interface interface cable. 12. Relea Release se the antistatic antistatic wrist-strap. wrist-strap. 13. Re-fi Re-fitt the RFI box cover cover.. 14. Switc Switch h on the the system system.. 15. Use Write Write Buffer as described described in Section Section 7.3.5 to restore restore the saved system calibration data from the Macintosh or a floppy disk..

4-20

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.9.3

Dongle fo for Sp Sprint Op Operation A dongle can be fitted to the Kicker system board to enable the Sprint enhancements. In the event of the dongle becoming damaged it will be necessary to return the dongle in order to obtain a replacement.

Removal Procedure PL10

DONGLE

Figure 4.1 4.11 1 Remov Removing ing and fitting fitting the dongle dongle

1. Power Power off off the machi machine ne at the suppl supply y and leav leavee the main mainss lead lead connected to earth the machine. 2. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-21

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Put on the the disp disposa osable ble anti antista static tic wrist wrist stra strap. p.

CAUTION  The static energy in your body can  destroy sensitive components on the  system board and the dongle. 4. Carefully Carefully remo remove ve the the dongle dongle from from the the plug plug on the the system system board. See Figure 4.11.

Replacement Procedure Ensure that the power to the scanner is still off and that you are still wearing the disposable antistatic wrist strap. 1. Fit the the dongle dongle to PL10 on the the system system board board,, noting noting the the orientation as shown in Figure 4.11. 2. Rel Releas easee the the antis antistat tatic ic wris wrist-s t-stra trap. p. 3. Re Re-f -fit it the the RF RFII box box co cove verr. 4. Sw Swit itch ch on th thee syst system em..

4.9.4

PSU and Cable Loom The following preparations must be made.

CAUTION   Make certain that the mains supply  plug has been disconnected from the  RFI box socket.

1. Iso Isolat latee the main mainss power power to to the scan scanner ner..

4-22

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Remo Remove ve the the mains mains supp supply ly cable cable from from the the RFI-bo RFI-box x socket. socket. 3. Remo Remove ve the the RFI-b RFI-box ox cove coverr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1) 4.9.1)..

Figure Figur e 4.12 4.12 WA 304 PSU PSU and cable cable loom loom

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-23

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure 4.13 Siriu Sirius s 250 PSU and and cable cable loom

Removal Procedure 1. Remo Remove ve two two sem screw screwss securing securing the mains mains switc switch h safety safety

cover.

4-24

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Remove Remove plastic plastic cover cover on the PSU PSU by levering levering off off (WA (WA 304 304 only). 3. On the WA WA 304, 304, unscrew unscrew the the three mains mains wires wires from from the input input to the PSU. On the Sirius 250, pull off the Faston connectors from the filter on the PSU assembly. 4. Dis Discon connec nectt PL2 PL2 from from the the syste system m board board.. 5. Undo the two two sem scre screws ws securin securing g the load resis resistor tor at the right-hand side of the RFI box (WA 304 only). 6. Cut the the approp appropriate riate tie-w tie-wraps raps to free free the RFI-b RFI-box ox fan fan inline inline connector cable. 7. Disco Disconnec nnectt the the RFI-bo RFI-box x fan fan inline inline conn connecto ectorr. 8. Disco Disconnec nnectt the stan standby dby switc switch h inline inline conn connecto ectorr. 9. Remove Remove the the four four crosspoi crosspoint nt screws screws from the the undersi underside de of the RFI box. 10. Remove the PSU with its cable loom. loom.

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion the the repla replaceme cement nt PSU PSU with within in the the RFI RFI box. box. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt the four cros crosspoi spoint nt screws screws to secure secure the PSU. PSU. 3. Fit and and tighten tighten two sem sem screws screws to to secure secure the load resis resistor tor at the right-hand side of the RFI box (WA 304 only). 4. Conn Connect ect the the stand standby-s by-switch witch inli inline ne conne connector ctor.. 5. Conn Connect ect the RFI-b RFI-box ox fan inli inline ne conn connector ector.. 6. Con Connec nectt PL2 PL2 to to the the sys system tem bo board ard.. 7. Fit the the tie-wraps tie-wraps to capture capture the the RFI-bo RFI-box x fan inlin inline-con e-connect nector or cable. 8. Re-co Re-connec nnectt the the three three mains mains wires to the the PSU PSU input input.. 9. Re-fi Re-fitt the plastic plastic protect protective ive cover cover to the the PSU (WA (WA 304 304 only). only).

 

10. Re fit the mains switch switch safety cover cover and secure with two sem screws.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-25

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

11. Re-fit the RFI RFI box cover (see Section 4.9.1). 4.9.1). 12. Re-connect the mains mains supply supply cable. cable.

4.9.5

RFI Box Cooling Fan

INLINE CONNECTOR

Figure Fig ure 4.14 4.14 RFI RFI-box -box cool cooling ing fan fan

The following preparations must be made. 1. Iso Isolat latee the main mainss power power to to the scan scanner ner.. 2. Remo Remove ve the the mains mains supply supply cabl cablee from the RFI-bo RFI-box x socket socket.. 3. Remo Remove ve the the RFI-b RFI-box ox cove coverr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1) 4.9.1)..

4-26

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure 1. Disconnec Disconnectt the the in-lin in-linee electri electrical cal conn connecto ectorr. 2. Cut tie tie-wr -wrap ap belo below w the the cooli cooling ng fan fan.. 3. Remove Remove the the four four machine machine screw screwss and capt captive ive nuts nuts to to release release the cooling fan. 4. Re Remo move ve th thee coo cooli ling ng fa fan. n.

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the the replac replaceme ement nt coo coolin ling g fan. fan. 2. Re-fit Re-fit the four four machi machine ne screws screws and and captiv captivee nuts nuts and in turn, turn, tighten them in diagonally opposite opposite pairs. 3. Re-co Re-connec nnectt the the in-li in-line ne elect electrical rical conn connecto ectorr. 4. Fi Fitt a tie tie-w -wra rap p to to sui suit. t. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt the the RFI-b RFI-box ox cove coverr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 6. ReRe-con connec nectt the the main mainss supp supply ly cabl cable. e.

4.9.6

Main Power Switch The following preparations must be made.

WARNING  Make certain the mains supply to the  scanner has been isolated. 1. Iso Isolat latee the main mainss power power to to the scan scanner ner.. 2. Remo Remove ve the the mains-s mains-suppl upply y cable cable from from the RFI box box socke socket. t.

 

3. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-27 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.15 4.15 Mai Mains ns power power swit switch ch

Removal Procedure 1. Remo Remove ve two two screws screws secu securing ring the swit switch ch cover cover.. 2. Re Remo move ve the the swi switc tch h cove coverr. 3. Pul Pulll off the the elect electric rical al wires wires from from thei theirr tabs. tabs. 4. Squeeze Squeeze the the top and and bottom bottom barb barbss of the the switch switch to allow its easement through the side of the RFI box.

Replacement Procedure

1. Fi Fitt the the repl replac acem emen entt swit switch ch..

4-28

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Pus Push h the elec electri trical cal wire wiress on to to their their tabs tabs.. 3. Re Re-f -fit it the the sw swit itch ch co cove verr. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt the two screws screws to secure secure the switc switch h cover cover.. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt the the RFI-b RFI-box ox cove coverr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 6. ReRe-con connec nectt the the mains mains-su -supp pply ly cabl cable. e.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-29

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 .10 0

Pro Pr ote tect ctiv ivee Co Cove vers rs and Ga Gass St Stru ruts ts 4.10.1

Lid Gas-Struts The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Sup Suppo port rt the the lid in the the open open po posit sition ion..  Note: Support is requir required ed to maintain the lid in the open  position once both gas struts are are removed. removed.

Figure Fig ure 4.16 4.16 Lid gasgas-str struts uts

Removal Procedure  Note: When the replacement replacement of both gas struts struts is required, required, individually remove and replace each to maintain support to the lid.

4-30

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Perform this removal procedure and Steps 1 to 4 of the replacement procedure for the first gas strut and then  perform both procedur procedures es for the second gas strut. 1. +Use a small small flatpoi flatpoint nt screwdr screwdriver iver to remove remove the the retaini retaining ng circlip from the upper pin.

2. Release Release and and lower lower the the gas stru strutt until until it rests on the the main main cover. 3. Remo Remove ve nut nut from its lower lower mount mount and and remove remove the the gas gas strut. strut.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit repla replacem cement ent gas gas strut strut to to its low lower er moun mount. t. 2. Fi Fitt aand nd ti tigh ghte ten n nut nut.. 3. Rais Raisee gas gas strut strut and and fit fit to the uppe upperr bracket bracket pin. 4. Fi Fitt the the ret retai aini ning ng ci circ rcli lip. p. 5. Re Remo move ve th thee lid lid su supp ppor ort. t. 6. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

4.10.2

Lid Assembly The following preparations must be made. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Sup Suppo port rt the the lid in the the open open po posit sition ion..  Note: Support is requir required ed to maintain the lid in the open  position once both gas struts are are removed. removed.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-31

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure 1. Use a smal smalll flatpoin flatpointt screwdriv screwdriver er to remo remove ve the the retainin retaining g circlip from the upper pin. 2. Release Release and and lower lower the the gas stru strutt until until it rests on the the main main cover.

Figure Fig ure 4.1 4.17 7 Lid ass assemb embly ly

3. Unscrew Unscrew two sem sem screws screws secu securing ring the upper upper brack bracket et to the underside of the lid and lower the bracket. 4. Rep Repeat eat Step Stepss 1 to 3 for for the the other other gas gas stru strut. t. 5. Re Remo move ve li lid d ass assem embl bly y.

Replacement Procedure  Note: Support is require required d to maintain the lid in the open position while both gas struts are being fitted.

1. Posi Position tion the repl replacem acement ent lidlid-cove coverr assemb assembly ly.. 2. Alig Align n the upp upper er bracket bracket to the the unders underside ide of of the lid.

3. Fit and and tighten tighten two sem sem screws screws to to secure secure the the upper upper bracket bracket..

4-32

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Rais Raisee the gas strut strut and fit fit to the uppe upperr bracket bracket pin. 5. Fi Fitt the the ret retai aini ning ng ci circ rcli lip. p. 6. Rem Remov ovee the the lid lid-co -cover ver sup suppo port. rt. 7. Repe Repeat at steps steps 2 to 5 for for the othe otherr bracket bracket and gas strut strut.. 8. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-33

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.11

Main Cover  Note: To access the internal parts parts of the scanner, scanner, it is necessary to open the main cover.

Figure Fig ure 4.18 4.18 Ope Openin ning g the main main cover cover

Open Procedure 1. Open the li lid. 2. Remo Remove ve the the light lightbar bar assem assembly bly (see Secti Section on 4.4.1 4.4.1). ). 3. Use a coin coin to to twist twist and and release release the the two latch latches es of the the main main cover.  Note: Make sure sure the lid is closed before opening the main cover.

4. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

5. Li Lift ft the the ma main in co cove verr to op open en..

4-34

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Close Procedure 1. Cl Clos osee the the ma main in co cove verr. 2. Open the li lid. 3. Use a coin coin to to twist twist and and secure secure the the two latch latches es of the the main main cover. 4. Pow Power er on the sca scann nner er and and work worksta statio tion. n. 5. Check Check that the the applicat application ion softwa software re has initia initiated ted a reset reset of the the scanner’ss characteristics. scanner’ 6. Fit the ligh lightbar tbar assem assembly bly (see Secti Section on 4.4.1 4.4.1). ). 7. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

4.1 4. 11. 1.1 1

Refl Re flec ecti tion on Wh Whit itee-Ba Bala lanc ncee Stri Strip p There are no special preparations to be performed.

REFLECTION WHITE BALANCE STRIP

Figure 4.19 Refle Reflection ction whitewhite-balanc balance e strip strip

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-35

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

 Note: This self-adhesive strip is fitted to the underside of the main cover and is used to reflect the light from the  Reflection lamps. The main cover has four markers produced in the mould. Two of the markers indicate the top and bottom extremes and the other two equidistant markers are centrally sited  on the right.

Removal Procedure 1. Usin Using g a spatula spatula,, lift off the old old white-b white-balanc alancee strip. strip. 2. Di Disc scar ard d the the remo remove ved d stri strip. p. 3. Using Using isoprop isopropyl yl alcoho alcohol, l, remove remove any any residu residual al adhesi adhesive ve substances.

Replacement Procedure 1. Place a thumbn thumbnail ail betwee between n the the strip strip and its backin backing. g. 2. Lift off off 25 25 mm of of the backi backing ng and and present present the the top edge to the the top marker. 3. Mak Makee certai certain n the stri strip p is corre correctl ctly y aligne aligned. d. 4. Apply Apply pressu pressure re to the top top edge, edge, and grad graduall ually y peel peel the backing as the strip is laid. 5. Make certai certain n the strip is correctl correctly y positio positioned ned withi within n its four four markers. 6. Apply Apply firm pres pressure sure to to the surf surface ace of the strip strip to to ensure ensure it is correctly fixed.

4-36

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 .11 1.2

Mai ain n-C -Co over Gas as-S -Str tru uts The following preparations must be made. 1. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 2. Supp Support ort the main cove coverr in the open posi position tion..

Removal Procedure

Figure 4.20 MainMain-cover cover gas-st gas-struts ruts

1. Unscrew Unscrew two two crosspo crosspoint int screws screws securi securing ng the the upper upper bracket bracket to to the underside of the main cover. 2. Lower the gas gas strut strut until until it rests rests on the base base struct structure. ure.

 

3. Use small small flatp flatpoint oint screw screwdriv driver er to remo remove ve the the retaini retaining ng circlip.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-37 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Remo Remove ve the the gas-stru gas-strutt pin and retain retain with the the upper upper brack bracket. et. 5. Remove Remove nut nut from the base base struc structure ture end end and and remov removee the gas gas strut from its lower mountin mounting g plate. 6. Repeat Repeat Steps Steps 1 to to 5 for for the other other gas strut strut (if (if required required to be removed).

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit replacem replacement ent gas strut to its its lower lower moun mounting ting plate plate.. 2. Fi Fitt and and ti tigh ghte ten n nut nut.. 3. Fit the the upp upper er brack bracket et and and the the gas-st gas-strut rut pin. pin. 4. Fi Fitt the the ret retai aini ning ng ci circ rcli lip. p. 5. Raise Raise the gas strut strut to align align the upper upper brac bracket ket with with the the underside of the main cover. 6. Fit two two crosspoi crosspoint nt screws screws to secu secure re the gas gas strut strut to the main main cover. 7. Repe Repeat at Steps Steps 1 to 5 for the the other other gas strut strut (if remov removed). ed). 8. Rem Remov ovee the the ma main in cov cover er sup suppo port. rt. 9. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.1 .11 1.3

Mai ain n-C -Co over Ass ssem emb bly The following preparations must be made. 1. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 2. Supp Support ort the main cove coverr in the open posi position tion..

4-38

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.21 4.21 Mai Main n cover cover remov removal al

Removal Procedure 1. Unscrew Unscrew two two crosspo crosspoint int screws screws securi securing ng the the upper upper bracket bracket to to the underside of the main cover. 2. Lower the gas gas strut strut until until it rests rests on the base base struct structure. ure. 3. Rep Repeat eat Step Stepss 1 and and 2 for for the othe otherr gas stru strut. t. 4. Rem Remov ovee the the ma main in cov cover er sup suppo port. rt. 5. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 6. Remove Remove the the two hex bolts bolts,, one from each each each end end of the the main cover. 7. Lift off off the the main main cover cover with with help help from from a second second perso person. n.

Replacement Procedure

 

1. Fit replacem replacement ent main main cover cover with help from a second second perso person. n.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-39

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Fit and tigh tighten ten the the two two hex bolt boltss to secur securee the main main cover cover.. 3. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 4. Supp Support ort the main cove coverr in its open posi position tion.. 5. Raise Raise the gas strut strut to align align the upper upper brac bracket ket with with the the underside of the main cover. 6. Fit two two crosspoi crosspoint nt screws screws to secu secure re the gas gas strut strut to the main main cover. 7. Rep Repeat eat Step Stepss 5 and 6 for the the other other gas gas strut strut.. 8. Rem Remov ovee the the ma main in cov cover er sup suppo port. rt. 9. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-40

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.12

Moving th the Main Carriage On power up, the software boot program automatically automatically resets the main carriage to stop at the datum position. During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the main carriage both before and after the mains supply has been isolated. There are three methods of moving the main carriage.

4.12 4. 12.1 .1

Wor orks ksta tati tion on Di Diag agno nost stic icss Me Meth thod od This method must be performed before the mains supply has been isolated. 1. From the the worksta workstation tion displ display ay,, see Figure Figure 4.22, 4.22, open open the the C-550 Lanovia Scanner Diagnostics folder.

2. Launch Launch the the C-550 C-550 Lanovi Lanoviaa Scanner Scanner Diag Diagnost nostics ics icon icon to obtain the workstation diagnostics display.

Figure 4.22 Work Workstatio station n diagnostic diagnostics s display display

3. Select Select the Scan Scanner ner comm command and from the Confi Configura guration tion menu (see Figure 4.23).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-41

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure 4.23 Carri Carriage age positi positions ons menu menu

4. Cho Choos osee one one of the the foll followi owing ng opt option ions: s: a) Park to re-position the carriage to the right-hand datum end. b) Camera Service to re-position the carriage at the left-hand end. c) Transit Fixing to re-position the carriage at a mid-poin mid-pointt location.

4.12 4. 12.2 .2

Ter ermi mina nall Diag Diagno nost stic icss Meth Method od This method must be performed before the mains supply has been isolated. 1. Connect Connect the the RS232 RS232 serial serial cable cable to the diagno diagnostics stics port port,, on the the side of the RFI box. 2. Conn Connect ect the the VT100 VT100/lap /laptop top to the the RS232 RS232 seria seriall cable. cable. 3. Powe Powerr up the term terminal inal to obtain obtain the Main Main menu menu.. 4. Select the mech ⇒ service menu. 5. Cho Choos osee one one of the the foll follow owing ing opt option ions: s: a) camera_service - to re-position the carriage at the left-hand end. b) park - to re-position the carriage at the right-hand datum end.

c) transit_fixing  - to re-position the carriage at a mid-point location.

4-42

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.24 4.24 Mec Mech h - service service menu menu

4.12.3

Mechanical Method

Figure 4.25 Movin Moving g the main carri carriage age

This method shall be performed only when the mains power to the scanner has been isolated. 1. Grasp the main main leads leadscrew crew and and rotate rotate it it toward toward the the front front to

 

move the carriage toward the left.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-43

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Grasp the rear right right-han -hand d corner corner of of the main carri carriage age and and carefully apply sufficient pressure to move the carriage to a desired position on the left of its default position.

4-44

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.13

Safety Interlocks 4.1 .13 3.1

Mai ain n Co Cov ver In Inte terl rlo ocks The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.  Note: It is only necessary to access access the interlock-cable interlock-cable connector on the RH distribution board.

51 mm 51 mm 51 mm

Figure Figur e 4.26 4.26 Main cover interl interlocks ocks

Removal Procedure 1. Disconnec Disconnectt the appr appropri opriate ate interlo interlock-sw ck-switch itch cable cable,, either either from:

 

• PL5 at the RH distribution board, or

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-45

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

• PL3 at the LH distribution board.

2. Cut tie tie-wr -wrap apss secur securing ing the cab cable le loom loom.. 3. Und Undo o nut nut retain retaining ing the the inter interloc lock k switch switch.. 4. Rem Remov ovee the int interl erlock ock swi switch tch..

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the the repla replacem cement ent int interl erlock ock swi switch tch.. 2. Adjust Adjust protrus protrusion ion heigh heightt (51 mm mm nominal nominal abov abovee the machi machine ne face of the base casting) of switch (see Figure 4.26). 3. Conn Connect ect the inte interlock rlock switc switch h cable, cable, eith either er to: to: • PL3 at the LH distribution board or • PL5 at the RH distribution board.

PL3 PL4

PL3 PL4 PL5

PL1

PL5

PL6

PL1 PL2

PL6

PL2 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

4. Fi Fitt new new ti tiee-wr wrap aps. s. 5. Replace, Replace, if remo removed, ved, cable cove cover-p r-plate late and and secure secure with with seven seven self-tap screws. 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).  Note: On power up, the interlock relay relay can be heard  heard  clicking, if the protrusion height has been correctly set, as the cover is raised.

4-46

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.13.2

Lid Interlocks  Note: Both of these interlocks are are connected by a common common cable loom which connects to PL6 at the RH distribution board.

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws securi securing ng the cable cable cover cover-plat -plate. e.

4.5 mm

Figure Fig ure 4.2 4.27 7 Lid inte interlo rlocks cks

Removal Procedure 1. Disconnec Disconnectt PL6 to release release the the lid inte interlock rlock-swit -switch ch cable, cable, from from the RH distribution board.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-47 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

PL3

PL4

PL5

PL1 PL2

PL6

RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

2. Cut the the tie-w tie-wrap rapss securi securing ng the the cable cable loo loom. m. 3. Und Undo o nut reta retaini ining ng each each inter interloc lock k switch switch.. 4. Remove both interlock switches.

Replacement Procedure 1. Connect Connect the the lid lid interlo interlock-sw ck-switch itch cabl cable, e, to PL6 at at the RH distribution board. 2. Lay cable cable loom loom in in the base well and secur securee with tie-w tie-wraps raps as required. 3. Fit the the repl replace acemen mentt inter interloc lock k switc switch. h. 4. Adjust Adjust the the protrus protrusion ion heigh heightt (4.5 mm nomin nominal al above above the the platen support module) of each switch (see Figure 4.27). 5. Fit the the cable cable cover cover-plat -platee and secu secure re with with seven seven self-ta self-tap p screws. 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.10 4.10). ).  Note: On power up, the interlock relay relay can be heard  heard  clicking, if the protrusion height has been correctly set, as the cover is raised.

4-48

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.14

Platen The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

Figu Fi gure re 4.2 4.28 8 Pl Plat aten en

Removal Procedure 1. Remov Removee four four crossp crosspoin ointt machi machine ne screw screws. s. 2. Lif Liftt the the plate platen n of its sup suppo port rt mou mounts nts..

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit replac replaceme ement nt plate platen n to the the suppo support rt moun mounts. ts.  Note: Make sure sure the platen is correctly correctly positioned.

2. Fit and tigh tighten ten four cros crosspoi spoint nt machi machine ne screws screws.. 3. Per Perfor form m an overv overview iew scan scan of of the entir entiree platen platen..

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-49

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. If black black lines lines app appear ear around around any of of the edge edgess perform perform the following calibration tests: • Carriage, • X-slide, • Enlargement, • Offsets.

4-50

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 .15 5

Refl fleecti tio on Lamps Assembly 4.15.1

Reflection Lamps  Note: An unbalanced pair pair of lamps, due to age or different  different  batches, may cause variations in the quality of light.  Always change both lamps lamps to minimize any light  variations.

The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

CAUTION   Do NOT attempt to adjust the  reflection column interfaces. To do  so will affect optical alignment.

REFLECTION TRAY BAFFLE

Figure 4.29 Reflec Reflection tion lamps assem assembly bly

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-51

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure 1. Loo Loosen sen the two out outer er thum thumbs bscre crews ws.. 2. Pull out out the the reflectio reflection-lam n-lamp p tray to gain gain access access to to the inne innerr lamp. 3. Loos Loosen en the the two inner inner thumbs thumbscrews crews to release release the the tray baff baffle. le. 4. Rem Remov ovee the the reflec reflectio tion-t n-tray ray baf baffle fle.. 5. Rota Rotate te the inne innerr reflectio reflection n lamp lamp and remo remove ve from from its hold holders. ers. 6. Rota Rotate te the oute outerr reflectio reflection n lamp lamp and remo remove ve from from its hold holders. ers.

LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS

Figure 4.30 Reflec Reflection tion lamp lamp replace replacement ment

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit and rota rotate te the repl replacem acement ent inner inner lamp lamp to secu secure re it in its holders.  Note: The aperture aperture of each lamp must face toward the upper  slot, in the tray baffle (see Figure 4.29), to allow the

illumination of the underside of the platen.

4-52

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Fit and rota rotate te the repl replacem acement ent outer outer lamp lamp to secure secure it in its its holders. 3. ReRe-fit fit the ref reflec lectio tion-t n-tray ray baf baffle fle..  Note: Make sure sure the cutout (see Figure Figure 4.29) is facing the  frontt of the scanner.  fron scanner.

4. Tigh ighten ten the the two two captiv captivee thumb thumbscr screws ews.. 5. Clo Close se the the refl reflect ection ion-la -lamp mp tra tray y. 6. Fin Finger ger-ti -tigh ghten ten the the two outer outer thum thumbsc bscrew rews. s. 7. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.1 .15 5.2

Ref efle leccti tio on La Lamp Hol Hold ders The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve both both refle reflection ction lamp lampss (see (see Section Section 4.15 4.15.1). .1).

Removal Procedure 1. Free the lamp hold holder er from from its supp support ort brack bracket. et. 2. Using Using a very very small small screwdr screwdriver iver push push it it up next next to to the wire wire on the inside to release each wire from the holder. They are held in by spring pressure.

Replacement Procedure 1. Push the the two two wires wires into into the repl replacem acement ent holde holder, r, makin making g sure they are being correctly gripped.  Note: Make sure sure the outer (red) (red) insulation is well pushed  into the lamp holder.

2. Fit the the replac replacemen ementt holder holder into its suppo support rt bracke bracket. t. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt both both reflec reflection tion lamp lampss (see (see Sectio Section n 4.15.1 4.15.1). ).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-53

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.15 4. 15.3 .3

Refl Re flec ecti tion on La Lamp mp Det Detec ecto torr Boar Boards ds  Note: Each reflection reflection lamp has its own detector board board..

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve both both refle reflection ction lamp lampss (see (see Section Section 4.15 4.15.1). .1).

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt the relev relevant ant detect detectoror-boar board d connec connector tor.. 2. Remove Remove counte countersun rsunk k screw screw to relea release se the the lamp-de lamp-detecto tectorr board. 3. Remo Remove ve screw screw to relea release se detect detector-b or-board oard baf baffle. fle.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit screw screw to secure secure baf baffle fle to repla replaceme cement nt lamp-d lamp-detect etector or board. board. 2. Fit counte countersun rsunk k screw screw to secure secure repla replaceme cement nt detector detector boar board. d. 3. Conn Connect ect the detec detector tor-boa -board rd conn connecto ectorr. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt reflect reflection ion lamp lampss (see (see Sect Section ion 4.15 4.15.1). .1).

4.15.4

Mirror The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-54

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

DOWELS

Figu Fi gure re 4.3 4.31 1 Mi Mirr rror or

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove the the two hexa hexagon gon wren wrench ch caphea caphead d screws, screws, secu securing ring the mirror support casting to the main carriage.  Note: Mirror Mirror bolts are accessible accessible through through the central slot of  the reflection-lamp assembly.

2. Lift the the mirror mirror suppor supportt casting casting off off the the two suppo support rt posts. posts.  Note: The support casting sits on a round round post at the rear  rear  and a diamond-shaped post at the front.

Replacement Procedure 1. Position Position the the replacem replacement ent mirror mirror by engagi engaging ng the the two dowe dowels ls in the main-carriage casting. 2. Re-fit Re-fit and secure secure the two two hexagon hexagon wren wrench ch caphead caphead screw screws, s, to secure the mirror support casting to the main carriage. 3. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

 

4. Perfo Perform rm the the lightbar lightbar align alignment ment proc procedur eduree (see Sectio Section n 6.4.2). 6.4.2).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-55

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

5. Perform Perform the the differen differential tial focu focuss alignm alignment ent proc procedur eduree (see (see Section 6.4.3). 6. Perfo Perform rm system system calib calibratio ration n procedu procedures res (see (see Section Section 6.5). 7. Perfo Perform rm electro electronic nic repro repro test test proce procedure duress (see Secti Section on 7.6). 7.6).

4-56

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.16

Light Table Assembly  Note: It is convenient to remove remove the light table to access access the hidden modules.

The following preparations must be made.

WARNING  Hazardous voltages exist behind the lamp driver module cover.  Make certain that the mains supply  plug has been disconnected from the  RFI box socket.

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

SK1

Figure Fig ure 4.32 4.32 Lig Light ht table table assem assembly bly

1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see

 

Section 4.12).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-57 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Sectio ion n 4.11). 4.11). 3. Remove Remo ve screw screw to relea release se rear rear cover-p cover-plate late from from lamplamp-driv driver er module.

Removal Procedure 1. Dis Discon connec nectt PL3 from from the the lamp-d lamp-driv river er board board.. 2. Rem Remov ovee 2 sem sem scre screws ws from from the rea rearr. 3. Rem Remov ovee 2 sem sem scre screws ws from from the fro front. nt. 4. Lif Liftt the ligh lightt table table from from the the main main carr carriag iage. e.

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the ligh lightt table table on the the main main carri carriage age.. 2. Loo Loosel sely y re-fit re-fit 2 sem scr screws ews at the the rear rear. 3. Loo Loosel sely y re-fi re-fitt 2 sem sem screw screwss at the the fron front. t. 4. Ti Tighte ghten n all sem screw screwss when the the light light table table is correctl correctly y fitted. fitted. 5. ReRe-con connec nectt PL3 to the the lamp lamp-di -disp splay lay boar board. d. 6. Re-fi Re-fitt the lamplamp-driv driver er module module cover cover and and secure secure with with screw screw. 7. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.16.1

LT -Lamps  Note: An unbalanced pair pair of lamps, due to age or different  different  batches, may cause variations in the quality of light.  Always change both lamps lamps to minimize any light  variations.

4-58

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Po siti tion on4.12). main mai n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

Figure Fig ure 4.33 4.33 LT lamps lamps remov removal al

Removal Procedure 1. Rota Rotate te the the rear rear lamp lamp and remo remove ve from from its hold holders. ers. 2. Rota Rotate te the the front front lamp lamp and and remov removee from from its its holders holders..

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit and rotat rotatee to secur securee the rear replac replacemen ementt lamp lamp in its holders.  Note: Make sure sure the aperture aperture of each lamp is facing toward  toward  the light table.

2. Fit and and rotate rotate to secur securee the front front repla replacemen cementt lamp lamp in its its

 

holders. 3. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-59

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 .16 6.2

LT-La Lam mp Hol old ders The following preparations must be made before removing this part from the scanner. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee both both lamps lamps (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16.1) .1).. 4. Remove Remove screw screw to relea release se rear rear cover cover plate plate from from lamp-dri lamp-driver ver module.

Removal Procedure 1. Dis Discon connec nectt PL3 from from the the lamp-d lamp-driv river er board board.. 2. Cut the tie-w tie-wrap rap close close to the the lamp lamp hold holder er.. 3. Free the lamp hold holder er from from its sup support port brac bracket. ket. 4. Using Using a very very small small screwd screwdriver river,, push it up next next to the wire wire on the inside to release each wire from the holder. They are held in by spring pressure.

Replacement Procedure 1. Push the the two two wires wires into into the repl replacem acement ent holde holder, r, makin making g sure they are being correctly gripped.  Note: Make sure sure the outer, outer, red, insulation is well pushed into the lamp holder.

2. Fit the the replac replacemen ementt holder holder into its suppo support rt bracke bracket. t. 3. ReRe-con connec nectt PL3 to to the lamp lamp dri driver ver boa board. rd. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt screw screw to secure secure rear rear cover cover plate plate to lamp lamp-dri -driver ver module module..

5. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-60

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.17

Lamp Driver Module The following preparations must be made.

WARNING  Hazardous voltages exist behind the lamp driver module cover.  Make certain that the mains supply  plug has been disconnected from the wall socket. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). PL1

PL2 PL3 PL4

SK1

Figure Fig ure 4.34 4.34 Lam Lamp p driver driver modul module e

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-61

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

CAUTION   Do NOT pull on flexicables to  remove their connectors. To do so will incur damage.

Removal Procedure 1. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to the the front front of the scann scanner er (see (see Section 4.20.1).  Note: This step is performed to gain an easier easier access to the lamp-driver flexicable clamp and its securing screws. 2. Remo Remove ve one one screw screw to releas releasee the lid of of the lamplamp-driv driver er module.

PL1

PL2

PL3

PL4

SK1

3. Remo Remove ve PL1 PL1 from from the the reflectio reflection-co n-column lumn conn connecto ectorr. 4. Remo Remove ve PL2 from the ligh lightbar tbar conn connecto ectorr.  Note: PL3 was disconnected during during the removal removal of the light-table assembly. 5. Remo Remove ve the the two capt captive ive screws screws and disc disconne onnect ct SK SK1. 1.

6. Pu Pull ll out out th thee wiri wiring ng lo loom omss carefully  carefully.. 7. Remove Remove two two clamp clamp screw screwss from from the the 37-way 37-way flex flexicabl icablee connector, to release the PL4 clamp plate. 8. Rem Remov ovee earth earth scr screw ew from from fle flexic xicabl able. e. 9. Di Dissco con nnec ectt PL4 PL4.. 10. Pass the the PL4 flexica flexicable ble carefully  carefully through  through the base slot of the lamp-driver module.

11. Remove two sem sem screws securing securing the lamp-driver lamp-driver module.

4-62

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

12. Remove lamp-driver lamp-driver module module from the main main carriage.

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion the repla replaceme cement nt lamp lamp-driv -driver er mod module. ule. 2. Re-fit Re-fit two sem screws screws to secure secure lamp-d lamp-driver river mod module ule to to the main carriage. 3. Thre Thread ad the the PL4 PL4 fle flexi xica cabl blee carefully  carefully through  through the base slot of  the lamp-driver module. 4. Re Re-c -co onnec ectt PL4 PL4.. 5. Re-f Re-fit it the the PL PL4 4 cla clamp mp.. 6. Re-fi Re-fitt two clamp clamp screws screws to the 37-w 37-way ay flexica flexicable ble connec connector tor.. 7. Po Posi siti tion on the the wir wirin ing g loom loomss carefully  carefully.. 8. Re Re-c -co onnec ectt SK SK1. 9. ReRe-fit fit two two capt captiv ivee screws screws to to secur securee SK1. SK1. 10. Re-connect PL2 PL2 to the lightbar connector connector.. 11. Re-connect PL1 to the the reflection-column reflection-column connector. connector. 12. Re-fit earth screw to secure flexicable. flexicable. 13. Re-fit screw to secure secure the lid of the lamp-driver lamp-driver module. module.  Note: PL3 will be re-connected re-connected during the re-fitment re-fitment of the light-table assembly.

14. Re-fit the light table table (see Section 4.16). 15. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-63

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 .18 8

Base and Str tru ucture Modules 4.1 .18 8.1

Fleexic Fl ica able - 50 50-W -Wa ay The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Remo Remove ve the the RFI-b RFI-box ox cove coverr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1) 4.9.1).. 5. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to the the front front of the scann scanner er (see (see Section 4.20.1.

CAUTION   Do NOT pull on flexicables to  remove their connectors. To do so will incur damage.

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove sem sem screw screw securin securing g the the 50-way 50-way flexi flexicable cable earth to the traverse distribution board. 2. Disconnec Disconnectt the 50-w 50-way ay flexic flexicable able plug from the trave traverse rse distribution board. 3. Lay fla flatt the the 50 50-wa -way y fle flexic xicabl able. e. 4. Remove Remove the the three three sem sem screws screws to to release release the 50-wa 50-way y and and 62-way well plate. 5. Mov Movee the the carri carriag agee assem assembly bly to the the Park position.

6. Remove Remove two two sem screw screwss to relea release se the the 50-way 50-way flexi flexicabl cablee from the well-plate in the base and structure assembly.

4-64

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure Figur e 4.35 4.35 Flexic Flexicables: ables: 50-wa 50-way y and 62-way 62-way

7. Remo Remove ve sem sem screw screw securing securing 50-w 50-way ay earth earth to the RFI RFI box. box. 8. Remove Remove two two clamp clamp screws screws from from 50-wa 50-way y flexicabl flexicablee plug, plug, at the system board. 9. Disconnec Disconnectt the the 50-way 50-way flex flexicabl icablee plug plug from from the the system system board. 10. Wi Withdraw thdraw the 50-way 50-way flexicable flexicable carefully  carefully..

Replacement Procedure 1. Feed and posi position tion the repla replaceme cement nt 50-wa 50-way y flexicab flexicable. le. 2. Re-co Re-connec nnectt the 50-w 50-way ay flexica flexicable ble plug plug to to the syst system em board. board. 3. Re-fit Re-fit two clam clamp p screws screws to secu secure re 50-way 50-way flex flexicabl icablee plug, plug, at the system board. 4. Loos Loosely ely re-fit re-fit sem screw screw to secure secure 50-wa 50-way y earth earth to the the RFI RFI

 

box.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-65

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

5. Loosely Loosely re-fit re-fit two two sem screw screwss to secure secure the the 50-way 50-way flexic flexicable able to well-plate in the base and structure assembly. 6. Loosely Loosely re-fit re-fit the three three sem screws screws to secure secure the 50-way 50-way and 62-way well plate. 7. Re-connec Re-connectt the 50-w 50-way ay flexic flexicable able plug to the the traverse traverse distribution board. 8. Mov Movee carr carriag iagee asse assemb mbly ly to the Camera Service position. 9. Loosely Loosely re-fit re-fit sem sem screw screw to secu secure re the 50-w 50-way ay flexica flexicable ble earth earth to the traverse distributio distribution n board. 10. Check the alignment alignment of all flexicables flexicables to avoid any distortion distortion or any potential wear points. 11. Tigh Tighten ten all loose sem sem screws. screws. 12. Re-fit the light table table (see Section 4.16). 13. Re-fit the RFI RFI box cover cover (see Section Section 4.9.1). 4.9.1). 14. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ).

4.1 .18 8.2

Fleexic Fl ica able - 62 62-W -Wa ay The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 4. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 5. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to the the front front of the scann scanner er (see (see Section 4.20.1).

4-66

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

CAUTION   Do NOT pull on flexicables to  remove their connectors. To do so will incur damage.

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove the the sem screw secu securing ring 50-w 50-way ay flexicab flexicable le earth earth to to the main-carriage distribution board. 2. Disconnec Disco 50-way plug plug from from the the main-car main-carriag riagee distribu distribution tion board.nnectt 50-way 3. Lay fla flatt the the 50 50-wa -way y fle flexic xicabl able. e. 4. Disco Disconnec nnectt 62-way 62-way plug plug from the the traverse traverse distrib distributio ution n board. board. 5. Mov Movee the the carri carriag agee assem assembly bly to the the Park position. 6. Remove Remove three three sem sem screws screws to to release release the 62-wa 62-way y flexicab flexicable le from the well-plate in the base and structure assembly. 7. Remove Remove two two clamp clamp screws screws from 62-w 62-way ay connec connector tor,, at the the top of the RFI box. 8. Disconnec Disconnectt 62-way 62-way plug from the system system-boa -board rd socket. socket. 9. With ithdra draw w the the 62-wa 62-way y flex flexica icabl ble. e.

CAUTION   Do NOT tighten sem screws until all   flexicables have been re-installed   and correctly aligned in their  supports.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-67 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

To do so can cause later damage while the flexicables are moving in  response to the carriages.

Replacement Procedure 1. Feed and posi position tion the repla replaceme cement nt 62-wa 62-way y flexicab flexicable. le. 2. Re-connec Re-connectt 62-way 62-way plug plug to to system-b system-board oard sock socket, et, at the the top top of  the RFI box. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt two clam clamp p screws screws to to secure secure the the 62-way 62-way plug plug.. 4. Loosely Loosely re-fit thre threee sem screw screwss to secu secure re the the 62-way 62-way flexicable to well-plate in the base and structure assembly. 5. Re-co Re-connec nnectt 62-way 62-way plug plug to to the trave traverse rse distri distributi bution on board board.. 6. ReRe-con connec nectt the the 50-wa 50-way y flexi flexicab cable. le. 7. Loosely Loosely re-fit re-fit sem sem screw screw to secure secure the the 50-way 50-way flexi flexicable cable earth to the main-carriage distribution board. 8. Check Check the align alignment ment of all flexi flexicable cabless to avoid avoid any any distor distortion tion or any potential wear points. 9. Tigh ighten ten all loo loose se sem scr screws ews.. 10. Re-fit the light table table (see Section 4.16). 11. Re-fit the RFI RFI box cover cover (see Section Section 4.9.1). 4.9.1). 12. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ).

4.18 4. 18.3 .3

Flex Fl exic icab able le Di Dist stri ribu buti tion on Boa Board rdss Asse Assemb mbly ly The following preparations must be made.

1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).

4-68

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Sectio ion n 4.11). 4.11). 3. Remov Removee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 5. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to the the front front of the scann scanner er (see (see Section 4.20.1).

Figure 4.36 4.36 Flexi Flexicable cable distribu distribution tion boards boards assembly assembly

CAUTION   Do NOT pull on flexicables to  remove their connectors. To do so will incur damage.

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove two two clamp clamp screws screws securi securing ng the the PL4 flexi flexicabl cablee to the the lamp-driver board.

 

 Note: The lamp-driver cover cover plate was removed removed during the the light table removal procedure.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-69

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Di Disc scon onne nect ct PL4 PL4 flex flexic icab able le.. 3. Remove Remove eearth arth sem screw secu securing ring 50-w 50-way ay flexica flexicable. ble. 4. Rem Remov ovee 50-w 50-way ay fle flexic xicabl ablee plug plug.. 5. La Lay y back back 5050-wa way y flex flexic icab able le.. 6. Rem Remov ovee 62-w 62-way ay fle flexic xicabl ablee plug plug.. 7. La Lay y back back 6262-wa way y flex flexic icab able le.. 8. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL7 to release release the focusfocus-datu datum m sensor sensor.. 9. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL6 to release release the the X-slide X-slide datum datum sens sensor or.. 10. Disconnect PL5 PL5 to release the lightbar interlock. 11. Disconnect PL4 to release the X-slide X-slide stepper motor motor.. 12. Remove three three remaining sem screws to release the traverse traverse distribution board.

FOCUS DATUM PL7 SENSOR X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR X-SLIDE STEPPER MOTOR

X SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DIGITIZER BOARD

PL6

62-WAY

PL4

TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

PL5 LIGHTBAR INTERLOCK

LAMP DRIVER BOARD

50-WAY

 Ä

 Ä

13. Disco Disconnec nnectt SK2 flexicable. flexicable.

SYSTEM BOARD

14. Remove four four 3 mm Allen screws screws to release the X-slide X-slide distribution board and flexicable support tray.

4-70

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

15. Wi Withdraw thdraw the flexicable distribution-boards distribution-boards assembly. assembly.

PL1

SK2

SUPPORT TRAY

CAUTION   Do NOT NO T tighten sem screws, except  for securing trays, until all   flexicables have been re-installed   and correctly aligned in their  supports. To do so can cause later damage while the flexicables are moving in  response to the carriages.

Replacement Procedure 1. Feed and posi position tion the repl replacem acement ent flexi flexicable cable distribution-boards assembly. 2. Re-fit Re-fit and tigh tighten ten four 3 mm Allen screw screwss to secu secure re the the X-slide distribution board and flexicable support tray.

 

3. ReRe-con connec nectt the digit digitize izerr flexica flexicable ble at at SK2. SK2.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-71

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Loosely Loosely re-fit re-fit three sem screw screwss to secu secure re the the traverse traverse distribution board to the support tray. 5. ReRe-con connec nectt X-slid X-slidee datum datum sens sensor or at PL4. PL4. 6. ReRe-con connec nectt lightb lightbar ar inter interloc lock k at PL5. PL5. 7. ReRe-con connec nectt X-slid X-slidee stepp stepper er motor motor at at PL6. PL6. 8. ReRe-con connec nectt focus focus-da -datum tum sen sensor sor at at PL7. PL7. 9. Re-connec Re-connectt the 62-w 62-way ay flexic flexicable able plug on the the traverse traverse distribution board. 10. Re-connect the the 50-way flexicable plug plug on main-carriage main-carriage distribution board. 11. Loosely re-fit sem sem screw to the 50-way flexicable flexicable earth. 12. Re-connect PL4 PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver lamp-driver board. board. 13. Re-connect the lamp-driver lamp-driver flexicable flexicable earth and clamp clamp screws securing the PL4 flexicable to the lamp-driver board. 14. Check the alignment alignment of all flexicables flexicables to avoid any distortion distortion or any potential wear points. 15. Tigh Tighten ten all loose sem sem screws. screws. 16. Re-fit the light table table (see Section 4.16). 17. Re-fit the RFI RFI box cover cover (see Section Section 4.9.1). 4.9.1). 18. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ).

4.18 4. 18.4 .4

Main Ma in Ca Carr rria iage ge Da Datu tum m Se Sens nsor or The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

3. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.

4-72

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

PL3

PL4 PL5

PL1 PL2

PL6

RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure 4.37 4.37 Main carriage carriage datum datum and reverse reverse limit limit sensors sensors

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL3 PL3 from from the RH distri distributi bution on board board..  Note: The datum sensor is on the left of the end-stop sensor sensor, when looking in the well from the front.

2. Use a cros crosspoi spoint nt screwd screwdriver river to remov removee self-tap self-tapping ping screw from the left sensor. 3. Remo Remove ve senso sensorr cable cable from from the the cable cable tidies tidies in the the well. well. 4. With ithdra draw w the the sens sensor or and and its its cable cable..

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the repla replacem cemen entt sensor sensor and and its cable cable.. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt self-tap self-tapping ping screw to secure secure the left left senso sensorr. 3. ReRe-fit fit sen sensor sor cab cable le in in the the cable cable tidi tidies. es.

 

4. Con Connec nectt PL3 to to the the RH distr distribu ibutio tion n board board.. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt cable cable cover-p cover-plate late and and secure secure with seve seven n self-tap self-tap screws. screws.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-73

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.18 4. 18.5 .5

Main Ma in Ca Carr rria iage ge Re Reve vers rsee Li Limi mitt Sen Senso sorr The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.

Removal Procedure 1. Disconnec Disconnectt PL4 PL4 from from the the RH dist distribu ribution tion boar board d (see (see Figure 4.37).  Note: This limit sensor is on the right of the datum sensor, sensor, when looking in the well from the front.

2. Use crossp crosspoin ointt screwdriv screwdriver er to remov removee the self-t self-tappi apping ng screw screw from the right sensor. 3. Remo Remove ve sensor sensor cabl cablee from the cable cable tidie tidiess in the the well of the base assembly. 4. With ithdra draw w the the sens sensor or and and it itss cable cable..

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the repla replacem cemen entt sensor sensor and and its cable cable.. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt self-tap self-tapping ping screw to secure secure the right right senso sensorr. 3. Fit the the new sens sensor or cable cable into into the cable cable tidie tidiess in the the well of the the

base assembly.

4-74

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

PL3

PL4 PL5

PL1 PL2

PL6

RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

4. Con Connec nectt PL4 to the the RH dist distrib ributi ution on board board.. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt cable cable cover-p cover-plate late and and secure secure with seve seven n self-tap self-tap screws. screws. 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.18 4. 18.6 .6

Main Ma in Ca Carr rria iage ge Fo Forw rwar ard d Li Limi mitt Se Sens nsor or The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

PL3

PL1

PL4

PL5

PL6

PL2 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure Figur e 4.38 Main carria carriage ge left-end left-end limit limit sensor sensor

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-75

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL4 PL4 from from the LH distri distributi bution on boar board. d. 2. Use a cros crosspoi spoint nt screwd screwdriver river to remov removee self-tap self-tapping ping screw from the sensor. 3. Cut tie tie-wr -wraps aps to free free the the sens sensor or cab cable. le. 4. With ithdra draw w the the sens sensor or and and its its cable cable..

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the repla replacem cemen entt sensor sensor and and its cable cable.. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt self-tap self-tapping ping screw to secur securee the sens sensor or.. 3. Fit tietie-wra wraps ps to to secure secure the the sens sensor or cable cable.. 4. Con Connec nectt PL4 to the the LH dist distrib ributi ution on boar board. d. 5. Cl Clos osee the the ma main in co cove verr.

4.18.7

Standby Switch The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.

Removal Procedure

1. Pull off off the the two two fast fast on conn connecto ectors rs from from the the switch. switch. 2. Squeeze Squeeze the the two barb barb,, one at each each end, end, and pus push h the bod body y of  the switch downward through its mounting plate.

4-76

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.39 4.39 Sta Standb ndby y power power switch switch

Replacement Procedure 1. Fi Fitt the the repl replac acem emen entt swit switch ch.. 2. Fit the two fas fast-o t-on n con connec nector tors. s. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt cable cable cover-p cover-plate late and and secure secure with seve seven n self-tap self-tap screws. screws. 4. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.1 .18 8.8

Sta tan ndby Swi wittch Cab able le The following preparations must be made.

 

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-77 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Sectio ion n 4.11). 4.11). 3. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 4. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.

Removal Procedure 5. Dis Discon connec nectt the the stand standby by swit switch ch plug plug..  Note: The standby switch cable is situated in front front of the 15-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box.

6. Pull off off the two two fast-on fast-on conn connector ectorss from from the stan standby dby switch switch terminals. 7. Rem Remov ovee cable cable from from the cabl cablee tidies tidies in in the well well.. 8. With ithdra draw w stand standby by swi switch tch cab cable. le.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the repla replaceme cement nt standb standby y switch switch cable cable in the cable cable tidie tidies. s. 2. Connect Connect the the two fast-o fast-on n connect connectors ors to the standb standby y switch switch terminals. 3. Connect Connect the the standby standby switc switch h plug plug to the the system-b system-board oard socke sockett on top of the RFI box. 4. Fi Fitt ti tiee-wr wrap apss to su suit it.. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt cable cable cover-p cover-plate late and and secure secure with seve seven n self-tap self-tap screws. screws. 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 7. ReRe-fit fit the the RFI RFI box box cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.9. 4.9.1). 1).

4-78

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.18.9

Display Board The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

Removal Procedure 1. Dis Discon connec nectt PL1 PL1 from from the the disp display lay boar board. d. 2. Squeeze, Squeeze, in turn turn,, each pair pair of barbs barbs and and ease ease the board board off off its four Nylon standoffs.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the the repl replace acemen mentt disp display lay bo board ard.. 2. ReRe-con connec nectt PL1 PL1 to the the disp display lay boa board. rd. 3. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.18.1 4.1 8.10 0 Dis Displa play y Boar Board d Ribb Ribbon on Cabl Cablee The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

Removal Procedure

 

1. Dis Discon connec nectt PL1 PL1 at the di displ splay ay boar board. d. 2. Uncl Unclip ip the the 10-way 10-way ribb ribbon on cable cable from the cable cable clips clips..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-79

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL2 PL2 from from the LH distri distributi bution on boar board. d. 4. With ithdra draw w 10-w 10-way ay rib ribbo bon n cabl cable. e. PL3

PL1

PL4

PL5

PL6

PL2 LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure Fig ure 4.4 4.40 0 Dis Displa play y board board

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the replac replaceme ement nt 10-wa 10-way y ribbon ribbon cabl cable. e. 2. Conn Connect ect cable cable plug plug to to PL2 on the the LH distri distributi bution on board board.. 3. Connec Connectt PL1 PL1 to the dis displa play y boar board. d. 4. Fit 10-w 10-way ay ribb ribbon on cabl cablee in the the cable cable clips clips.. 5. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.18 4. 18.1 .11 1 LH Dist Distri ribu buti tion on Boar Board d The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12).

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-80

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

PL3

PL1

PL4

PL5

PL6

PL2

Figure Fig ure 4.41 4.41 LH distri distributi bution on board board

Removal Procedure 1. Dis Discon connec nectt PL1, PL1, PL2 PL2,, PL3, PL3, PL4, PL4, and and PL6. PL6.  Note: PL5 is a spare connector connector..

2. Squeeze, Squeeze, in turn turn,, each pair pair of barbs barbs and and ease ease the board board off off its four Nylon standoffs.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the repla replaceme cement nt board board to its its four four Nylon Nylon stand standoff offs. s. 2. ReRe-con connec nectt PL1, PL1, PL2, PL2, PL3, PL3, PL4, PL4, and and PL6. PL6. 3. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.18 4. 18.1 .12 2 LH Ri Ribb bbon on Ca Cabl blee The following preparations must be made.

 

1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-81

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Rem Remov ovee the RFI RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1) 4.9.1)..

Removal Procedure 1. Uncl Unclip ip and disc disconn onnect ect PL6 PL6 from the LH dist distribu ribution tion boar board. d. 2. Un Uncl clip ip th thee rib ribbo bon n cab cable le.. 3. Mo Move ve ca carr rria iage ge to th thee Camera Service position. 4. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screw screwss to release release the the cable cable cover-p cover-plate. late. 5. Remo Remove ve two two clamp clamp screws screws secur securing ing the the 25-way 25-way cable cable plug. plug.  Note: The LH ribbon ribbon cable, cable is to the 15-way onsituated top of the RFIright box. of the

6. Disconnec Disconnectt the 25-w 25-way ay ribbon ribbon cable cable plug plug from from the the system system board. 7. Withd ithdraw raw 25-wa 25-way y ribbo ribbon n cable cable from the well well..

Replacement Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the repl replace aceme ment nt LH ribb ribbon on cable cable.. 2. Connect Conn ect the the 25-way 25-way ribbon ribbon cable cable plug plug to to the syst system-b em-board oard socket. 3. Mo Move ve ca carr rria iage ge to th thee Park position. 4. Con Connec nectt PL6 to the the LH dist distrib ributi ution on boar board. d. 5. Re Re-c -cli lip p the the ri ribb bbon on ca cabl ble. e. 6. Mo Move ve ca carr rria iage ge to th thee Camera Service position. 7. Re-fi Re-fitt cable cable cover-p cover-plate late and and secure secure with seve seven n self-tap self-tap screws. screws. 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

9. ReRe-fit fit the the RFI RFI box box cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.9. 4.9.1). 1).

4-82

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.18 4. 18.1 .13 3 RH Dis Distr trib ibut utio ion n Board Board The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.

Removal Procedure 1. Un Uncl clip ip and and dis disco conn nnec ectt PL1. PL1.  Note: PL2 is a spare connector connector..

2. Dis Discon connec nectt PL3, PL3, PL4, PL4, PL5 PL5,, and and PL6. PL6. 3. Squeeze, Squeeze, in turn turn,, each pair pair of barbs barbs and and ease ease the board board off off its four Nylon standoffs. PL3

PL4 PL5

PL1 PL2

PL6

Figure Figur e 4.42 4.42 RH distrib distribution ution board

Replacement Procedure

 

1. Fit the repla replaceme cement nt board board to its its four four Nylon Nylon stand standoff offs. s. 2. Re Re-c -con onne nect ct an and d cli clip p PL1 PL1..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-83

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. ReRe-con connec nectt PL3, PL3, PL4 PL4,, PL5, PL5, and and PL6. PL6. 4. Re-fit Re-fit seven seven self-tap self-tap screw screwss to secur securee the cable cable cover cover-plat -plate. e. 5. Clo Close se th thee main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.18 4. 18.1 .14 4 RH Ri Ribb bbon on Ca Cabl blee The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 4. Remo Remove ve seven seven self-tap self-tap screws screws to to release release the cable cable cover cover-pla -plate. te.

Removal Procedure 1. Uncl Unclip ip and disc disconn onnect ect PL1 from the the RH distri distributi bution on board. board. 2. Un Uncl clip ip 1515-wa way y ribb ribbon on cab cable le.. 3. Remo Remove ve two two clamp clamp screws screws securi securing ng the the 15-way 15-way cable cable plug. plug.  Note: The RH ribbon cable is situated to the left of the 25-way ribbon cable, on top of the RFI box.

4. Disconnec Disconnectt the 15-w 15-way ay ribbon ribbon cabl cablee plug plug from the top top of of the system board. 5. Withd ithdraw raw 15-wa 15-way y ribbo ribbon n cable cable from the well well..

Replacement Procedure

1. Pos Positi ition on the repl replace acemen mentt RH ribb ribbon on cable cable.. 2. Connect Connect the the 15-way 15-way ribbon ribbon cable cable plug plug to to the syst system-b em-board oard socket. 4-84

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Con Connec nectt PL1 to the the RH dist distrib ributi ution on board board.. 4. Re-c Re-cli lip p the the ri ribb bbon on ca cabl ble. e. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt seven seven self-tap self-tap screw screwss to secur securee the cable cable cover cover-plat -plate. e. 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 7. ReRe-fit fit the the RFI RFI box box cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.9. 4.9.1). 1).

4.18 4. 18.1 .15 5 En Encl clos osur uree Fan The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). PL3

PL1

PL4

PL5 PL2

Â

Â

Â

Â

Â

 

Â

Â

Â

Â

Â

 

Â

Â

Â

Â

Â

 

Â

Â

Â

Â

Â

 

Â

Â

Â

Â

Â

 

LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Figure Fig ure 4.4 4.43 3 Enc Enclos losure ure fan

Removal Procedure 1. Remo Remove ve the the enclo enclosure sure fan filte filterr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.8). 4.8). 2. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL1 PL1 from from the the LH LH distri distributi bution on boar board. d.

PL6

 

3. Remove Remo ve three thplate. ree nuts, nuts, with with a 3 mm span spanner ner,, securin securing g the mounting

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-85

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Remove Remove the the mountin mounting g plate plate with with the the fan from the A/V A/V mounts. 5. Remove Remove four four screws screws,, with with a 5 mm hexag hexagon on wrenc wrench, h, to remove the fan from its mounting plate.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit the repla replaceme cement nt fan fan to the the mounti mounting ng plate plate and and secure secure with four screws. 2. Fit the the mountin mounting g plate plate with with the the fan to to the A/V mount mounts. s. 3. Fit and and tighten tighten the three three 5 mm nuts nuts to to secure secure the the mount mounting ing plate. 4. Conn Connect ect PL1 PL1 to its its socket socket on on the LH distribu distribution tion boar board. d. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt the the enclos enclosure ure fan filte filterr (see (see Section Section 4.8) 4.8).. 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-86

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.19

Main Le Leadscrew Assembly 4.1 .19 9.1

Lea ead dsc scrrew Nu Nut Cla Clam mp Pla Plate te  Note: This item is not a replaceable replaceable unit, however, however, it is necessary to remove it to free the main carriage from its leadscrew.

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Remov Removee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Re-p Re-positi osition on the the main main carriag carriagee to a suita suitable ble mid-p mid-point oint by mechanically turning the leadscrew (see Section 4.12.3).

Figure 4.44 Leads Leadscrew crew nut clamp clamp plate plate

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-87 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure 1. Use a 10 mm span spanner ner to relea release se lock lock nut. nut. 2. Und Undo o M6 grub grub screw screw to to releas releasee the clam clamp p plate. plate. 3. Lif Liftt out out the lead leadscr screwew-nu nutt clamp clamp plat plate. e.

Replacement Procedure 1. ReRe-fit fit the the lead leadscr screwew-nu nutt clamp clamp plat plate. e.  Note: Make sure sure the slot of the clamp plate is seated behind  the bolt, that the fork is entrapping the leadscrew nut, and the nut flange is located in the step of the bracket.

2. Fin Finger ger-ti -tigh ghten ten the M6 grub grub scr screw ew.. 3. Push main carri carriage age toward toward the servo servo mot motor or,, as near near as possible to the bearing block, without touching the the end stop.

END STOP BEARING BLOCK

4. Relea Release se and and lock lock the M6 M6 grub grub screw screw a second second time time.. 5. Fit 3 mm mm key and furthe furtherr tighten tighten the the M6 grub grub screw screw by by one one full turn. 6. Use a 10 10 mm spa spanne nnerr to tigh tighten ten the the lock lock nut. nut. 7. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-88

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.1 .19 9.2

Mai ain n Car Carrria iag ge Lea Leads dscr creew The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve leads leadscrew crew clam clamp-pl p-plate ate (see (see Sect Section ion 4.19 4.19.1). .1).

Removal Procedure

REGISTER FACE

COUPLING SCREWS (2 OFF)

M4 PANHEAD SCREWS Figure 4.45 Main carri carriage age leadsc leadscrew rew

1. Slacken Slacken the the two screw screwss on the the end end of the the coupli coupling ng neares nearestt to the leadscrew drive. 2. Remove Remove three three M4 panh panhead ead screws screws and three flat washe washers rs from the bearing block. 3. Remove Remove two two M6 caph caphead ead screws screws to release release the rightright-hand hand end-bearing bracket. 4. Grasp Grasp both both end endss of the lea leadsc dscrew rew and carefully  ease it out of  its coupling and bearing bracket. 5. Gent Gently ly lay lay the relea released sed end end of of the leads leadscrew crew in in the well well..

 

6. Lif Liftt up the en end-b d-bear earing ing bra brack cket et and and carefully  remove it from the leadscrew drive. 7. Gent Gently ly lay lay the righ right-han t-hand d end of the the leadscrew leadscrew in the the well. well.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-89

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

8. Push main main carria carriage ge toward toward the servo servo moto motor, r, as near near as possible to the bearing block, without touching the end stop. 9. Grasp the right right-han -hand d end end of the leads leadscrew crew,, lift and and carefully withdraw it toward the right-hand end.

CAUTION   Be careful to avoid any contact with  the base and structure or any other  components.

Replacement Procedure 1. Grasp the rightright-hand hand end of of the replac replacemen ementt leadscrew leadscrew,, present and carefully  insert it toward the left-hand end. 2. Gen Gently tly lay the lea leadsc dscrew rew in the the well well.. 3. Fit the leads leadscrew crew driv drivee to the end-b end-bearin earing g bracket bracket..  Note: Do not fix the end-bearing bracket bracket at this time.

4. Pu Push sh main main carri carriage age to to a suitab suitable le mid-p mid-poin oint. t. 5. Grasp Grasp both both end endss of the lea leadsc dscrew rew an and d carefully  present it to the bearing bracket and to the leadscrew coupling.

CAUTION   Be careful to avoid any compression  of the leadscrew coupling. 6. Position Position the bear bearing ing block block in the the well of the the base and push push it it hard up against the register face (see Figure 4.45), and tighten

the two M6 caphead securing screws. 7. Fit and and secure secure three three panhea panhead d screws screws and and three three flat washe washers rs to the bearing block.

4-90

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

8. Tighte Tighten n two caphea caphead d screws screws on the the couplin coupling g nearest nearest to the leadscrew drive.  Note: Make sure sure that the coupling is NOT compressed. compressed.

9. Re-fi Re-fitt the lead leadscrew screw clam clamp-pl p-plate ate (see (see Sectio Section n 4.19.1 4.19.1). ). 10. Re-fit the light table table (see Section 4.16). 11. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ). 12. Ope Open n the the lid. lid. 13. Perform the system system calibration calibration tests (see Section Section 6.5). 14. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section Section 7.6).

4.1 .19 9.3

Mai ain n Lea ead dsc scrrew Mo Moto torr The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve the the RFI box cov cover er (see (see Sectio Section n 4.9.1 4.9.1). ). 2. Mo Move ve th thee mai main n car carri riag agee to Park position (see Section 4.12).

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt leadscr leadscrew ew motor motor cable from top of RFI RFI box. box. 2. Cu Cutt the the th thre reee tie tie-w -wra raps ps.. 3. Withd ithdraw raw the the motor motor cable cable loom from the base base well. well. 4. Slacken Slacken two two caphead caphead screw screwss on the the coupli coupling ng neares nearestt to the the leadscrew motor. 5. Position Position a 3 mm hexhex-head headed ed driver driver throu through gh one one of the the two special access holes in the coupling-bearing bracket opposite the motor end and remove the first screw securing the motor.

 

6. Repeat Repeat Step Step 4 and and remove remove the secon second d screw screw securin securing g the motor.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-91

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure 4.46 Main leadscr leadscrew ew motor and coupling coupling

7. Grasp Grasp the the bod body y of the the lead leadscr screw ew mot motor or and and carefully  ease it out of its coupling and bearing bracket.

Replacement Procedure 1. Grasp Grasp the the bod body y of the the lead leadscr screw ew mot motor or and and carefully  present it to the bearing bracket and coupling.

CAUTION   Be careful to avoid any compression  of the leadscrew coupling. 2. Position Position a 3 mm hex-h hex-headed eaded driv driver er throug through h one one of the the two special access holes in the coupling-bearing bracket opposite the motor end and re-fit the first screw securing the motor.

3. Repe Repeat at Step 2 and re-fit the the second second screw screw securi securing ng the the motor motor.  Note: Make sure sure the coupling is not compressed.

4-92

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Lay out the moto motorr cable cable loom loom in the the base base well. 5. Conn Connect ect the the leadsc leadscrew-m rew-motor otor cable to top top of RFI box. box. 6. Fit thre threee tie-wr tie-wraps aps to to secure secure the the cable cable loo loom. m. 7. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 9. Open the li lid. 10. Perform the system system calibration calibration tests (see Section Section 6.5). 11. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section Section 7.6).

4.1 .19 9.4

Mai ain n Lea Lead dsc scrrew Cou oup pli lin ng The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve the the main main leadsc leadscrew rew motor motor (see Secti Section on 4.19. 4.19.3). 3). 2. Remo Remove ve the the Main lead leadscrew screw (see Secti Section on 4.19 4.19.2). .2).

Removal Procedure 3. Rem Remov ovee the the lea leadsc dscrew rew cou coupli pling ng..

Replacement Procedure 1. Lay replac replacemen ementt leadscrew leadscrew coupl coupling ing in the coupli coupling-b ng-bearin earing g bracket.  Note: Make sure sure the 6 mm coupling faces the leadscr leadscrew ew and  the 8 mm coupling faces the motor.

 

2. Re-fi Re-fitt the the main main leads leadscrew crew (see Secti Section on 4.19 4.19.2). .2).  Note: Make sure sure the coupling is pushed as far as possible possible onto the leadscrew.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Re-fi Re-fitt main main lead leadscrew screw moto motorr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.19. 4.19.3). 3). 4. Re-fi Re-fitt leadsc leadscrew rew clamp clamp-plat -platee (see (see Section Section 4.19 4.19.1). .1). 5. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 7. Open the li lid. 8. Perfo Perform rm the the system system calibr calibratio ation n tests tests (see (see Section Section 6.5) 6.5).. 9. Perfo Perform rm the the electro electronic nic repro repro test (see Secti Section on 7.6). 7.6).

4.19.5

C-Bearing As Assembly The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Park (see Section 4.12). 2. Po Powe werr down down th thee scan scanne nerr. 3. Remo Remove ve the the main cove coverr assembly assembly (see Sectio Section n 4.11.3). 4.11.3). 4. Remove Remove the the three three M5 caph caphead ead screws screws to release release the rear rear cover plate. 5. Remo Remove ve leads leadscrew crew clam clamp-pl p-plate ate (see (see Secti Section on 4.19. 4.19.1). 1).

4-93

Figure Fig ure 4.47 4.47 C-b C-bear earing ing assem assembly bly

4-94

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Removal Procedure CAUTION   Do not use metallic materials to  support the main carriage. 1. Rem Remov ovee one one C-bea C-bearin ring g clam clamp p screw screw.. 2. Use a suitab suitable le hardwo hardwood od block block to suppo support rt the main carri carriage. age.  Note: While both C-bearings C-bearings should be replaced replaced as a balanced pair, remove only one bearing at a time.  Leave the other bearing to help support support the main carriage with the hardwood block, until the new bearing has been fitted.

3. Slide the bearin bearing g out of the the bearing bearing block block,, move move to end end of  guide and remove.

Replacement Procedure CAUTION  Use a new pair of bearings to avoid   differences in tolerance and wear. wear. Special care must be taken to ensure each bearing is correctly set up while  securing it. 1. Slide a repla replaceme cement nt bearin bearing g over over one one end of guide guide into into the the

 

bearing block, ensuring that the positioning recess is toward the clamp-screw hole.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-95

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Correctly Correctly loca locate te the the C-bearin C-bearing g in the bearin bearing g block block by inserting a 2.5 mm Allen key into the retaining-screw hole to locate the positioning recess on the C-bearing. 3. Fit the the screw screw to clam clamp p C-bearin C-bearing. g. Do not over over-tig -tighten hten.. 4. Follow Follow the remo removal val proced procedure ure to remo remove ve the the other other C-bearin C-bearing, g, and follow the replacement procedure to fit new bearing.

POSITIONING RECESS

ALLEN KEY Figure Fig ure 4.48 4.48 C-b C-bear earing ing align alignmen mentt

5. Re-fi Re-fitt leadsc leadscrew rew clamp clamp-plat -platee (see (see Section Section 4.19 4.19.1). .1). 6. Re-fit Re-fit the three three M5 caphead caphead screw screwss to secur securee the rear rear cover cover plate. 7. Re-fi Re-fitt the main main-cov -cover er assemb assembly ly (see (see Section Section 4.1 4.11.3). 1.3). 8. Open the li lid. 9. Perfo Perform rm the the system system calibr calibratio ation n tests tests (see (see Section Section 6.5) 6.5).. 10. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section Section 7.6).

4.19 4. 19.6 .6

Fitt Fr Fi Fron ontt Tra rans nsit it Fi Fixi xing ng

1. Retri Retrieve eve the the front trans transit it fixing, fixing, the the M8 buttonh buttonhead ead screw screw,, and the two M6 caphead screw from the well of the base assembly.

4-96

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Position Position the trans transit it fixing fixing (see (see Figure Figure 4.49) 4.49) and and loosel loosely y fit the the two M6 caphead screws.

CAUTION   Do not tighten these screws. 3. Re-positi Re-position on the main carria carriage, ge, as requ required, ired, by mechan mechanicall ically y turning the leadscrew (see Section 4.12.3) to align the threaded hole with the transit fixing. 4. Pla Place ce shim shimss under under the the front front wheel wheel bear bearing ings. s. 5. Fit the the M8 button buttonhead head screw thro through ugh the the transit transit fixin fixing g and into the threaded hole on the side of the main carriage. 6. Using Using a 5 mm mm Allen Allen key to tighte tighten n the M8 M8 screw screw, and secu secure re the front transit fixing to the main carriage.

CAUTION   Make sure the transit fixing is fully  butted to the main carriage. 7. Use a 5 mm key to tighte tighten n the the two M6 caphe caphead ad screws screws to secure the transit fixing to the base assembly.

4.19 4. 19.7 .7

Remo Re move ve Fr Fron ontt Tra Trans nsit it Fi Fixi xing ng 1. Remove Remove the the two M6 caphead caphead screw screwss to loose loosen n the trans transit it fixing. 2. Sla Slacke cken n the the M8 but button tonhea head d screw screw.. 3. With ithdra draw w the the front front tran transit sit fix fixing ing..

 

CAUTION   Place all screws with the transit  fixing in a safe place.  Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-97 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.19 4. 19.8 .8

Main Ma in Ca Carr rria iage ge Wh Whee eell Bea Beari ring ngss Two variants of the carriage have been made. The earlier type had two wheels, the later type has only one.

Two-Wheel Carriage Carri age The following preparations must be made.

CAUTION  Use a differences matched pair of wheelsand  to  avoid in tolerance wear. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Transit fixing. TRANSIT FIXING

Figure 4.49 Main carri carriage age wheels

4-98

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

CAUTION   Do NOT attempt to adjust the  differential focus module. To do so will change the delicate alignments.

Removal Procedure 1. Fit front front transi transitt fixing fixing to to suppo support rt the the main main carriage carriage (see Section 4.19.6). 2. Undo and remo remove ve wheel wheel nut nut with with 10 10 mm span spanner ner.. 3. Re Remo move ve fla flatt wash washer er.. 4. Repe Repeat at Steps Steps 3 and and 4 for the the other other carria carriage ge wheel. wheel.

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit flat flat wash washer er over over carr carriag iagee wheel wheel boss boss.. 2. Fit and and tight tighten en wheel wheel nut with 10 mm mm spanne spannerr. 3. Repe Repeat at Steps Steps 1 and and 2 for the the other other carria carriage ge wheel. wheel. 4. Remove Remove front front transit transit fixin fixing g from from the main carria carriage ge (see (see Section 4.19.7). 5. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 7. Perform the diff_focus alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.3). 8. Perfo Perform rm the the electro electronic nic repro repro test (see Secti Section on 7.6). 7.6).

 

9. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-99

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

One-Wheel Carriage The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Transit fixing.

Figure Fig ure 4.50 4.50 Mai Main n carria carriage ge wheel wheel

Removal Procedure 1. Fit front front transi transitt fixing fixing to to suppo support rt the the main main carriage carriage (see Section 4.19.6). 2. Undo and remo remove ve wheel wheel nut nut with with 13 13 mm span spanner ner..

3. Re Remo move ve fla flatt wash washer er..

4-100

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit flat flat wash washer er over over carri carriage age whe wheel el bos boss. s. 2. Fit and and tight tighten en wheel wheel nut with 13 mm mm spanne spannerr. 3. Remove Remove front front transit transit fixin fixing g from from the main carri carriage age (see (see Section 4.19.7). 4. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 5. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 6. Perform the diff_focus alignment procedure (see Section 6.4.3). 7. Perfo Perform rm the the electro electronic nic repro repro test (see Secti Section on 7.6). 7.6). 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.2 .20 0

X-S -Sllide Carriage Assembly This assembly carries the camera head, CCD mount, digitizer module, lens mount, focus motor, enlargement motor and drive and almost everything else, including sensors. The X-slide carriage uses a motorized leadscrew to move bi-directionally between the front and rear of the scanner, depending upon the position of the copy on the platen. The lens mount uses a motorized pinion to move bi-directionally - left to right - along a fixed rack and is mounted on the X-slide carriage. The CCD mount uses a motorized pinion to move bi-directionally - left to right - along a rotating leadscrew and is mounted on the X-slide carriage.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-101

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.20 4. 20.1 .1

Movi Mo ving ng th thee X-S X-Sli lide de Ca Carr rria iage ge On power up, the software boot program automatically automatically resets the X-slide carriage to rest at the datum position which is at the midpoint of its traversing range.

Figure Figur e 4.51 4.51 Movin Moving g the X-slid X-slide e carriage carriage

During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the X-slide carriage while the mains supply has been isolated. The acceptable method of moving the X-slide carriage, without causing any problems, is as follows: • Grasp the X-slide leadscrew and clockwise rotate it to move

the carriage toward the front.

4.2 .20 0.2

Mov ovin ing g the Len enss Mo Mou unt

On power up, the software boot program automatically automatically resets the lens mount to rest at its datum position which is at the left-hand end of the enlargement leadscrew.

4-102

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the lens mount while the mains supply has been isolated. The acceptable method of moving the lens mount is as follows: • Grasp the enlargement leadscrew and rotate it toward the

front to move the lens mount toward the left.

Figure Fig ure 4.52 4.52 Mov Moving ing the the lens lens mount mount

4.20.3

Moving the CC CCD Mo Mount On power up, the software boot program automatically automatically resets the CCD mount to rest at its datum position which is at the left-hand end of the focus rack. During certain removal and replacement procedures, it will be necessary to re-position the CCD mount while the mains supply has been isolated.

 

The acceptable method of moving the CCD mount is as follows: • Carefully push the CCD mount to a desirable position.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-103

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.53 4.53 Mov Moving ing the the CCD CCD mount mount

4.20.4

CAM FOLLOWER BRACKET

X-Slide Carriage

RAIL GUIDE

Figure Figur e 4.54 4.54 X-sli X-slide de leadsc leadscrew rew nut

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).

4-104

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Sectio ion n 4.11). 4.11). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move the X-sl X-slide ide carri carriage age towa toward rd the the centre centre (see Section 4.20.1).

Removal Procedure 1. Remo Remove ve the the digitiz digitizer er SK2 SK2 flexica flexicable ble conn connecto ectorr. 2. Disconnec Disconnectt PL7 from from the the X-slid X-slidee distribu distribution tion boar board d to release release the focus datum sensor cable.  Note: Do not cut the tie-wrap.

3. Remove Remove the the four four caphead caphead screw screws, s, spring springss and stan standof doffs fs to release the digitizer flexicable support tray and X-slide distribution board. 4. Remove Remove the the three three caphead caphead screw screwss to releas releasee the X-sli X-slide de leadscrew nut. 5. Pus Push h the X-sl X-slide ide carr carriag iagee toward toward the the rear rear..  Note: Movement should should be just sufficient for the carriage to clear the leadscrew nut.

6. Remove Remove the the two caph caphead ead screws screws to release release the front front X-sli X-slide de bearing block. 7. Remove Remove the the two caph caphead ead screws screws to release release the rear rear X-slid X-slidee bearing block. 8. Grasp the X-slid X-slidee carriage, carriage, lift lift carefull carefully y, move slight slightly ly to the left to allow the cam follower bracket to clear its rail guide (see Figure 4.54), and then withdraw the carriage away from the right-hand bearings and leadscrew.  Note: The above step is performed from from the front front of the scanner.

 

9. Place the X-sli X-slide de carria carriage ge on on a suit suitable able surf surface. ace.  Note: The surface should be in a position where where the carriage will not suffer from any probable damage.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-105

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

CAUTION  Special care must be taken to ensure each bearing is correctly set up while  securing it.

Replacement Procedure 1. Grasp the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage and and positio position n it over over the the bearing bearingss and leadscrew, ensuring the cam-follower bracket is under the guide rail. 2. Re-fit Re-fit and tigh tighten ten two two caphea caphead d screws screws to to secure secure the the rear rear X-slide bearing block.  Note: See Figure Figure 4.55 to correctly correctly align each bearing bearing block.

Figure 4.55 X-sli X-slide de bearing bearing alignm alignment ent

3. Re-fi Re-fitt tighten tighten two caphe caphead ad screws screws to to secure secure the the front front X-slide X-slide

bearing block. 4. Pul Pulll the X-sl X-slide ide carr carriag iagee toward toward the the fron front. t.

4-106

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

 Note: Movement should should be just sufficient for the carriage to connect with the leadscrew nut.

5. Re-fit Re-fit and tigh tighten ten the the three three caphea caphead d screws screws to to secure secure the the leadscrew nut. 6. Re-fit Re-fit and tigh tighten ten the the three three caphea caphead d screws, screws, sprin springs, gs, and and standoffs to secure the digitizer flexicable support-tray.  Note: Make sure sure the flexicable is correctly correctly aligned.

7. Re-fi Re-fitt PL7 to connec connectt the focu focuss datumdatum-sens sensor or cable. cable. 8. ReRe-con connec nectt SK2 SK2 to the dig digiti itizer zer.. 9. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 10. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ). 11. Ope Open n the the lid. lid. 12. Download the system-calibrati system-calibration on data from the floppy floppy disk  which is supplied with the replacement X-slide carriage. The data comprises information on bad pixels and the CCD type. Use the Write Buffer procedure in Section 7.3.5 to download the data. 13. Perform only the following following system calibration tests: tests: • Carriage, • X-slide, • Enlargement, • Offsets, • Copyhold Copyholder er (only if required).

See Section 6.5. 14. Perform the electronic repro test (see Section Section 7.6).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-107 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.20 4. 20.5 .5

X-sl Xslid idee Ca Carr rria iage ge Be Bear arin ings gs As Asse semb mbly ly The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve the the X-slid X-slidee carriag carriagee (see (see Sectio Section n 4.20.4 4.20.4). ).

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove six hexhex-driv drivee caphead caphead screws screws to to release release the the X-slide X-slide carriage guide bar assembly. 2. Slide both both bearin bearings gs off off the release released d guide guide bar assem assembly bly..

Figure 4.56 4.56 X-sli X-slide de carriage carriage bearing bearing on guide bar assembl assembly y

CAUTION  Use a matched pair of bearings to

 avoid differences in tolerance and  wear.

4-108

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedure  Note: The guide bar assembly has has three shaped shaped cutouts for  locating dowels on the main carriage casting.

1. Fit both both replacem replacement ent bearin bearings gs to the the guide guide bar bar assemb assembly ly..  Note: Make sure sure the stepped shoulder shoulder of each bearing faces the lens. DOWEL

Figure 4.57 X-sli X-slide de guide guide bar alignm alignment ent

2. Position Position the the X-slide X-slide carria carriage ge guide guide bar bar assemb assembly ly into into the the main carriage casting. 3. Re-fit Re-fit six hexhex-driv drivee caphead caphead screw screwss to secu secure re the the X-slide X-slide carriage guide-bar assembly.  Note: Make sure sure the shaped cutout of the guide-bar  guide-bar  assembly faces the dowels and that the rail edge is in contact with all three dowels. The stepped shoulder of  each bearing faces the end of the X-slide carriage.

4. Re-fi Re-fitt the the X-slid X-slidee carriag carriagee (see (see Sectio Section n 4.20. 4.20.4). 4).

 

5. Re fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 7. Open the li lid.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-109

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

8. Perfo Perform rm the the system system calib calibratio ration n tests tests (see (see Section Section 6.5). 9. Perfo Perform rm the the electro electronic nic repro repro test (see Secti Section on 7.6). 7.6).

4.20 4. 20.6 .6

Digi Di giti tize zerr Bo Boar ard d Co Cove verr Pla Plate te  Note: This item is not a replaceable part, part, but it must be removed  to access other parts which are replaceable. The digitizer fan is fixed to this cover plate.

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Po siti tion on4.12). main mai n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

PL1 PL4

PL2 PL3 SK2

Figure 4.58 Digit Digitizer izer board board cover plate

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL4 PL4 to to release release the digi digitizer tizer fan cabl cable. e.

4-110

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Rem Remov ovee the two 5 mm nuts nuts secu securin ring g SK2. SK2. 3. Slacken Slacken the the two side screw screwss and remo remove ve the the digitize digitizer-b r-board oard cover-plate.

Replacement Procedure 1. ReRe-fit fit the digit digitize izerr-bo board ard cov cover er-pl -plate ate.. 2. Ti Tighte ghten n the two two screws screws to secu secure re the digiti digitizer zer covercover-plate plate.. 3. ReRe-fit fit the the two two 5 mm nu nuts ts to to secur securee SK2. SK2. 4. Re Re-c -co onnec ectt PL4 PL4.. 5. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.7

Digitizer Fa Fan

Figure Fig ure 4.59 4.59 Dig Digiti itizer zer fan fan removal removal

 

 Note: This fan is fixed to the digitizer cover-plate. cover-plate.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-111

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve the digiti digitizerzer-boar board d cover cover-pla -plate te (see Sectio Section n 4.20.6). 4.20.6).

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove two two screws screws and and nuts nuts to relea release se the the digitize digitizerr fan from from the cover plate. 2. With ithdra draw w the dig digiti itizer zer fan fan..

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion replac replacemen ementt digiti digitizer zer fan fan on the cover cover plat plate. e. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt and tigh tighten ten the the two screw screwss and nuts to secure secure the the fan. fan. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt the the digitiz digitizer er cover cover plate plate (see Secti Section on 4.20. 4.20.6). 6).

4.20.8

Digitizer Bo Board The following preparations must be made. 1. Remo Remove ve the digiti digitizerzer-boar board d cover cover-pla -plate te (see Sectio Section n 4.20.6). 4.20.6). 2. Put on on the disp disposa osable ble anti antista static tic wrist wrist stra strap. p.

CAUTION  The static energy in your body can  destroy sensitive components on the  printed circuit board.

4-112

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.60 4.60 Dig Digiti itizer zer boar board d

CAUTION   Do NOT pull on flexicables to  remove their connectors otherwise  damage may occur.

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt SK2 and lay flat flat the the digitiz digitizer er flexica flexicable. ble. 2. Disconnec Disconnectt SK1 ribb ribbon on cable cable from from its its socket socket insi inside de the the right-hand end of the digitizer housing. 3. Grasp digi digitizer tizer boar board d and, and, with with care, care, lift lift it to allow allow the the standoffs to clear their slots and gently pull to release it.

 

4. Rem Remov ovee and ret retain ain the the four four stan stando doff ffs. s.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-113

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedure 1. Re-fi Re-fitt the four four stando standoffs ffs to to the replac replacemen ementt digitizer digitizer board board.. 2. Present Present and and engage engage the the standof standoffs fs on the the replacem replacement ent digiti digitizer zer board to the respective slots in the housing and lower the board to capture the standoffs. 3. ReRe-con connec nectt SK1 rib ribbo bon n cab cable. le. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt digitizer digitizer-boa -board rd cover cover-plat -platee (see Sectio Section n 4.20.6) 4.20.6).. 5. Re Re-c -con onne nect ct SK2 SK2 flexi flexica cabl ble. e. 6. Remo Remove ve the disp disposab osable le anti antistati staticc wrist wrist strap strap.. 7. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.9

Focus Mo Motor Ra Rack The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Centraliz Centralizee CCD CCD mount mount on the the focus focus moto motorr rack (see Section 4.20.3).

Removal Procedure 1. Rem Remov ovee the two two reces recessed sed mac machin hinee screws screws..

2. Re Remo move ve the the foc focus us mot motor or rac rack. k.

4-114

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure 4.61 Focus motor rack alignm alignment ent

Replacement/Alignment Replacement/ Alignment Procedure Procedure 1. Pos Positi ition on the rep replac lacem ement ent foc focus us motor motor rack rack..  Note: Make sure sure the teeth of the rack are are pointing forward. forward.

2. Loo Loosel sely y re-fi re-fitt the the two two machi machine ne scre screws. ws. 3. Move the CCD CCD moun mountt to posit position ion the the pinio pinion n of the the focus focus motor near to the left-hand screw.  Note: Remember to allow clearance clearance for the hexagon wrench. wrench.

4. Grasp the back back of of the rack and pull pull forwar forward d to meet the pinion. 5. Tigh ighten ten the lef left-h t-han and d scre screw w. 6. Move the CCD CCD moun mountt to posit position ion the the pinio pinion n of the the focus focus motor near to the right-hand screw.  Note: Remember to allow clearance clearance for the hexagon wrench. wrench.

7. Grasp the back back of of the rack and pull pull forwar forward d to meet the pinion.

 

8. Tigh ighten ten the rig rightht-han hand d scre screw w. 9. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 10. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-115

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.20.1 4.2 0.10 0 Foc Focus us Mot Motor or and and Ca Cable ble Lo Loom om The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move lens mou mount nt to the extre extreme me right right of enlarg enlargemen ementt leadscrew (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD moun mountt to the the extrem extremee left of the the focus focus rack (see Section 4.20.3). 6. Remo Remove ve the the focus focus mot motor or rack rack (see (see Secti Section on 4.20. 4.20.9). 9). FOCUS MOTOR PINION RACK

PL3

Figure Fig ure 4.6 4.62 2 Foc Focus us moto motorr

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL3 to release release the focusfocus-moto motorr cable cable from the

lower left hand socket on the digitizer board. 2. Remo Remove ve two caph caphead ead screws screws from benea beneath th the the CCD mou mount. nt.

4-116

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

3. Carefully Carefully dise disengag ngagee the focu focus-mo s-motor tor cable cable loom loom from under under the CCD mount. 4. Grasp the focus focus mot motor or and and ease ease it forward forward to clear clear the the CCD CCD mount.

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion cable cable loom loom of of the repla replaceme cement nt focus focus motor motor.. 2. Prese Present nt replace replacement ment focu focuss motor motor to the the CCD CCD mount. mount. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt two caph caphead ead screws screws to secure secure the the focus focus motor motor to the the CCD mount. 4. Re-co Re-connec nnectt PL3 to th thee lower lower left-han left-hand d socket socket on on the dig digitize itizerr board. 5. Repl Replace ace focu focus-mo s-motor tor rack (see Sect Section ion 4.20 4.20.9). .9). 6. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 7. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.1 4.2 0.11 1 Foc Focus us Datu Datum m Sensor Sensor and and Cable Cable Loo Loom m The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move lens mou mount nt to its its extreme extreme left-h left-hand and end end of its leadsc leadscrew rew (see Section 4.20.2).

 

5. Move CCD mount mount to its extre extreme me right-h right-hand and end end of of the rack  rack  (see Section 4.20.3). 6. Disco Disconnec nnectt SK2 SK2 and and lay lay flat flat the the digiti digitizer zer cable cable..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-117 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Figure Fig ure 4.63 4.63 Foc Focus us datum datum sens sensor or

Removal Procedure 1. Disconnec Disconnectt PL7 to release release the focus focus sens sensor or cable cable from from the X-slide distribution board. 2. Remove Remove crosspo crosspoint int self-t self-tappi apping ng screw screw to to release release the the focus focus sensor. 3. Cut tie tie-wr -wraps aps to relea release se sens sensor or cable cable.. 4. Withd ithdraw raw the the focus focus datum datum sensor sensor from from its alig alignmen nmentt slot. slot.

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion the the replacem replacement ent focus focus-dat -datum um senso sensorr and its cable. cable. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt self-tapp self-tapping ing screw screw to secu secure re the focu focus-dat s-datum um sensor sensor.. 3. Fit the the replacem replacement ent focus focus sens sensor or into into its alig alignmen nmentt slot. slot. 4. Fit new new tie-w tie-wrap rapss to secur securee the sens sensor or cable cable..

5. Re-co Re-connec nnectt PL7 PL7 to X-sli X-slide de dist distribu ribution tion boar board. d. 6. ReRe-con connec nectt SK2 SK2 to the the digi digitiz tizer er boar board. d. 7. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4-118

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.12 4.20 .12 Enla Enlargem rgement ent Datu Datum m Sensor Sensor and Cabl Cablee Loom Loom The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move lens mou mount nt to its its extreme extreme left-h left-hand and end end of its leadsc leadscrew rew (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD mount mount to its extre extreme me right-h right-hand and end end of of the rack  rack  (see Section 4.20.3).

Figure 4.64 CCD baffle baffle and enlarge enlargement ment sensor sensor

 

Removal Procedure 1. Disconnec Disconnectt PL1 to release release the enlar enlargem gement ent datum datum-sen -sensor sor cable from the digitizer board.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-119

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Remove Remove one, one, and loos loosen en the the other other,, caphead caphead screw of the the CCD-baffle located in front of the camera head.  Note: One screw screw is at the front and the other is diametrically diametrically opposite at the rear.

3. Re Remo move ve th thee CCD CCD ba baff ffle le.. 4. Remove Remove two two crosspoi crosspoint nt self-tap self-tapping ping screw screwss to releas releasee the enlargement sensor from the CCD mount. 5. Carefully Carefully with withdraw draw the the cable cable loom loom from from below below the the digitize digitizerr module.

Replacement Procedure 1. Position Position the the replacem replacement ent enlar enlargem gement ent datum datum-sens -sensor or and its cable loom. 2. Re-fit Re-fit and tigh tighten ten two two crossp crosspoint oint self self-tapp -tapping ing screws screws to secure the enlargement sensor. 3. Cle Clean an the the CCD-wi CCD-wind ndow ow (see (see Secti Section on 8.3.6 8.3.6). ). 4. Re Re-f -fit it th thee CC CCD D ba baff ffle le.. 5. Re-fit Re-fit one, one, and and tighten tighten both caph caphead ead screws screws of the the CCD CCD baffle. 6. Connect Connect PL1 PL1 to the the upper upper socket socket on on left-han left-hand d side side of the the digitizer board. 7. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.1 4.2 0.13 3 Enl Enlar argem gemen entt Lea Leadsc dscre rew w

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).

4-120

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Sectio ion n 4.11). 4.11). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move lens moun mountt to the the mid-poi mid-point nt of its its leadscr leadscrew ew length length (see (see Section 4.20.2). 5. Move CCD mount mount to its extre extreme me right-h right-hand and end end of of the rack  rack  (see Section 4.20.3).

Figure 4.65 Enlar Enlargement gement leadsc leadscrew rew and clamp

Removal Procedure 1. Slack Slacken en caphea caphead d screw screw on on the the enlarg enlargemen ement-lea t-leadscr dscrew ew clamp. 2. Remo Remove ve three three caphead caphead screw screwss to releas releasee the leads leadscrew crew nut. nut. 3. Move lens mount mount to the the extreme extreme end end of of its leadsc leadscrew rew length length (see Section 4.20.2). 4. Carefully Carefully with withdraw draw the enlar enlargeme gement nt leadsc leadscrew rew from from its its clamp.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-121

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedure 1. Carefully Carefully,, present present the the replac replacemen ementt leadscr leadscrew ew to the enlargement-leadscrew clamp. 2. Mov Movee lens lens moun mountt to meet meet its its leadsc leadscrew rew nut. nut. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt three three caphea caphead d screws screws to to secure secure the the leadsc leadscrew rew nut. nut. 4. Align Align the oute outerr edge edge of the the clamp clamp with the end end of of the leadscrew and set a 1 mm gap between the clamp and the casting face. 5. Tighte Tighten n caphead caphead screw screw to secure secure the enlar enlargeme gement-l nt-leads eadscrew crew clamp. 6. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 7. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.1 4.2 0.14 4 Enl Enlar argem gemen entt Leadsc Leadscre rew w Clamp Clamp The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Remo Remove ve the the enlarge enlargement ment lead leadscrew screw (see Sectio Section n 4.20.3). 4.20.3).

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove enlar enlargeme gement-l nt-leads eadscrew crew clamp clamp from from the the pinion pinion of the the enlargement motor.

4-122

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit replac replacemen ementt enlar enlargeme gement-l nt-leads eadscrew crew clam clamp p to the enlargement-motor pinion. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt enlar enlargeme gement nt leads leadscrew crew (see Secti Section on 4.20. 4.20.3). 3). 3. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20.1 4.2 0.15 5 Enl Enlar argem gemen entt Motor Motor and and Cable Cable Loom Loom

PL2

Figure Figur e 4.66 Enlar Enlargement gement motor and and cable cable loom

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

 

3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move the the lens lens mount mount to its its extreme extreme right right (see (see Sectio Section n 4.20.2). 4.20.2). 5. Move the CCD CCD mount mount to to its extre extreme me left left (see (see Section Section 4.20. 4.20.3). 3).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-123

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

6. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL2 to to release release the the enlarge enlargement ment motor motor cable from the digitizer board. 7. Remo Remove ve the enlar enlargem gement-l ent-leads eadscrew crew clamp (see Section 4.20.14).

Removal Procedure 1. Remove Remove two two caphead caphead screw screwss from from the the front front of of the CCD mount. 2. Grasp enla enlarge rgement ment motor motor and and ease ease it toward toward the the left-hand left-hand end to clear the CCD mount.

Replacement Procedure 1. Prese Present nt repla replaceme cement nt enla enlarge rgement ment moto motorr to its CCD moun mount. t. 2. Re-fit Re-fit two caphe caphead ad screws screws to to secure secure the enla enlarge rgement ment motor motor to its CCD mount. 3. Re-fit Re-fit the the enlarg enlargemen ement-lea t-leadscre dscrew w clamp clamp coll collar ar (see (see Section 4.20.14). 4. Re-connec Re-connectt PL2 to the the middle middle conne connector ctor on the the left-han left-hand d side side of the digitizer board. 5. Re-fi Re-fitt digitizer digitizer-boa -board rd cover cover plate plate (see (see Section Section 4.20 4.20.6). .6). 6. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 7. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.20 4. 20.1 .16 6 Ca Cam m Foll Follow ower er  Note: This item is located on the underside of the X-slide carriage at the CCD mount end.

The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12).

4-124

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Sectio ion n 4.11). 4.11). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Remo Remove ve the the X-slid X-slidee carriag carriagee (see (see Sectio Section n 4.20.4 4.20.4). ).

Figure Fig ure 4.6 4.67 7 Cam fol follow lower er

Removal Procedure 1. Provide Prov ide suitab suitable le soft soft mounts mounts to supp support ort the the upturned upturned X-slid X-slidee carriage. 2. Place uptu upturned rned X-sli X-slide de carria carriage ge on on soft soft mount mounts. s. 3. Remo Remove ve the the two two M4 M4 screws screws to relea release se basep baseplate. late. 4. Remo Remove ve keep keep nut nut to releas releasee cam follo follower wer from from basep baseplate. late.

Replacement Procedure

 

1. Fit replac replaceme ement nt cam cam follow follower er to the the basepl baseplate ate..  Note: Ensure Ensure that the cam follower backplate backplate is  perpendicular  perpendicu lar to direction direction of travel.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Re-fi Re-fitt and tigh tighten ten keep nut to secure secure cam follo follower wer to to baseplate.  Note: Do not over-tighten over-tighten the keep nut. 3. ReRe-fit fit the the two M4 M4 screws screws to to secure secure base basepla plate. te. 4. Re-fi Re-fitt the the X-slid X-slidee carriag carriagee (see (see Sectio Section n 4.20. 4.20.4). 4). 5. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-125

4-126

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.2 .21 1

X-s -sllide Leadscrew Asse semb mblly 4.21 4. 21.1 .1

X-sl Xslid idee Da Datu tum m Se Sens nsor or an and d Ca Cabl blee Loo Loom m The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Posi Position tion the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage at at the front front (see (see Sectio Section n 4.20.1) 4.20.1)..

PL6

Figure 4.68 X-sli X-slide de datum sensor and cable cable loom

Removal Procedure 1. Remo Remove ve two two crosspo crosspoint int screws screws to release release the senso sensorr. 2. Move the lens lens moun mountt to access access the the cable cable connec connector tor..

 

2. Move the lens lens moun mountt to access access the the cable cable connec connector tor.. 3. Slack Slacken en three three crossp crosspoint oint scre screws ws to ease the captiv captivee cable cable tidies.  Note: Do not cut these cable tidies.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-127 

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Cut tie tie-wr -wraps aps as nec necess essary ary.. 5. Disconnec Disconnectt PL6 to release release the X-slid X-slidee datum datum sensor sensor cabl cablee from the main-carriage distribution distribution board.  Note: This board is located under under X-slide distribution board  board  and under the CCD mount.

6. Remo Remove ve the the X-slid X-slidee datum datum sens sensor or and and cable cable loom loom..

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion the the replacem replacement ent X-slid X-slidee datum datum sensor sensor and its its cable cable loom. 2. Re-fi Re-fitt two cross crosspoin pointt screws screws to to secure secure the the senso sensorr. 3. Conn Connect ect PL6 PL6 to the main main carria carriage ge distri distributi bution on board board.. 4. Eas Easee the cabl cablee under under the the three three cabl cablee tidies tidies.. 5. Ti Tighte ghten n three three crosspoi crosspoint nt screws screws to to capture capture cable cable tidi tidies. es. 6. Fi Fitt tie tie-w -wra raps ps as req requi uire red. d. 7. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.21.2

X-slide Leadscrew The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1).

3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to to the front (see Sectio Section n 4.20.1) 4.20.1)..

4-128

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

LENS

STEPPER MOTOR CLAMP

LEADSCREW LEADSCREW NUT

Figure Fig ure 4.69 4.69 X-s X-slid lide e leadsc leadscrew rew

Removal Procedure 1. Slack Slacken en caph caphead ead scre screw w on on the the X-sli X-slide de lead leadscrew screw clamp.  Note: Do not remove remove this screw screw..

2. Remove Remove three three caph caphead ead screw screwss to relea release se the the X-slid X-slidee leadscrew nut.  Note: This is the triangular nut situated on the X-slide carriage as viewed from the front.

3. Push X-sl X-slide ide carria carriage ge toward toward the rear rear to to free free the lead leadscrew screw nut. 4. Caref Carefully ully with withdraw draw the X-sli X-slide de leads leadscrew crew with nut.

 

Replacement Procedure 1. Fit replace replacement ment lead leadscrew screw to the the X-slid X-slidee motor motor clamp clamp..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-129

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

2. Pull X-slide X-slide carria carriage ge toward toward the front front to capt capture ure the the leadscrew leadscrew nut. 3. Re-fi Re-fitt three three caphead caphead screw screwss to secur securee the X-slid X-slidee leadscrew leadscrew nut. 4. Ti Tighte ghten n caphead caphead screw on the the X-slid X-slidee leadscrew leadscrew clam clamp. p. 5. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4.21 4. 21.3 .3

X-sl Xslid idee Lea Leads dscr crew ew Mo Moto torr and and Ca Cabl blee Loo Loom m PL4

Figure 4.70 4.70 X-slid X-slide e leadscrew leadscrew motor motor and cable cable loom

The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see

Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

4-130

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to to the front (see Sectio Section n 4.20.1) 4.20.1).. 5. Move CCD mou mount nt to the right right (see Secti Section on 4.20. 4.20.3). 3).

Removal Procedure 1. Disco Disconnec nnectt PL4 from from the the main-ca main-carriag rriagee distribu distribution tion boar board. d. 2. Cu Cutt tietie-wr wrap apss as re requ quir ired ed.. 3. Eas Easee cable cable loom loom from from the the captiv captivee cable cable clips clips.. 4. Slack Slacken en caphea caphead d screw screw on on the the X-slide X-slide leads leadscrew crew clamp clamp..  Note: Do not remove remove this screw screw..

5. Slacken Slacken the the two caph caphead ead screws screws relea release se the the X-slide X-slide leadsc leadscrew rew motor from the motor bracket. 6. Eas Easee the the moto motorr free free of of its its clamp clamp..

Replacement Procedure 1. Re-fit Re-fit and tigh tighten ten the the two two caphead caphead screw screwss to secure secure the X-slide leadscrew motor to the motor bracket. 2. Fit mo motor tor to the lea leads dscre crew w clamp clamp.. 3. Ti Tighte ghten n the the caphead caphead screw to secure secure the clam clamp. p. 4. Conn Connect ect PL4 PL4 to the main main carria carriage ge distri distributi bution on board board.. 5. ReRe-fit fit the the light light tabl tablee (see (see Sectio Section n 4.16). 4.16). 6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

4-131

 

Unit Replacement Procedures

4.2 .21 1.4

X-s -sli lid de Le Leadsc scrrew Cla lam mp The following preparations must be made. 1. Posi Positi tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera Service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ). 4. Move the X-slid X-slidee carriage carriage to to the front (see Sectio Section n 4.20.1) 4.20.1)..

Removal Procedure 1. Slack Slacken en caphea caphead d screw screw on on the the X-slide X-slide leads leadscrew crew clamp clamp..  Note: Do not remove remove this screw screw..

2. Slacken Slacken the the two caphe caphead ad screws screws securi securing ng the the baseplate baseplate of the the X-slide leadscrew motor. 3. Ease the the clamp clamp free free of of both both the the motor motor and and leadscr leadscrew ew..

Replacement Procedure 1. Posi Position tion the the repla replaceme cement nt X-sli X-slide de leads leadscrew crew clam clamp. p. 2. Fit clamp clamp to both the X-slid X-slidee motor motor and and its leads leadscrew crew.. 3. Tighte Tighten n the two two caphead caphead screw screwss to secure secure the the basepla baseplate te of the the X-slide leadscrew motor. 4. Ti Tighte ghten n the the caphead caphead screw to secure secure the clam clamp. p. 5. ReRe-fit fit the the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

6. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1).

4-132

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

5

Terminal Diagnostics This chapter provides a description of the terminal diagnostic  procedur  pro cedures es for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner Scanner..

5.1

Overview The terminal diagnostics are a series of tests that are performed by an authorized field (customer) service engineer using a VT100 compatible terminal. Terminal diagnostics have the full range of tests which are performed on the scanner via an RS232 cable connected to the scanner’s diagnostic port. The scanner diagnostics have the following features: • The diagnostic user interface uses the same principle of 

hierarchical menus as other Fujifilm diagnostics software. • Soak tests can be performed on all or sub-sets and failed tests can be repeated. • An error-message error-message logging facility allows groups of tests to be

run unattended. Results can then be viewed later. • The amount of information reported by each test can be

increased or decreased using a Verbose flag. • Self-test routines are activated on power up (see

 

Section 5.2.1). • When all of the diagnostic tests are run by the soak

command, these tests are sequenced so that the first test to FAIL will indicate a faulty unit.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-1

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

 Note: Subsequen Subsequentt failures may be due to the first first problem problem detected by the  test. firstthe problem soak by replacing thesoak faulty unitEliminate and then the re-run test.

The terminal diagnostics program is divided into four main menus (see Figure 5.1). Main Menu

Elec / 

See Section 5.5

Optics / 

See Section 5.9

Mech / 

See Section 5.10

Setup / 

See Chapter 6

Figure Figur e 5.1 5.1 Menu Map for for the scanne scannerr

The electronic tests, under Elec/, provide a series of tests for the system board, the digitizer board, and the lamp-driver board. The optics tests, under Optics/, provide a series of tests for the stability of the scanning illumination and for checking the uniformity of illumination at the CCD image sensor. The mechanical tests, under Mech/, provide a series of tests for all the electro-mechan electro-mechanical ical sub-assemblies. The setup tests, under Setup/, provide a series of utilities for the alignment and calibration of the scanner. Most of these terminal diagnostic tests are also available on the workstation diagnostics display.

5-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.2

Power-up Sequence 5.2.1

Power-on Tests When the system is powered up, it will automatically run through a series of tests prior to its readiness to scan. Most of the diagnostic tests can be re-run from the menus, however, some tests (e.g. the ram and eprom tests) are only tested during the power-on sequence. Not all of the available tests are run at power-u power-up. p. The results of these tests are made available for display by the workstation application software. The power-up sequence and movement between the three system modes; boot code, diagnostics, and the application is as follows: POWER UP STANDBY SWITCH

OK RESTART

BOOT UP OK FATAL ERROR DISPLAYS AN ERROR CODE AND REBOOTS

POST DIAGs OK/NON FATAL ERROR YES

TERMINAL DIAGNOSTICS

VT100 CONNECTED?

NO

APPLICATION SYSTEM

 

appl [return]

Figure 5.2 Power Power-up -up and softwar software e access access diagram diagram

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-3

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

In the event of a fatal error, the POSTs will not terminate, but will halt the sequence write aan error message to the VT100 emulation window andand activate flashing fault LED on the display panel (see Table 5.1). After displaying the code, the system will attempt to re-boot as a test to clear the fault.

Table 5.1 5.1 Flashi Flashing ng fault-la fault-lamp mp modes modes # Flashes

Description of Failure

ON 1 2

See Table B.2 RAM test failure. Flash memory test failure.

3 4 5 6 7

ISP test failure. IMR test failure. Interrupt test failure. SCSI test failure. CS0 test failure.

When all three LEDs are on and communication with the CPU (e.g. via the SCSI or RS232 cable) is not possible, the system board cannot run POST. Note that during the POSTs the lamps will be struck to help evaporate any mercury on the lamp filaments.

5-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.3

Terminal Di Diagnostics Us User In Interface This facility allows a customer support technician to investigate faults more comprehensively than by the workstation diagnostics method and can test systems even when the SCSI operations have been affected.

5.3 .3..1

The Term rmin ina al Dia iagn gno ost stic icss Dis isp pla lay y VT100 Emulation Operation An emulation window may be viewed on any server, whether it is a workstation or a terminal. The procedures required to display the window are described below.

Access on a Macintosh/PC 1. Sta Start rt the the term termina inall emula emulator tor (e. (e.g. g. kermit /   / terminal terminal). 2. Set up for: for: 9600 9600 baud, baud, 8-data 8-data bits bits,, 1-stop 1-stop bit, no no parity parity,, and no flow control. 3. Po Powe werr-up up th thee sca scann nner er.. The diagnostic program on the scanner starts.

The VT100 Display The VT100 terminal display is identical, regardless of the platform on which the window is running. The top line of the screen indicates the program title.

 

Below this is a box which shows the current menu and the command group available at this level. The prompt and all user input appears in the bottom line of the screen. The prompt changes to indicate the current sub-menu.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-5

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

Figure 5.3 Termin erminal al diagnostic diagnostics s opening opening screen screen

The diagnostics software is based on hierarchical menus. Options available at any time are restricted to groups. The members of each group are related logically within the hierarchy.

Entering Commands There are two types of command: • those which directly select tests or utilities, • those which select another group (or sub-menu) of 

commands. When these are entered the screen is redrawn with commands. the new group displayed. These commands have the suffix  /  . The commands which are currently available (except global commands which are available at any time) are displayed on the

screen.

5-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.3.2

Global Commands Global commands do not appear in the menu structure and so are not displayed at the top of the screen. Global commands can be entered regardless of the current menu position. The global commands along with the menu items available for the current menu level can be listed by typing help [Return] or [?]. Global commands are listed in the table below. To select a command, type its name, followed by [Return] or [Enter]. The global commands and their functions are shown Table 5.2. All diagnostics commands are case independent. For example,  HELP, help or HeLp, all select the same command. Diagnostics commands commands can be abbreviated. For example, to select the Help command you can enter h, he, hel or help. If several commands begin with the same letters, then sufficient letters must be typed to make the selection unique. For example if there are two commands, help and hello and he is entered, the system responds with a command entry error. To select the Hello command you must enter at least hell. Some commands can be modified by adding subsidiary commands.. For example, if soak soe is entered, the soak commands command is modified so that it Stops On an Error. Certain commands require responses to questions questions.. Other commands require extra data to be entered, this data is usually but not always in the form of numbers.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-7 

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

Tabl able e 5.2 Glo Global bal comm command ands s

Global Command

break monitor /  rlog flog repeat showlog loadscript star runscript showscript listscripts delete zeroscripts record verbose appl help ? soak stats enable disable find path temp_stamp time_stamp

Function

A forced break point for debugging. Enters the monitor menu. Sets the RAM log. Sets the FLASH log. Executes the command string count times. Displays the contents of a file. Loads a named script file from FLASH to RAM. Enables/disables the rotating star activity indicator. Executes currently loaded named script file. Shows the current script file. Lists those scripts stored in FLASH. Deleted named script from FLASH Erases all script files from FLASH. Records the command lines into a script file. Selects the level of messages for display. Quits diagnostics and enters the application. Lists all menu items currently available, and displays details about tests. Lists all menu items currently available, and displays details about tests. Soak a test or submenu of tests. Shows the current status of the system. Enables individual tests or submenus for soak testing. Disables individual tests or submenus that were enabled for soak testing. Locates an item within the menu structure. Displays the current menu path. Puts temperature data from system and digitizer board sensors into error messages. Puts time data into error messages.

Enters the evt menu. Returns cursor to parent menu. Returns the cursor to parent menu.

evt/  ../  quit/ 

5-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Command Line Editing As an aid to the user, the recorder diagnostics keep a history of  the last ten command commandss entered. Recall and editing of any of these commands is possible. • To move through the history of the commands use the

 or

 cursor keys. • To edit a line use the [delete] key to remove characters, then

type in the new characters. • To remove all characters from a line press

.

• To execute a command that has been recalled press [Return].

Soak Test Test Operation Operati on The soak command will run all tests that are soak enabled in all sub-menus below the current level. Tests and sub-menus that are soakable are indicated by an S  suffix  suffix to the command name. If the S is emboldened, the test is enabled. If the S not emboldened,, the test is not enabled. emboldened To soak all soakable tests and sub-menus, use the soak command. By selecting soak soe the diagnostics will run each soakable test once and will stop when an error occurs. To soak more than once, use  soak x where x is the required number of repetitions. To soak an individual test or sub-menu, enter soak x name , where x where  x is  is the name of the test or sub-menu and name is the

 

number of repeats. To select the stop-on-error code use the suffix soe. For example, soak 10 soe initiates a soak on all enabled tests 10 times and the tests will stop on any error. To stop a soak test press [Ctrl] and c.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-9

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

If a soak test fails and the stop-on-error (SOE) flag has been set, then a message is displayed on the monitor: ** An error stopped the soak test! [test name]

where [test name] is the name of the test which failed. To select the loop-on-error code use the suffix loe. For example; soak 10 loe initiates a soak on all enabled tests 10 times and the tests will loop indefinitely on any error. The enable command enables soak tests. Individual tests can be enabled. For example; enable test3 enables command Test3 for soak testing. If enable all is entered then every command in all sub-menus will be enabled. The disable command disables soak tests. Individual tests can be disabled. For example; disable test3 disables command Test3 for soak testing. If disable all is entered then every command in all sub-menus will be disabled. Test results can be logged to RAM, or FLASH, for subsequent examination. Commands available are: • rlog on - tests logged to RAM enabled, • rlog off - tests logged to RAM disabled, • rlog clear - clears the rlog buffer.

 Note: The flog  commands are similar for FLASH.

Time information can be optionally added to the error log using the command time_stamp. Temperature information may be also added to the error log using the command temp_stamp.

Verbose Command The verbose command controls the messages which appear during soak tests.

5-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

On its own, this command reports the status of the Verbose function (on or off). Use verbose on and verbose off to switch the function on and off respectively. • When Verbose is on, all messages are displayed and messages

beginning with **, --, ++ and ^^ are logged to RAM (if RAM logging is enabled).  Note:  Only error messages (indicated with **) are logged to FLASH. • When Verbose is off, only error messages are displayed and

logged to RAM or FLASH.  Note: For troubleshooting, troubleshooting, always select the Verbose ON   option.

5.3.3

Standard Monitor Co Commands Table 5.3, Table 5.5, and Table 5.4 lists the monitor commands for the scanner.

Monitor Mode Operation Within the diagnostics menu there is a global command, monitor, which selects the diagnostics monitor for the scanner. It allows low-level access to system hardware with facilities such as memory-access routines. The diagnostics monitor operates in a similar way to the diagnostic menu system.

 

Commands are entered by typing the command name followed by [Return] exactly the same way as for the diagnostics menu. The same rules of menu searching and abbreviation handling that apply to the menu system are used.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-11

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

A history stack of commands and command line editing are also supported. Type help for general information. information. Type help command_name for specific help.

Table 5.3 5.3 Standa Standard rd monitor monitor comman commands ds Command

Function

dmem verify

Read from a memory location. Read from a memory location and check that the memory location contains the desired pattern.

smem sverify

Set memory to a specified value. Write to a memory location and verify that the write occurred. Copies one area to another area of memory. memory. Compare two blocks of memory. Search an area of memory with the desired pattern. Displays a list of servo motor commands. Displays a list of stepper motor commands. Toggles (enables/disables) automatic startup of application. Returns cursor to the previous menu.

cmem compare search servo /  stepper /  tauto .. / 

5-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Servo Motor Commands This contains a number of commands to drive the servo motor. Table 5.4 5.4 Servo motor test command commands s Test Name

Test No.

Status

datum

104

Soakable

hi lo error stats

-

User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec

simulation home

-

User Exec User Exec

stop

-

User Exec

off goto

-

User Exec User Exec

desired

-

User Exec

pos init delay

-

User Exec User Exec User Exec

wait

-

User Exec

.. / 

-

User Exec

Description

Initializes the servo motor and performs the datum procedure to park the main carriage. Defines the high-speed control-port settings. Defines the low-speed control-port settings. Defines the positional-error tolerance. Reports the statistics of the three sensors; the main carriage datum the forward limit sensor and the reverse limitsensor, (park) sensor sensor. . Enables/disabless servo motor simulation mode. Enables/disable Defines the current position of the main carriage with respect to its datum position. Stops any current movement of the main carriage. Three options are offered: Smoothly, Abruptly, or Turnoff. Removes power supply to the servo motor. Changes the status of acceleration and velocity of the servo motor, and positions the main carriage. Reports position of the main carriage. Can be used to set a desired position. Range of desired positions is between 0 and 540000. Reports the current position of the main carriage. Initializes the servo motor. Pauses any keyboard/script processing for a specified number of seconds. Waits for the servo motor to stop any rotation before giving control back to the keyboard. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).

 Note: These tests will fail if the interlocks are activated. activated.

 

To move the Server motor using the Monitor mode:

1. Op Open en a term termin inal al win windo dow w. 2. Laun Launch ch the Termi Terminal nal diagno diagnostics stics by by powering powering on on the scanner scanner..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-13

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

3. Type mon [Return]. 4. Pr Pres esss th thee Sp Spac aceb ebar ar,, taking note of the warning given. 5. Type servo [Return]. 6. Type init [Return] to initialise for the servo motor. 7. Type datum [Return] to send the servo motor to datum. 8. To drive drive the the motor motor to a specifie specified d positi position, on, type type goto ∧pos=xxxxxx, where ∧ = a space and xxxxxx is a value between 0 and 545000.

CAUTION   Do not exceed the values given, or  damage may occur to the scanner. scanner. If  If   the motor drives up to the end-stops  and continues to drive an unusual   noise will be heard from the motor motor.. Switch off the scanner and re-boot. If any command fails it may be necessary to re-initialise and reset the datum. You can  to usecheck the pos to give a positon sensors the command sensor state, but the displayread-out is not inand real time.

5-14

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Stepper Motor Commands This contains a number of commands to drive the three stepper-motors. Table 5.5 5.5 Steppe Stepperr motor motor test comman commands ds Test Name

Test No.

Status

63/64/65

User Exec

sensors *

-

User Exec

simulation *

-

User Exec

off

-

User Exec

delay #

-

User Exec

wait *

-

User Exec

halt *

-

User Exec

stop *

-

User Exec

init *

-

User Exec

pos default

-

User Exec User Exec

goto

-

User Exec

step

-

User Exec

stat * -reset

-

User Exec

stat * -zero

-

User Exec

datum *

Description

Performs a datum procedure on the specified stepper motor. Reports current state and statistics of a selected sensor (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Enables/disables the simulation mode for a selected motor (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Turns OFF the power supply to a specified stepper motor. Pauses any keyboard/script processing for a specified number (#) of seconds. Waits until the specified stepper motor has stopped before giving control back to the keyboard. (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). Stops a specified stepper motor quickly quickly,, and then turns OFF its power supply (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none ( none = all). Stops a specified stepper motor in a controlled manner (* = 1, 2, or 3). (none = all). To re-initialize re-initialize the motor, motor, run its datum test. Initializes the specified motor to allow the entry of acceleration/decelerate acceleration/decele rate profiles. Displays current position of a specified motor. Initializes a specified stepper motor with the default acceleration/deceleration acceleration/decele ration profile. Moves the selected carriage to a specified position (e.g. X-slide carriage, focus mount, or CCD mount). Moves the selected carriage by a specified number of steps (+ or -). Records the state and statistics of a specified stepper motor.. -reset will re-set the status. motor -zero will set the stat’s counters to zero.

 

stat * nostat .. / 

-

User Exec User Exec

-nostat disables the output path for the statistical information. Returns cursor to the previous memory (same as quit).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-15

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

 Note: There are are three datum datum sensors, three three stepper motors, and  a simulation state for each motor which can be either  enabled or disabled. * = a number to represent the following options: when * = 1 the enlargement motor or its datum sensor is selected. when * = 2 the focus motor or its datum sensor is selected. when * = 3 the X-slide motor or its datum sensor is selected. when a number is not specified then all three motors are operated.  Note: These tests will fail if the interlocks are activated. activated. To move a stepper motor using the Monitor mode:

1. Op Open en a term termin inal al win windo dow w. 2. Laun Launch ch the Termi Terminal nal diagno diagnostics stics by by powering powering on on the scanner scanner.. 3. Type mon [Return]. 4. Pr Pres esss th thee Sp Spac aceb ebar ar,, taking note of the warning given. 5. Type stepper [Return]. 6. To initial initialise ise the Enla Enlarge rgemen mentt motor motor,, type: type: init ∧1∧0.33∧33∧noaccel [Return], where ∧ = a space. To initialise the Focus motor, type: init ∧2∧0.33∧33∧noaccel [Return]. To initialise the X-slide motor, type: init ∧3∧0.44∧44∧noaccel [Return]. 7. To send send the Enla Enlarge rgement ment moto motorr to datu datum, m, type: type: datum∧1 [Return].

To send the Focus motor to datum, type: datum∧2 [Return]. To send the X-slide motor to datum, type: datum∧3 [Return].

5-16

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

8. To drive drive the motor motor to a specif specified ied positio position, n, the Enlar Enlargem gement ent motor 13500 steps from datum for example, type goto ∧1∧13500∧;wait [Return]. The Enlargement motor will begin to move 13500 steps from datum. Control will not be returned to the keyboard until the motor gets there. As an alternative, nowait can be entered and control will return to the keyboard immediately. Maximum values are as follows: • Enlargement motor: 0 to 13600, • Focus motor: 0 to 15400, • X-slide motor: 10000 from datum.

CAUTION   Do not exceed the values given, or  damage may occur to the scanner. scanner. If  If   the motor drives up to the end-stops  and continue to drive an unusual   noise will be heard from the motor motor.. Switch off the scanner and re-boot.

If command fails it may be necessary to re-initialise and reset theany datum. You can use the pos command to give a positon read-out and sensors to check the sensor state, but the display is not in real time.

5.3.4

Display Utilities

 

Certain global commands (see Table 5.2) allow logs to be displayed on a terminal.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-17 

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

Tabl able e 5.6 Dis Displa play y logs logs menu menu Test Name

Status

showlog showscript

User Exec User Exec

Description

Shows showlog records. Shows current script file.

5-18

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.4

Terminal Diagnostic Tests These tests are organized into a number of menus that reflect the architecture of the scanner. At the top level, the tests are organized into the following menus: • ele electr ctron onic: ic:

These The se test test the the circuit circuit boa boards rds of of the syste system. m.

• op opttic icss:

Thesee tes Thes estt th thee opti tica call path thss of the sc scan ann ner  (see Section 5.9).

• mech

These te test th the me mechanical as assemblies of of th the system (see Section 5.10).

• setup

These utilities allow the scanner to be mechanically aligned and calibrated (see Chapter 6).

The electronic tests further divided into sections. • system board tests:

See Section 5.5 which are further sub-divided into CPU tests, System tests and MCB tests,

• digitizer bo board te tests:

See Se Section 5. 5.6,

• lam lamp p drive driverr board board tes tests: ts: See Sect Section ion 5.7, 5.7, • utilities:

See Section 5.8.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-19

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

Elec

cpu_test /  sys_brd / 

See Table 5.7 scsi_tests / 

See Table 5.9

dsp_tests / 

See Table 5.10

sync_tests / 

See Table 5.11

mcb_brd /  dig_brd / 

See Table 5.12 basic / 

See Table 5.14

function / 

See Table 5.15

lamp_brd / 

See Table 5.16

utils / 

See Table 5.17 Figure Figu re 5.4 5.4 Ele Elec/m c/menu enu tre tree e

5-20

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.5

System Board Tests 5.5.1

Introduction The system board tests divide the C-550 Lanovia Scanner system into a group of functional blocks. The functional blocks are as follows: • Control processor unit (CPU), • SCSI control unit, • Digital signal processor (DSP) unit, • Synchronization unit, • Motion controllers.

5.5.2

CPU Tests These fundamental tests ensure the command processor unit (CPU) is running and they also ensure that the remaining diagnostic tests can be run. The cpu_test menu provides the following functions: • Simple UART and power-up indication test, • DRAM memory register based test, • FLASH memory register based checksum test, • Interrupt tests, • Tests the ISP port,

 

• Control status register test, • Interrupt mask register test,

The simple UART, and FLASH memory register based checksum tests are only run at power-up.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-21

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

cpu_test Menu Path  Elec/cpu_test Tabl able e 5.7 5.7 CPU CPU_te _test st menu menu Test Name

Test No.

cs_0 isp digitizer_if icr cvr L1_reg L2_reg imr int mem_dram addr_dram temp_status

25 26 28 47 48 80 81 27 52 60 61 49

Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable

temp_sensor

50

User Exec

.. / 

-

Status

Soakable

Description

Checks the control register space. Checks the in-situ-programming (ISP) port. Checks the digitizer’s interface port. Checks the DSP‘s interface port. Checks the DSP‘s interface port. Checks data bus operation for lamp register 1 Checks data bus operation for lamp register 2 Checks the CPU’s interrupt mask register. Checks for correct responses to the external interrupts Checks the DRAM memory (see note below). Checks the DRAM addressing (see note below). Checks and, if required, sets the hysteresis limits of the temperature sensor. Checks the operation of the temperature chip and its sense bit on the system board. Returns cursor to the parent menu (same as quit).

 Note: These checks only test a part of the DRAM. DRAM.

5-22

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.5.3

Sys_brd Tests The sys_brd menu has four sub-menus which checks the following to ensure they are correctly functioning: • the SCSI interface, •  the DSP, • the synchronizer, • the motor control interface.

Tabl able e 5.8 5.8 Sys Sys_br _brd d tests tests Test Name

scsi_tests /  dsp_tests /  sync_tests / 

Description

See Table 5.9 See Table 5.10 See Table 5.11

SCSI_Tests These diagnostic tests ensure that the SCSI controller is working correctly.  Note: The SCSI output is not tested in this group. The control logic has the diagnostic features added to allow: • Ability to reset the SCSI controller. • Data bus and address bus tests on the SCSI controller. • The SCSI controllers flags can be tested by emptying and

 

filling the SCSI FIFO and checking the status of the flags. SCSI diagnostics are only available through the terminal diagnostics port.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-23

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

scsi_tests Menu Path  Elec/sys_brd/scsi_tests  Elec/sys_brd /scsi_tests Tabl able e 5.9 5.9 SCS SCSI_t I_test ests s Test Name

abus dbus reset flags .. / 

Test No.

Status

Description

51 5 6 7 -

Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable User Exec

Tests the address bus on the SCSI controller Tests the data bus on the SCSI controller Resets the SCSI controller Tests operation of the SCSI controller buffer flags. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).

DSP_Tests The digital signal processor (DSP), along with the SCSI interface, comprise the image path section of the system board. The DSP handles all autobalance, image processing, processing, and formatting of the image data before sending it to the workstation via the SCSI interface. The DSP can perform its own diagnostics when it receives the appropriate instructions from the CPU. The DSP assists in the synchronizer diagnostics and tests the DMA transfers between the DSP and the SCSI chip.

5-24

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

dsp_tests Menu Path  Elec/sys_brd/dsp_tests  Elec/sys_brd /dsp_tests Tabl able e 5.10 5.10 dsp dsp_te _tests sts Test Name

Test No.

Status

Description

reset

8

Soakable

16sram dram16 24sram x_input

9 10 11 13

Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable

Tests the system board’s ability to reset and download code into the dsp. Tests the DSP’s 16-bit SRAM. Tests the DSP’s 16-bit DRAM. Tests the DSP’s 24-bit SRAM. Tests the DMA transfers into the DSP x-memory

y_input

14

Soakable

x_output

15

Soakable

y_output

16

Soakable

byteswap

17

Soakable

oscillator (*) line_sync (*)

18 19

Soakable Soakable

blue_integrate (*)

20

Soakable

red_integrate (*)

22

Soakable

green_integrate (*)

21

Soakable

valid_video (*)

23

Soakable

start_of_line (*)

24

Soakable

stacks. Tests the DMA transfers into the DSP y-memory stacks. Tests the DMA transfers from the DSP’s x-memory stacks to the SCSI chip. Tests the DMA transfers from the DSP’s y-memory stacks to the SCSI chip. Tests the DMA transfers from DSP to the SCSI chip using the byteswap facility. Checks the DSP’s crystal frequency. Measures the line counter mark-to-space ratio on a signal from the synchronizer Tests the synchronizer’s integration timer for the blue CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio. Tests the synchronizer’s integration timer for the red CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio Tests the synchronizer’s integration timer for the green CCD and measures the mark-to-space ratio Measures the mark-to-space ratio of the valid_video synchronization signal. Measures the mark-to-space ratio of the start-of-line synchronization signal.

 

.. / 

-

User Exec

Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit) .

 Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the digitizer  board is either faulty or not connected.

(*) This symbol indicates synchronizer tests.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-25

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

Sync_Tests This control unit provides synchronization of the data acquisition with the main carriage traversing mechanism. The diagnostics features are: • Stuck bits to be tested on the read/write bits of the registers, • Generation of interrupts in poll mode, • Measuring of following signals via the DSP, • While the tests are listed here, they actually reside in DSP

diagnostics: •

Line synchronizer,

•

Start of scan line,

•

Integration times,

•

Valid video.

sync_tests Menu Path  Elec/sys_brd/scsi_tests  Elec/sys_brd /scsi_tests

5-26

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Tabl able e 5.11 5.11 Syn Sync_t c_test ests s Test Name

Test No.

Status

line red_green blue_control

1 2 3

Soakable Soakable Soakable

addr_sync poll_int

46 4

Soakable Soakable

-

User Exec

.. / 

Description

Checks the data bus to the line-count register. Checks the data bus to the red_green integration register. Checks the data bus to the blue integration, prescaler, prescaler, and valid_video register. Checks the valid_video timing and synchronization. Tests the ability of the pixel counters to generate an interrupt request by polling the interrupt bit. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).

 Note: The sync_tests  on  on the system board do not test the complete operation. See Table 5.10 for the other  synchronizer tests.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-27 

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

5.5.4

Mcb_brd Tests The mcb_brd tests check the functioning of the motor control interface circuits to ensure they are functioning correctly. correctly. The motor controllers are the interface between the drive circuits and the cpu. Motion control is a separate circuit located on the system board. Testing is at 2 levels: • the electronic interface between the processor and the mcb,

and • the functional testing of each motor assembly.

 Note: The functional tests are are available in the mech/   ⇒ tests section (see Section 5.10).

There are additional facilities for exercising the motors, but these are not required for diagnosin diagnosing g faults with the system. These facilities are available from the standard monitor commands (see Table 5.3).

mcb_brd Tests Tests Menu Path  Elec/mcb_brd   Elec/mcb_b rd  Tabl able e 5.12 5.12 mcb mcb_br _brd d tests tests

Test Name Test No.

s_enable_reg mode_reg reset_servo

76 77 82

Status

Soakable Soakable Soakable

Description

Tests the data bus of the stepper enable register. Tests the data bus of the stepper mode register. Checks that the servo controller can be reset.

data_reg control_reg

78 79

Soakable Soakable

Tests the data bus of the servo s data port. Tests the data bus of the servo controller’s control register.

5-28

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.6

Digitizer Board Tests 5.6.1

Introduction The digitizing system diagnostics is considered as two elements: • the digital control electronics, • the analogue electronics.

The digital control aspects are tested as part of the basic tests. These include interface and data path tests of the circuit. The analogue electronics are tested by the functional tests. These use special modes operation by injecting analogue signals intodiagnostic the digitizer inputofand testing whether or not they have been correctly processed.

5.6.2

Digitizing System The digitizer board is part of the scan head and it provides the front end analogue electronics for the CCD sensor. The digitizer provides clock signals and power to the CCD headboard and receives back the analogue signals from the red, green bluesystem stripes. These are converted to digital form and passedand to the board. The interface to the system board (including power) power) is via a single 30-way ribbon cable. A voltage sensor indicates if any of the incoming power supply rails have failed. A temperature sensor gives a pass/fail indication of board over-temperature over-tem perature of the digitizer/scan head.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-29

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

5.6.3

Dig_brd Tests The dig_brd menu has two sub-menus which check that the power and functions of the digitizer board are functioning correctly. Tabl able e 5.13 5.13 Dig Dig_br _brd d tests tests Test Name

basic /  function / 

Description

See Table 5.14 See Table 5.15

Basic Tests Menu Path Pat h  Elec/dig_brd/basic  Elec/dig_br d/basic Tabl able e 5.14 5.14 Bas Basic ic test tests s

Test Name

Test No.

Status

reset_digi power pll

29 30

Soakable Soakable Soakable

temp_status

31

Soakable

mode

110

Soakable

calibrate pipeline .. / 

32 33 -

Soakable Soakable User Exec

Description

Resets the digitizer circuits. Checks power supply to digitizer board. Checks synchronization synchronization of the PLL with the system clock. Checks the temperature limits and status bit to ensure they are within tolerances. Checks the serial link to the digitizer and also checks for a correct operation of the digitizer modes. Sets the offset between the two ADCs. Tests the data path from the digitizer. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit) .

5-30

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Function Tests Tests Menu Path  Elec/dig_brd/function  Elec/dig_br d/function Tabl able e 5.15 5.15 Fun Functi ction on tests tests Test Name

Test No.

Status

Description

reset_digi temp_sensor adc1_stuck adc2_stuck gain_offset

35 40 41 42

Soakable User Exec Soakable Soakable Soakable

Resets the digitizer circuits. Checks digitizer’s temperature sensor chip. Checks the adc1 to system bus operation. Checks the adc2 to system bus operation. Checks the dac gain and its offset response from the ADC circuit.

ratio red_gain_offset

36 43

Soakable Soakable

green_gain_offset

44

Soakable

blue_gain_offset

45

Soakable

linearity

37

Soakable

noise freerun diagdac offdac .. / 

39 34 72 71 -

Soakable User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec

Checks the gain ratio between the two ADCs. Checks the gain and offset for the red channel and also for any x-talk on the green and blue channels. Checks the gain and offset for the green channel and also for any x-talk on the red and blue channels. Checks the gain and offset for the blue channel and also for any x-talk on the red and green channels. Checks the ADC for its linearity response from the digitizer. Checks the noise level of the ADC. Factory utility for setting up the digitizer. Factory utility for setting up the digitizer. Factory utility for setting up the digitizer. Returns cursor to the previous menu (same as quit).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-31

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

5.7

Lamp Driver Board Tests 5.7.1

Introduction The lamp driver board contains the necessary circuitry to drive the 5 lamps in the system (one transmission, transmission, two reflection, and two light table lamps). The transmission and reflection lamps can be dimmed, and they also have optical detection circuitry to maintain a constant illumination, despite the effects of aging and variable temperature. These tests check the interfaces to the lamp driver board. They also check that the lamps light, and behave normally. The lamp driver board is diagnostically checked for the following: • Connected to power supply, • Power supply reaches a minimum limit, • Board is operating within its temperature range, • Interface to system board is working, • Transmission and reflection lamps will correctly light at

different dimmer levels, • All five lamps cannot be switched on at once.

5-32

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Lamp_brd Tests Tests Menu Path  Elec/lamp_brd   Elec/lamp_ brd  Table 5.16 5.16 lamp_ lamp_brd brd utilities utilities and tests tests Test No. No .

Status

Description

88 89 90 91 -

Soakable Soakable Soakable Soakable User Exec

-

User Exec User Exec

rx_off lt_on lt_off write_dac read_adc tx_check rx_check

92 93

User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec User Exec Soakable Soakable

Checks power supply to lamp driver board. Checks board temperature is within limits. Test to write a user defined value to the DAC. Checks operation of serial DAC loopback. Switches ON the transmission lamp. 12-bit hex values entered in DAC. Incorrect entry then defaults are taken. Switches OFF the transmission lamp. Switches ON the reflection lamps. 12-bit hex values entered in DAC. Incorrect entry then defaults are taken. Switches OFF the reflection lamps. Switches ON the light table lamps. Switches OFF the light table lamps. Writes a value to the DAC. Reads ADC for the selected channel. Checks operation of the transmission lamp. Checks operation of the reflection lamps.

all_lamps

94

Soakable

-

Soakable

Test Name

lamp_power board_temp check_dac dac_adc_loop tx_on tx_off rx_on

stress_tests / 

Switches ON all lamps and checks that both reflection lamps switch OFF. Runs tx_check and rx_check alternately with light table lamps on. Intended for use only in the stress chamber.

 Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the opto-mechanical interlocks are activated.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-33

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

5.8

Utilities 5.8.1

Introduction This section will allow the user to examine the state of the system sensors.

Utilities Menu Path  Elec/utils Tabl able e 5.17 5.17 Uti Utils ls menu menu Test Name

mtr_sens lmp_sens sys_sens

Description

Displays the status of the motors and sensors (see Figure 5.5). Displays the status of the lamps (see Figure 5.6). Displays the status of the system (see Figure 5.7).  Note: Ty Type pe control c  to  to exit the display.

Figure 5.5 5.5 Termin erminal al view of of the mtr_sens mtr_sens display display

5-34

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Figure 5.6 Termin erminal al view of the the lmp_sens lmp_sens display display

 

Figure 5.7 Termin erminal al view of the the sys_sens sys_sens display display

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-35

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

5.9

Optics Tests  Note: Optical tests should be only performed performed after the electronic electronic tests have been performed.

5.9.1

Introduction These tests check the optical components of the system to make sure they are functioning correctly. Unlike the electronic tests no single part of the optical system can be tested in isolation, so if  the service engineer finds a failure, a visual inspection will identify the cause.  Note: To avoid unusual problems problems make sure sure the optical components are free of dust and fingerprints.

Optics Menu Path  optics Tabl able e 5.18 5.18 Opti Optics cs test tests s Test Name

Test No. No .

Status

Description

diff_check

116

User Exec

Factory test for checking field curvature of lens at all resolutions. Diff_focus test target required.

tx_stability

96

User Exec

rx_stability

97

User Exec

Similar to rx_stability, rx_stability, but for the transmission lamp and its detector board. Tests the reflection lamps and their detector boards. Makes sure the illumination of the CCD image sensor is sustained at a fixed level for a five only.. minute period. For factory use only

tx_profile

112

Soakable

rx_profile

113

Soakable

ccd_noise

115

Soakable

Checks the uniformity of the transmission illumination of the CCD image sensor at two different resolutions. resolutions. Also checks for dirt in the white balance area of the platen. Similar to tx_profile, but for uniformity of the reflection illumination. Checks the status of CCD noise to make sure it is lower than the specified threshold.

5-36

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.10

Mechanical Te Tests  Note: Mechanical tests tests should be performed only only after the electronic tests have passed.

5.10.1

Introduction These tests check the mechanical assemblies assemblies for a correct operation. Each assembly consists of mechanical components (leadscrews, bearings etc.) and electrical/electronic components (motors, sensors etc.). In the event of a failure it is up to the service engineer to identify the failing component by a visual inspection. The lightbar, lid, and main cover must be fitted and closed before these tests are performed. Activated safety interlocks will prevent the operation of all motors, and the tests will abort. Tests on any of the interlocked mechanisms can fail if the safety interlocks are activated. The following states must exist for f or these sensors to be operable: • Main cover fitted at all times while the scanner is powered

up. • When the lightbar is fitted, the lid must be closed. • When the lightbar has been removed, the lid may be either

open or closed.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

5-37 

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

Mech Menu Path  Mech Table 5.19 Mecha Mechanical nical tests Test Name

Test No.

Status

focus_chk

83

Soakable

enlrg_chk

84

Soakable

x slide_chk

85

Soakable

carriage_chk

86

Soakable

leadscrew_chk

87

Soakable

endstop_chk

105

Soakable

life_test ess_test_menu /  service / 

102 -

User Exec Soakable User Exec

Description

Checks the focus motor control circuits to ensure the CCD mount can be correctly driven. Checks the enlargement motor control circuits to ensure the lens mount can be correctly driven. Checks the X-slide motor control circuits to ensure the X-slide carriage can be correctly driven. Checks the encoder and servo motor control circuits to ensure the main carriage can be correctly driven. Checks the servo motor torque and its leadscrew drag to ensure the main carriage can be precisely positioned. Checks the operation of the forward and reverse limit sensors to ensure the main carriage stops correctly. Not for Field use. Not for Field use.

To access the service sub-menu

5-38

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Terminal Diagnostic Diagnosticss

5.10.2

Service Menu This menu has three utilities for positioning the main carriage before performing a unit replacement procedure.

Service Menu Path  Mech/Service Tabl able e 5.20 5.20 Ser Servic vice e tests tests

Test Name

camera_service

Test No.

Status

107

User Exec

park

108

User Exec

transit_fixing

109

User Exec

Description

Moves the main carriage to the table lamps change position. Moves the main carriage to its park position. Moves all motors to their transit fixing positions

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Terminal Diagnosti Diagnostics cs

5-39

5-40

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

6

Alignments and Calibrations This chapter provides a detailed description of the setup test  menus, special alignments and field service calibrations.

6.1

Overview The C-550 Lanovia Scanner alignment and calibration procedures can be only performed once the systems have passed all terminal diagnostics tests (see Chapter 5). The alignment procedures have been provided to assist the service engineer in making certain mechanical adjustments to the scanning system. The calibration procedures record in non-volatile memory some of the characteristics of the CCD image sensor for later use by the system software.

Camera Alignment The alignment of the CCD mount to its lens mount is performed at the factory on a special rig.

 

Carriage Alignment This section explains the preparations and procedures for performing the two tasks.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-1

 

 Alignments and Calibrations

They are the: • light_bar  procedure. • diff_focus procedure.

System Calibration This section explains the preparations and procedures for performing the following tasks: • main carriage datum, • X-slide datum, • enlargement and focus calibration, • start of scan offsets, • bad pixel elimination, • copy holder registration edges calibration.

C-dot SP Calibrations This section describes the calibration procedures required when the scanner is to be used to scan images to be processed using the C-dot SP application application:: • Sharpness platen calibration for images up to a maximum size

of A4. This calibration must be run at 36 and 45 lines/mm resolution. • Swathe platen calibration for images up to a maximum size of 

A3, when running C scan with Sprint.  Note: If C-scan with Sprint is to be run, both of these calibrations must be performed.

6-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.2

Test Films

There are four types of test film, each having been designed to suit a particular procedure. • Lightbar Alignment Target (75524070), • Engineer’s Calibration Chart (75522450), (see Figure 6.1).

This includes: the Differential Focus Target, the System Calibration Target, including the Magnification bars and the Zig-zag Strip, the Bad Pixel Elimination Target, Clear area for Transmission White-balance, Position guides, Electronic Repro Target. ZIG-ZAG STRIP

POSITION GUIDES

ELECTRONIC REPRO TARGET BAD PIXEL ELIMINATION TARGET MAGNIFICATION BARS

 

CLEAR AREA FOR TRANSMISSION WHITE BALANCE

DIFFERENTIAL FOCUS TARGETS

SYSTEM CALIBRATION TARGET

Figure Figur e 6.1 Engine Engineer’s er’s Calibr Calibration ation Chart

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-3

 

 Alignments and Calibrations

• C-dot Scanner Calibration Target for sharpness calibration,

Part No. 7A002580. • Swathe Scanning Calibration Target, Part No. 7A013510.

Each film is viewed in transmission mode.

CAUTION  The emulsion side of the test films  can be easily scratched. A seriously  scratched film will cause the  calibration program to fail. Do not  bend the films.

6-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.3

Setup Introduction

Following the replacement of modules, Set-up procedures may have to be run.

6.3.1

Setup Menu Path  Main/Setup The setup menu has three sets of tests.

Table 6.1 Setup Menu Tests Test Name

scan-head carriage calibrate

Description

For factory use only See Table 6.2 See Table 6.3

 Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the scanner has developed any faults, or if the targets are dirty or poorly  positioned..  positioned

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-5

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.4

Carriage Alignment 6.4.1

Carriage Menu Introduction This section is concerned with two alignment procedures. procedures. They are the: • light_bar  alignment. • diff_focus alignment.

These alignment procedures are used to ensure the lightbar is aligned with the CCD camera, and that any differential focus errors are minimized minimized..

Carriage Tests Menu Path  Main/Setup/carriage  Main/Setup/ca rriage

Tabl able e 6.2 Car Carria riage ge tests tests Test Name

6.4.2

Test No.

Status

light_bar

103

User Exec

diff_focus

73

User Exec

Light_bar Alignment

Description

Checks the alignment of the lightbar with the ccd path. Checks for any misalignment between the main carriage and the CCD path.

This program is designed to analyse any variations to the path of  the scan head, to ensure the lightbar is correctly aligned. This test must be run before the diff_focus test. The lightbar should be re-aligned when the following occur: • a new or different lightbar is being fitted,

6-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

• the existing lightbar has been knocked and caused

misalignments (e.g. dark edges appear at the edges of the misalignments scan).

Lightbar Alignment Alignme nt Target Target  Note: In addition to the normal purchasing purchasing method, this target  target  can be obtained free by downloading a TIFF image from the internet and printing the file to film. The image is attached to a document on the Fujifilm private internal Web Server: Service Information Team / Service  Information Online Online / Tech Info Databsase Databsase / C-550 Lanovia Lanovia  / C-550 lightbar alignment target. target. The destination is  password  passwor d protected. protected.

This target is a thin strip of film with a ‘bow tie’ (e.g. two inwardly pointing triangles) symbol at each end.





Figure 6.2 Lightba Lightbarr alignment alignment target, target, 7552407 75524070 0

Each ‘bow tie’ () is aligned to the aperture of the lamp and is affixed with a suitable piece of adhesive tape to the circumference of the transmission lamp.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-7 

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

Figure 6.3 Align Alignment ment target target fitted fitted to the lightbar lightbar

Preparation To perform these precise adjustments, it is important that the preparation tasks are correctly completed before the alignment procedure is undertaken. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Rem Remov ovee the the ligh lightba tbarr assem assembly bly..

3. Place the lightb lightbar ar alignm alignment ent targe targett on the trans transmiss missionion-lamp lamp (see Figure 6.3). 4. Slack Slacken en the the four cap-h cap-head ead screws screws to to loosen loosen the the capture capture of of the interface plate to the reflection-colu reflection-column mn casting as shown in Figure 6.4.

6-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

CAP-HEAD SCREWS

Figure 6.4 6.4 Locati Location on of interface interface plate plate adjustment adjustment screws screws

5. ReRe-fit fit the lig lightb htbar ar ass assem embly bly.. 6. Cl Clo ose the li lid d. 7. Ensure Ensu re that that then the trans transmiss ion lamp lampdiagnostics has turned has turned (see off (wait off (wait if  necessary), run mission the terminal Section 5.4).

Alignment Procedure 1. Access setup/carriage menu.

 

2. Select th the light_bar  command.  Note: The program program recor records ds an alignment value for both sides of the lightbar.

3. Adju Adjust st the the position position of the the interfac interfacee plate plate (Figure (Figure 6.4) 6.4)..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-9

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

4. Repe Repeat at Steps Steps 2 and and 3 until until front front and rear rear of the the lightba lightbarr is within 10 points (with a maximum difference of 20) of its maximum reading.  Note: The typical maximum reading reading is 350 points.

5. Tighte Tighten n the two cap-h cap-head ead screws screws on the the open open side side of the the lightbar. 6. Rem Remov ovee the the ligh lightba tbarr assem assembly bly.. 7. Tigh ighten ten the the other other two two cap-h cap-head ead scre screws. ws. 8. ReRe-fit fit the lig lightb htbar ar ass assemb embly ly.. 9. Repe Repeat at Step Step 2 to confi confirm rm align alignmen mentt conform conformance ance.. 10. Remove the lightbar lightbar alignment target target from the transmission transmission lamp. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.4.3

Diff_Focus Alignment Differential focus adjustment adjustment involves the precise setting of the main carriage to correct any alignment errors between the scan head and the main carriage. The procedure used depends on the type of carriage fitted: • For a two wheel carriage, adjustment is made with the

differential focus bar. This is located on the front of the main carriage. It links the two wheel assemblies (see Figure 6.6). • For a one-wheel carriage, adjustment is made with the

adjusting screw mounted on the carriage-wheel mounting (see Figure 6.7). For both types the Engineer’s Calibration Chart, which includes the Differential Focus Targets, must be mounted on the platen. See Figure 6.5.

6-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

DIFFERENTIAL FOCUS TARGETS

Figure 6.5 Engin Engineer’ eer’s s Calibration Calibration Chart on platen

The following preparations must be made before adjusting this part of the scanner. 1. Open the li lid. 2. Place the Engin Engineer’ eer’ss Calibrati Calibration on Chart Chart on on the plat platen en (see (see Figure 6.5). 3. Cl Clo ose the li lid d.

Adjustment Procedure for Two-wheel Carriage 1. Access the diff_focus test program. e.g. setup/carriage 2. Run the diff_focus test.

 

3. Read and note note the the test test result result (max (maximum imum error perm permitted itted is 2.5). 4. Access the mech/service menu. 5. Run the camera_service program to position the main carriage at the left-hand end (reverse) its traverse range.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-11

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6. Opera Operate te the the standby standby switch switch to isolate isolate power power to to the scanne scannerr. 7. Rem Remov ovee the the ligh lightba tbarr assem assembly bly.. 8. Op Open en th thee mai main n co cove verr.

WARNING  Do not override the safety interlocks. 9. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

CAUTION  The differential focus bar must not  be adjusted while the nut clamp plate is still tight on the main leadscrew. 10. Release the the main leadscrew-nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1). 11. Release locking locking grub-screw in each wheel pivot pivot nut. 12. Adjust the differential differential bar, bar, by the number of turns reported in Step 3 (Figure 6.6).  Note: One full turn of the differential differential focus bar is equal to 1 mrad. A clockwise direction makes the reading more negative and a counterclockwise direction makes the reading more positive.

6-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

MORE POSITIVE

LOCKING GRUB-SCREW

MORE NEGATIVE

Figure Fig ure 6.6 6.6 Dif Differ ferent ential ial focus focus bar bar

13. Lock the locking locking grub screws in each wheel pivot pivot nut. 14. Lock the main leadscrew leadscrew nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).  Note: The clamp screw screw should be tightened one full turn beyond the point when the thread was first engaged.

15. Re-fit the light-table light-table assembly assembly (see Section 4.16). 4.16). 16. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ). 17. Re-fit the lightbar assembly assembly.. 18. Clo Close se the the lid. lid. 19. Operate the standby standby switch to power up the the scanner. scanner. 20. Note any logged logged reports about the module module status. status. 21.. Run 21 Run mech/carriage test to ensure that no problems have been introduced.

 

22. Repeat Steps Steps 1. to to 20. until the the diff_focus errors have been minimized. 23. Remove the engineer’ engineer’ss calibration chart chart from the platen. platen.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-13

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

Adjustment Procedure for One-wheel Carriage 1. Access the diff_focus test program. e.g. setup/carriage 2. Run the diff_focus test. 3. Read and note note the the test test result result (max (maximum imum error perm permitted itted is 2.5). 4. Access the mech/service menu. 5. Run the camera_service program to position the main carriage at the left-hand end (reverse) its traverse range. 6. Opera Operate te the stand standby by switch switch to to isolate isolate power power to to the scanne scannerr. 7. Rem Remov ovee the the ligh lightba tbarr assem assembly bly.. 8. Op Open en th thee mai main n co cove verr.

WARNING  Do not override the safety interlocks. 9. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

CAUTION  The adjusting screw must not be  adjusted while the nut clamp plate is  still tight on the main leadscrew. leadscrew. 10. Release the the main leadscrew-nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).

11. Release lock nut on the the adjusting adjusting screw. screw. 12. Turn the adjusting screw by the number number of turns reported reported in Step 3 (see Figure 6.7).

6-14

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

 Note: One full turn of the adjusting screw screw is equal to 1 mrad. A clockwise direction makes the reading more negative and a counterclockwise direction makes the reading more positive.

ADJUSTING SCREW MORE NEGATIVE

MORE POSITIVE

 

Figure Fig ure 6.7 Adj Adjust usting ing scr screw ew

13. Tigh Tighten ten the lock nut on on the adjusting screw screw..

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-15

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

14. Lock the main leadscrew leadscrew nut clamp-plate (see Section 4.19.1).  Note: The clamp screw screw should be tightened one full turn beyond the point when the thread was first engaged.

15. Re-fit the light-table light-table assembly assembly (see Section 4.16). 4.16). 16. Close the main main cover (see (see Section 4.11 4.11). ). 17. Re-fit the lightbar assembly assembly.. 18. Clo Close se the the lid. lid. 19. Operate the standby standby switch to power up the the scanner. scanner. 20. Note any logged logged reports about the module module status. status. 21.. Ru 21 Run n mech/carriage test to ensure that no problems have been introduced. 22. Repeat Steps Steps 1. to to 20. until the the diff_focus errors have been minimized. 23. Remove the engineer’ engineer’ss calibration chart chart from the platen. platen. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6-16

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.5

System Calibration 6.5.1

Cali lib brate Menu Introduction System diagnostics and alignment procedures must be complete before any calibration process is performed. The platen area must be clean, the lightbar fitted, the system calibration test target positioned correctly, and the lid closed.  Note: If a test result fails, re-check re-check the target target for cleanliness, scratches and its placement on the platen. Also check that  the platen, transmission white-balance area and mirror  are clean.

This software consists of procedures to calibrate the following items: • Carriage and X-slide datum. • Enlargement focus positions, and chromatic aberration.

 Note: These position calibrations calibrations are dependent dependent on completion of the carriage and X-slide datum calibrations. • Start of scan offsets.

 Note: These offset calibrations are are dependent on completion completion of the focus and enlargment calibrations. • Bad (CCD) pixel mapping. • Copy-hold Copy-holder er registration-ed registration-edges ges calibration.

 Note: The calibration of the registration registration edges edges is dependent  upon completion of the enlargement and focus calibration.

 

Each procedure writes its findings to the system calibration log. Invoking all will automaticall automatically y run the complete calibration processes sequentially except for the copyholder registration (which requires the engineer’s calibration chart to be removed from the platen) and bad-pixel mapping.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-17 

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

Calibrate Tests Menu Path  Main/Setup/calibrate  Main/Setup/ca librate Tabl able e 6.3 Cal Calibr ibrate ate test tests s Test Name

Test No.

Status

carriage xslide enlargement

67 69 68

User Exec User Exec User Exec

offsets all

70 -

User Exec User Exec

bad_pix

-

User Exec

max_bad add_bad

-

No User Exec

remove_bad

-

User Exec

copyholder

-

Remote

copy_enable

-

Remote

copy_disable cal_ccd pos_coeffs neg_coeffs wafer size

-

Remote No No No User Exec

Description

Main carriage datum position calibrated X-slide carriage datum position calibrated. Datum positions for the lens mount and ccd mount are calibrated Start-of-scan offsets calibrated. All of the above tests are composited into an automatic calibration program. Bad pixels identified and mapped for elimination For Factory use only Manually add a specified pixel to the bad pixel map. For factory use only. Manually remove a specified pixel from the bad pixel map. For factory use only. Sets the position of the registration r egistration bars. Can also be performed from the Calibrate top-level Application Diagnostics menu, see Section 6.5.9. Enables a search for copyholders each time the scanner lid is closed. Can also be performed the Calibrate Applicationfrom Diagnostics menu,top-level see Section 6.5.10. As copy_enable but disables the search. For Factory use only For Factory use only For Factory use only Specifies the CCDs wafer size. See information below.

 Note: Some of the above tests will fail if the safety interlocks are are activated.

CCD data is stored in FLASH. The wafer size depends on the type of CCD in use and must be setup accordingly: • 4 inch wafer CCDs:

wafer_size must be set to 4, 6-18

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

• 6 inch wafer CCDs:

wafer_size must be set to 6. System software Version 1.2 or higher is required to support 6 inch CCDs.

If a field replacement of the system board, system board PROMs or the X-slide carriage is performed, or new firmware is installed, the CCD settings are affected as follows: • If new firmware is downloaded and this is the only change,

then there is no need to set up the CCD parameters as they will remain unchanged. • If new PROMs are fitted or the system board or X-slide

carriage are replaced, then the data must be updated as described in the appropriate replacement procedures. procedures.

6.5 .5..2

Syst steem Ca Cali lib bra rati tio on Targ rgeet Ar Areeas These target areas are included in the engineer’s calibration chart as shown in Figure 6.1. The chart is placed on the platen at the right-hand edge of the glass abutting to the transmission white-balance area as shown in Figure 6.8.

6.5.3

Main Carriage Datum This procedure determines the position of the main-carriage datum sensors.

 

Procedure 1. Type carriage at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return].

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-19

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

3. Wait for for the resul resultt of the the calibra calibration tion proc procedur edure. e. ZIG-ZAG STRIP

MAGNIFICATION BARS

SYSTEM CALIBRATION TARGET Figure Figur e 6.8 Place Placement ment of Engineer’ Engineer’s s Calibratio Calibration n Chart

The calibration is now complete. The calibration data, which is in the Flash memory, should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.4

X-slide Carriage Da Datum This procedure determines the position of the X-slide datum sensor.

Procedure 1. Type xslide at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return].

6-20

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

3. Wait for for the resul resultt of the the calibra calibration tion proc procedur edure. e. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.5

Enlargement & Focus Ca Calibratio ion n This procedure builds a table of chromatic aberration, enlargement-motor position, and default focus-motor position for each supported optical resolution.  Note: This calibration procedur proceduree will take about 30 minutes to complete.

Procedure 1. Type enlargement at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for for the resu result lt of the the calibr calibration ation proc procedur edure. e. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.6

Start of Scan Offsets This procedure builds a table of (x,y) positioning errors for each

 

supported optical resolution resolution at a number of X-slide carriage positions.

Procedure 1. Type offsets at the cursor position.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-21

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for for the resu result lt of the the calibr calibration ation proc procedur edure. e. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.7

Bad (C (CCD) Pi Pixel El Elimination Some pixels perform worse than others. This procedure detects those bad pixels which must be eliminated to diminish their effect on the quality of the scan.  Note: It is not recommended recommended that this procedur proceduree is used when replacing the X-slide carriage. Factory-determined  bad-pixel location data will be supplied on a floppy disk  which comes with the carriage.

Procedure 1. Type ccd at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for for the resu result lt of the the calibr calibration ation proc procedur edure. e. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.8

All This procedure, with the exception of the copyholder registration edge calibration procedure, will sequentially process each of the other calibration procedures.  Note: Do not use this procedur proceduree unless the engineer’s engineer’s calibration chart is available.

6-22

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

Procedure 1. Type all at the cursor position. 2. Press [Return]. 3. Wait for for the resu result lt of the the calibr calibration ation proc procedur edure. e. The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5.9

Registration Bar Calibration This calibration procedure is only required for installations where copymounts or copyholders are to be used.

SHORT REGISTRATION BAR

C-SCAN LONG REGISTRATION BAR FOR USE WITH COPYHOLDERS

EARLY C-SCAN LONG REGISTRATION BAR DO NOT USE FOR THIS CALIBRATION

Figure Fig ure 6.9 6.9 Reg Regist istrat ration ion bars bars

 

1. Position Position the regis registrati tration on bars bars on the the platen platen,, locating locating the the lugs lugs on the base of the bars in the holes provided. Ensure that the area underneath the window in the short registration bar is clean. See the following drawing.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-23

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

WINDOW

Figure Figur e 6.10 Fitting regis registratio tration n bars to platen platen

2. To take take up the the free free play play in locatin locating g holes, holes, push push the bars bars outwards from the platen centre, in the direction of the arrows as shown above. 3. Cl Clos osee th thee top top li lid. d. 4. Locate th the Diagnostics application in the C-scan / C-scan Plus folder and double-click it to start the launch.

6-24

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

5. Ope Open n the the Dia Diagno gnosti stics cs fol folder der..

6. Open the Mac folder and select Diagnostics. The Diagnostics application opens.

7. From the Calibrate menu, choose Run.

8. The Scann Scanner er Calib Calibratio rations ns windo windows ws appear appears. s. Click Click the

 

8. The Scann Scanner er Calib Calibratio rations ns windo windows ws appear appears. s. Click Click the Calibrate option to expand the display.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-25

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

9. Select th the copyholder option. Note that you cannot use the Select button to select this option, you must click the menu entry, copyholder.

10.. Cl 10 Clic ick k OK to complete the selection.

11. The Scanner Calibration Calibration window window appears. If the the scanner is not already selected, select the Scanner on ID.... box for the scanner to be calibrated.

12. Click the Clapper Clapper Board icon icon to start the the calibration. calibration.

6-26

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

During the calibration the message next to the selected scanner displays Running . When completed successfully the message displays Passed. If the calibration fails: a) Clean Clean the area of of the platen platen und under er the wind window ow in the short short register bar. Also check that the window area is unobstructed. b) Chec Check k that that the regi register ster bars bars are are correctl correctly y installe installed. d. c) Repe Repeat at the calib calibratio ration n by clicki clicking ng the the Clapper Clapper Board Board icon. icon. d) If the calib calibratio ration n fails agai again, n, contact contact your your vendor vendor.. 13. When the procedure procedure is successfully successfully completed, completed, click the the Hand icon to close the window.

14. Quit the Diagnostics Diagnostics application. application. The scanner scanner will reboot reboot automatically.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-27 

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6.5. 6. 5.10 10

Copy Co pyho hold lder er Se Sear arch ch En Enab able le/D /Dis isab able le When using copyholders it is necessary to perform a search for copyholders copyholde rs mounted on the platen. This search is performed each time the scanner lid is closed. If copyholders are not used there is no reason for this scan and the search function can be disabled. The function can be switched from the Terminal Diagnostics or from the top-level menu of the Application Diagnostics. To enable or disable copyholders using the Application Diagnostics, follow the procedure described in the previous section, but when the test selection is made choose copy_enable or copy_disable, as required.

Note that the scanner will not respond to the change in status until it has been rebooted.

6-28

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.6

C-dot SP Calibrations If the customer intends using C-dot SP to process C-dot images captured on a C-550 Lanovia scanner it will be necessary to perform two sharpness calibration procedures, using the C-dot Scanner Calibration Target. The purpose of these calibrations is to ensure that the sharpness of images captured is uniform across the X-direction width of the scanner. The calibrations are run at resolutions of 36 lines/mm and 45 lines/mm. See Sections 6.6.1 and 6.6.2. You also need to perform the swathe-scanning calibration procedure. This procedure ensures accurate stitching of images when the image width exceeds 220 mm. See Section 6.6.3.

6.6. 6. 6.1 1

C-dott Pl C-do Plat aten en Ca Cali libr brat atio ion n fo forr Sh Shar arpn pnes esss at 36 Lines/mm  Note: This calibration is required required once once only unless certain certain replacements have been performed. It will be necessary to repeat the calibration if the camera is replaced. It will also be necessary if the system board is replaced and the calibration data has not been saved.

Before you start: • Locate the test target. This is supplied in the upgrade pack. • The scanner firmware must be Version 3.0 or later. • The workstation diagnostics must be Version 3.2 or later. • Ensure that the transmission lamp is warmed up for about

 

5 minutes before the calibration is started. To perform the calibration: 1. Locat Locatee the the short short regis registrati tration on bar on the the platen platen.. 2. Place tbutts he C-dot C-d ot Scanner Scathe nnershort Calibratio Calibr ation n Tar Target get the platen the plathat ten so that it the against registration bar.onEnsure the grey panel covers the whole of the platen height.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-29

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

TOP

   A    E    R    A    E    C    N    A    L    A    B    E    T    I    H    W

C-DOT SCANNER CALIBRATION TARGET

SHORT REGISTRATION BAR

BOTTOM

Figure 6.1 6.11 1 C-dot scanner scanner calibrat calibration ion target target on platen

3. Place the A3 A3 cover cover glass glass over over the the targe target. t. (If you you attempt attempt to perform this procedure without the short registration bar in place, you must ensure that the cover glass and target do not cover the white balance area.) 4. Open the the C-scan C-scan applica application tion fold folder er on the the Macintosh Macintosh attac attached hed to the scanner.

6-30

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

5. Ope Open n the the Dia Diagno gnosti stics cs fol folder der.. 6. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears as shown below.

7. Fr From om th thee top top-l -lev evel el Calibrate menu, choose Run.

The Scanner Calibrations window appears.

 

8. Click Copydot  to select the copydot menu.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

9. Click Scanner36 to select the option.

10.. Cl 10 Clic ick k OK to display the Scanner Calibration window.

6-31

6-32

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

11. Ensure that the the appropriate appropriate Scanner ID has has been selected. selected. Click the appropriate box if required.

12. Click the Clapper Clapper Board icon icon to start the the calibration. calibration.

13. Click the Stop icon to close the Scanner Calibration Calibration window window.

The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be

 

saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-33

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.6. 6. 6.2 2

CC-do t Pl Plat aten en Ca Cali libr brat atio ion n fo forr Sh Shar arpn pnes esss at 45 dot Lines/mm This procedure is identical to that described in the previous section, except that you need to choose scanner45 from the copydot menu in the Scanner calibrations window.

6.6.3

Swathe Scanning Calibration  Note: This calibration is required required once once only unless certain certain replacements have been performed. It will be necessary to repeat the calibration if the camera is replaced or the  X-slide datum calibration calibration has been performed. It will also be necessarydata if the system board is replaced and the calibration has not been saved.

Before you start: • Locate the test target. This is supplied in the upgrade pack. • The scanner firmware must be Version 3.0 or later.

The workstation diagnostics must be Version 3.2 or later. • Ensure that the transmission lamp is warmed up for about

5 minutes before the calibration is started. To perform the calibration: 1. Locat Locatee the the short short regis registrati tration on bar on the the platen platen..

6-34

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

2. Place the the Swathe Swathe Scanni Scanning ng Calibrat Calibration ion Tar Target get on the the platen: platen: • ensure that the black lines are against the top and left

edges of the platen, just touching the black platen surround, • ensure that the test target does not cover the transmission

white-balance area, • also ensure that the text is right reading as viewed from

above.

BLACK LINES

SHORT REGISTRATION BAR

SWATHE SCANNING CALIBRATION TARGET

Figure 6.12 6.12 Swathe scannin scanning g calibration calibration target target on platen platen

3. Place the A3 A3 cover cover glass glass over over the the targe target. t. (If you you attempt attempt to perform this procedure without the short registration bar in place, you must ensure that the cover glass and target do not

 

cover the white balance area.) 4. Open the the C-scan C-scan applica application tion fold folder er on the the Macintosh Macintosh attac attached hed to the scanner.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

5. Ope Open n the the Dia Diagno gnosti stics cs fol folder der.. 6. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears as shown below.

7. Fr From om th thee top top-l -lev evel el Calibrate menu, choose Run.

6-35

6-36

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

The Scanner Calibrations window appears.

8. Click Copydot  to select the copydot menu.

 

9. Click platen to select the option.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

10.. Cl 10 Clic ick k OK to display the Scanner Calibration window.

11. Ensure that the the appropriate Scanner ID has has been selected. selected. Click the appropriate box if required.

6-37 

12. Click the Clapper Clapper Board icon icon to start the the calibration. calibration.

6-38

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

During the calibration the message next to the selected scanner displays Running . When completed successfully, the message displays Passed. If the calibration fails: a) Ch Check eck the po posit sition ion on the pla platen ten:: Are all the arrows just touching the edge of the platen and not under or overlapping the platen edge? Are both cross-hairs exactly 175 mm from the top edge of  the platen? If the target is skewed the calibration will fail.

175 mm

CROSS-HAIRS

Figure 6.13 6.13 Swathe scanning scanning calibra calibration tion target target on platen showing showing cross-hairs

b) Clean the area area of the the platen platen under under the the window window in the the short short

 

registration bar. c) Check Check that that this area is is unobstr unobstructed ucted by either either the the film film or the cover glass. d) Chec Check k that that the A3 A3 cover cover glass glass is scrup scrupulou ulously sly clean, clean, especially the area of glass covering the pattered area of  the target. e) Repe Repeat at the calib calibratio ration n by clicki clicking ng the the Clapper Clapper Board Board icon. icon.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-39

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

f) If the the calib calibratio ration n fails fails agai again, n, conta contact ct your your vend vendor or.. 13. Click the Stop icon to close the Scanner Calibration Calibration window window.

The calibration is now complete. The calibration data should be saved to a secure location. This procedure is described in Section 6.7.

6-40

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6.7

Saving Ca Calibration Data to a Secure Lo Locati tio on Data from calibrations is held on the system board. Should the system board fail this data will be lost and the recovery time will be delayed while all calibrations are repeated. To minimize the effect of such a failure it is recommended that the calibration file is copied to a secure location such as a Macintosh or a remote disk. 1. Choose Read Buffer from the Buffers menu.

2. In the ‘Save As’ windo window w, enter enter the name name of of the destin destinatio ation n file, (cal file for example) and specify an appropriate destination.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

6-41

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

3. Click Save.

The Read Buffer window opens with Calibration  selected by default in the Buffer ID menu.

4. Selec Selectt the the scan scanner ner,, if not alrea already dy selec selected. ted. 5. Click the Clappe Clapperr Board Board icon to to start readi reading ng the the buffer buffer data. data.

The calibration file in the destination folder is updated.

6-42

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6. Click the the Stop Stop icon icon to clos closee the Read Read Buff Buffers ers windo window w.

7. Select Quit from the File menu to exit the diagnostics.

 

8. For added added security secur itythe it isscanner recommende recomm ended d that thatthe if the th e calibrat cali bration ion file was copied to Macintosh file should also be copied to a floppy disk and stored in a safe place away from the scanner.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

 Alignments and Calibrations Calibrations

6-43

6-44

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

7

Workstation Diagnostics This chapter provides descriptions and procedures for using the workstation diagnostics.

7.1

Introduction The workstation diagnostics are used by both the customer and the field service engineer. Diagnostic operations are controlled by software loaded on a workstation connected by a single-ended SCSI cable to the C-550 Lanovia Scanner. The workstation has integrated diagnostic software for many of  the maintenance functions of the scanner.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

7.2

Launching th the Di Diagnostics Ap Application 1. Ope Open n the the C-scan C-scan app applic licati ation on folde folderr.

2. Ope Open n the the Dia Diagn gnos ostic ticss fold folder er..

3. Open the Diagnostics application. The tool bar appears as shown below.

7-1

7-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

Up to seven scanner log boxes appear as shown below.

The diagnostic tests allow up to seven C-550 Lanovia scanners to be tested simultaneously. Each scanner log box will display the test results for each scanner whose SCSI ID appears in the window’s title bar. For example, Scanner 0 log box will display the test results for the scanner whose SCSI ID is 0.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-3

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

7.3

Workstation Diagnostics Menus     You can select the following sub-menus from the top-level menu.

7.3.1

File Menu

Save As Select this option to save and name a copy of the active scanner log box. Use a non-default filename.

Print Select this to print a selected log file.

7-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

Print Preview Select this to display a selected log file in print-out format.

Print Setup Selects a printer and printer connection connection..

Verbose Select to obtain detailed error messages in the scanner log box.

Temperature Readings Adds the scanner temperature reading to any error message received from one of the diagnostics tests.

Clear Logs Clears all text from all of the error logs. It also adds a time stamp to each of the newly created files.

Quit

 

Select this to exit the C-550 Lanovia Workstation Diagnostics.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-5

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

7.3.2

View menu

The View menu allows you to show or hide the toolbar and the status bar. When selected, the Toolbar appears at the top of the screen. It has icon buttons for most of the common diagnostics commands. For more information on the Toolbar, see Section 7.4. When selected, the Status bar appears at the bottom of the screen. It describes the purpose of a selected option and also how much time has elapsed during a test.

7.3.3

Window Menu

The Window menu offers the following commands, which enable you to arrange multiple views of multiple documents in the application window.

7-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

Arrange Icons This option has no effect in the Macintosh environment.

Scanner 0 - 6 The C-550 Lanovia Diagnostics displays a list of the scanner log windows at the bottom of the Window menu. A check mark appears in front of the document name of the active window. Choose a log from the list to make its window active.

7.3.4

Configuration Menu

 

The Configuration menu allows you to interrogate a scanner that is connected to the SCSI bus.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Rescan Select this option to make the system check all seven SCSI addresses for the presence of a C-550 Lanovia scanner. [F9] on the keyboard also selects this function.

Scanner 0 - 6

Each of the Scanner options access the following sub-menus:

Details Obtains information about about the scanner at this SCSI ID.

7-7 

7-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-9

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Carriage Positions

Locates the main carriage and scan head in certain pre-defined positions. • Park

This moves the main carriage to its right-hand (datum) position. (This is its normal position when not scanning.) This position is required when changing the reflection lamp. • Camera service

This moves the main carriage to its left-hand position. position. This position is required when changing the light-table lamp. • Transit fixing

This moves the main carriage to its central position to allow for the removal or replacement of certain transit fixings.

7-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

7.3.5

Buffers Menu

The scanner has a number of buffer areas that can be downloaded from, or uploaded to, the workstation workstation.. The scanner application system code will require updating as new releases are generated and issued to customers. These updates are normally performed by the customer. The relevant information for these activities is available in the User’s Guide. However, there are other buffer areas of the system that may be needed by the service engineer. These can be: • uploaded from the system board to the workstation, or • downloaded from the workstation to the system board.

Uploading/downloading operations are performed using commands available from the Buffers menu.

Load Code Use this command to open the Download Code dialog box  which is used to download a new release of the scanner application system, or boot system, to the assigned place in the scanner’s

 

memory. The software download procedure is described in Section 7.7.

Write Buffer Use to open the Write Buffer dialog box. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for details about the content of each type of SCSI buffer.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-11

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

CAUTION  To maintain system integrity, some SCSI buffers cannot be overwritten with the Write Buffer  command.  command. This option allows data such as the Calibration File to be written to the scanner after the system board is replaced. To write calibration data to a scanner: 1. Choose Write Buffer from the Buffers menu.

2. A directory directory dialog dialog box appea appears rs which which allows allows the the selection selection of  of  the file which is to be written to a scanner.

7-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

3. Click Open . The Write Buffer dialog box opens.

4. In the the Write Write Buff Buffer er dialog dialog box, box, check check a box in the the Selected Scanners display to select the destination scanner. 5. Choos Choosee the appr approp opria riate te buff buffer er ident identity ity (Calibration  in this example) from the Buffer ID menu. 6. Cl Clic ick k the the Go bu butt tton on..

 

When the file has been written to the scanner a Complete message will appear to the right of the selected checkbox in the Selected Scanners display. 7. Exi Exitt by clic clickin king g the the Stop Stop too tooll butto button. n.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-13

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Read Buffer Use to open the Read Buffer dialog box. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for details about the content of each type of SCSI buffer. This option allows data such as Calibration File data to be saved so that it can quickly be re-installed, when the system board is replaced, for example. Unless Calibration data is saved before the system board is removed the data will be lost. It is recommended that this data be saved to disk during installation, as a security measure. To save Calibration file data: 1. Choose Read Buffer from the Buffers menu.

7-14

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

 Note: The destination of the Calibration Calibration file is selected  automatically.

2. In the Save as box, enter a file name for the Calibration file you are to save. It is suggested that you use the naming convention: # cal file.

 

3. Click Save. The Read Buffer dialog box opens.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-15

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

4. Choos Choosee the Buf Buffer fer dat dataa type type from from the Buffer ID menu, (Calibration  in this case). 5. In the Selected Scanners display, check the box next to the the scanner from which you are saving the the data. 6. Cl Clic ick k the the Go bu butt tton on..

When the file has been saved a Complete message will appear to the right of the selected checkbox in the Selected Scanners display. 7. Exi Exitt by clic clickin king g the the Stop Stop too tooll butto button. n.

7-16

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

It is recommended that this file is copied to floppy disk and that the disk stored in a safe place. The Calibration file will be found in the C-scan 3.1 ⇒ Diagnostics ⇒ C-550 Lanovia ⇒ Mac folder. It can be read using BBEdit.

7.3.6

SCSI Buffers The identities of the SCSI buffers are shown in Table 7.1.

Scanner Application System Contains the scanning application and diagnostics system code. The scanner application system buffer can be only updated choosing Load Code from the Buffers menu.

DRAM Area Accesses the DRAM area on the system board.

 

Boot System Runs the initial Power On Self-Tests (POSTs). On a successful completion, completion, the scanner application system is validated and if OK, is run. The boot system exists, to allow SCSI downloads to take place even if there is no valid scanner application system in the flash f lash memory.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-17 

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

The boot system buffer be only updated using the from the can  menu. Loadscanner Code command Buffers

Table 7.1 7.1 SCSI Buffer identi identities ties

ID #

Description

Access

Type

Location

0 1 2 3 4

Scanner application system. Not Used. DRAM area. Boot system. Not Used.

Read Read/Write Read -

Binary Binary Binary -

Flash DRAM Flash -

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Not Used. Not Used. Not Used. Calibration data. Reserved. Scanner application system log. Diagnostics FLASH log. Diagnostics RAM log. Not Used. Not Used. Not Used. Scripts buffer.

Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write

Text Text Text Text Text

Flash Flash Flash DRAM Flash

17 18 19 20 21

Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Statistical data.

Read/Write

Text

Flash

Calibration Data Contains all data generated from running the calibration procedures described in Chapter 6. The data can be read using a simple text editor, such as simple text (Macintosh), or Notepad (PC).

7-18

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

 Note:  Macintosh This must be saved on yinstallation to store stor on the and a floppy flopp disk, as it will beere requir quired ed if the system board is changed.

CAUTION  Corrupting the calibration data will   seriously affect the scanner’s scanner’s ability  to work to its specification.

Scanner Application System Log Information on all detected errors, or system crashes, can be found in this buffer. This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-line analysis. The data can be read using a simple text editor.

Diagnostics FLASH Log During terminal diagnostics, diagnostics, the output can be directed to a FLASH log using the flog  command. This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-line analysis.

 

The data can be read using a simple text editor.

Diagnostics RAM Log During terminal diagnostics, the output can be directed to a RAM log using the rlog command.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-19

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

This information can be uploaded to the workstation for off-line analysis. The data can be read using a simple text editor.

Scripts Buffer This buffer contains all system scripts. Scripts are used to combine individual tests into a composite test to more fully exercise the scanner. As an alternative to generating scripts directly on the scanner scripts can be uploaded to the workstation, edited, and downloaded back to the scanner for execution. The data can be read using a simple text editor.

CAUTION  When creating scripts, avoid using  the name ST STARTUP ARTUP.. The startup  script, if present, is run as part of the  scanner application system  power-up sequence.

Statistical Data

Contains statistical information about the system. This data can be uploaded to the workstation for future analysis.

7-20

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

7.3.7

Tests Menu

The Tests menu allows you to select either the diagnostic tests, the electronic repro tests, or soak tests.

Diagnostic Tests (Ctrl+T)

Use to run the available tests on the specified scanner. • Run:

This opens the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box which allows you to select the scanner(s), connected to the SCSI bus, on which to run the diagnostic tests. The use of the Run function is described in Section 7.5. • Select:

This option allows specific tests to be selected from the elec,

 

mech and optics menus.

Choose the Diagnostic Tests to run on the scanner. • Fast Keys:

This opens the Fast Keys dialogue box.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-21

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

The Fast Keys dialogue box allows you to run a user defined suite of tests by simply pressing the appropriate function key. You select the diagnostic tests you want performed in the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box in Select mode, click Save to open the Fast Keys dialogue box, click an F key tab which can be either [F5], [F6], [F7] or [F8], enter a description in the blank field to identify the tests, and click OK. To view a suite of tests allocated to a Function key, click the F key tab and click Tests. The Diagnostic Tests dialogue box appears showing the enabled and the disabled tests. Default [F5] settings select a suitable range of customer tests which are needed to prove the functionality of the scanner.

7-22

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

Electronic Repro (Ctrl+R)

Use to run the available tests on the specified scanner(s). • Run:

This opens the Repro Tests dialogue box which allows you to run the Electronic Repro tests. For more information on running Repro Tests, see Section 7.6. • Display:

This displays the Display Image dialogue box which allows you to locate and display the electronic repro test image which you have scanned on the C-550 Lanovia scanner.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-23

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Use to get a simple view of the image on disk, by clicking the mouse button. • Disk Image:

This is a toggle option. Select this option if you want to view the results from the previous Electronic Repro Test. • Limits :

Shows the installed limits for the electronic repro test. In released software this will always show Customer Settings as being selected and cannot be changed.

Soak Tests Tests (Ctrl+S) (Ctr l+S)

Selecting Soak ⇒ Run displays the Soak Tests dialogue box. This allows you to select the scanner(s), connected to the SCSI bus, on which to run tests which include both Diagnostic and Electronic Repro tests.

7-24

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

The Calib. Slide box must be unchecked when performing Electronic Repro tests using the Repro Test transparency but checked when using the Engineer’s Calibration Chart, otherwise the wrong area of the platen will be scanned.

 

7.3.8

Calibrate Menu

The Calibrate option allows the location of register bars on the platen to be set up and the copyholder search function to be enabled or disabled. These functions are described in Sections 6.5.9 and 6.5.10 respectively. C-dot calibrations are also

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

accessed from this menu. These procedures are described in Section 6.6.

7-25

7-26

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

7.4

Tool Bar Buttons

Click on this to open the Print dialogue box. The Print dialogue box is also opened by selecting Print from the File menu. Click to toggle Verbose on or off.

Click to toggle temperature readings in the Scanner Log on or off.

Click on this to open the Diagnostic Tests dialogue box.

Click on this to open the Repro Tests dialogue box.

Click on this icon to open the Soak Tests dialogue box.

Clicking on this icon opens a file selection menu which allows a Code file to be selected for downloading to the scanner. This procedure is described in Section 7.7. Incorrect use could make the scanner inoperable and require a service visit.

 

Click on this icon to display the copyright notice and version number of your C-550 Lanovia diagnostics. Click on this icon if you want information to be displayed about a function. The cursor changes to an arrow and a question mark. When you move the cursorinformation to a function and the click, a Help window opens containing about function. Double-click on this icon to display information about this function.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

7.5

Diagnostic Tests Select Diagnostic Tests - Run in the Tests menu.

The Diagnostic Tests dialogue box appears.

7-27 

Check the box next to the scanner on which you want to run the tests. Double click anywhere on the background of the Diagnostics Tests window to put a marker in the Log box.

7-28

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

[F5] to of Press select range ofThe customer tests which will prove the functionality the ascanner. gives an indication Tests slider of the number of tests selected.

Specify the number of times you want the tests to be repeated by typing a value in the Loop 0 of field. You can enter a value up to 999. If you do not want the tests to stop when an error occurs, uncheck  Stop on Error. To start the tests, click:

To stop the tests at any time, click:

A slider moves to the right as the tests progress, status messages appear in the Selected Scanners panel next to the selected

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-29

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

scanner, the name of the current test being performed appears below theand slider.

It takes approximately thirty minutes to perform all of the diagnostic tests. If any errors occur, messages appear in the scanner log box. To remove the error messages in a scanner log box, double-click  within the scanner log box to display the following confirmation box.

Click Yes to remove all error messages in the scanner log box.

7-30

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

7.6

Electronic Repro Tests The Electronic Repro set of tests are used to validate scanning performance. Before proceeding with the Electronic Repro tests, ensure that the condition of the scanner has been set up correctly: • Perform the electronic, mechanical and optical tests,

described in Chapter 5, and obtain a pass result. procedures, described • Then, perform the relevant alignment procedures, in Chapter 6. The tests check a number of parameters to ensure that the: • rotation mechanism and defined resolutions are accurate, • degree of chromatic aberration, flare and jitter are acceptable, • and the image signal levels, coming from the camera head,

are consistent and accurate. If a Electronic Repro test fails, then performance of the Terminal Diagnostic tests will be necessary to establish the correction strategy. (See Chapter 5.)

7.6 .6..1

Ele lecctr tro onic Re Rep pro Test Su Sub bje jeccts The Electronic Repro tests require a test subject to be mounted on the platen. The subject is provided in two forms: • The Electronic Repro Transparency is designed specifically

 

for the Electronic Repro test (see Figure 7.1). It is to be left with the customer after installation so that they can perform Electronic Repro tests as described in the User’s Guide. • The Engineer’s Calibration Chart is a multi-function test

subject which includes the Electronic Repro test subject (See Figure 7.2).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-31

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Electronic Repro Target Part No. 7542–0150–02

Figure 7.1 Elect Electronic ronic Repro Transp Transparenc arency y

ELECTRONIC REPRO TEST SUBJECT

Figure Figur e 7.2 Engine Engineer’s er’s Calibr Calibration ation Chart

7-32

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

CAUTION  The test subject must be clean and  undamaged. Dirty or damaged  (scratched emulsion) subjects may  cause the tests to fail.

7.6.2

Positioning the Electronic Repro Test Subject 1. Open the li lid. 2. Mak Makee sure sure the lig lightb htbar ar is fit fitted ted.. 3. Mak Makee sure sure the pla platen ten are areaa is cle clean. an. 4. Fit the sho short rt regist registratio ration n edge edge to the the plate platen. n. 5. Pla Place ce the the test test sub subjec jectt on the pla platen ten:: • The text must be right reading as viewed from above. • The arrow heads must point towards the top edge of the

platen. • The film must be positioned against the registration edge. • The arrow heads on the film must be aligned with the top

edge of the platen glass. EDGE OF GLASS PLATEN

 

Fujifilm Electronic Imaging Ltd Part No. 7542–0150–02

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-33

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

CAUTION  The Electronic Repro Test  transparency must be positioned   correctly. If not it will will cause the tests  to fail.

7-34

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

REPRO TEST TRANSPARENCY

Ä

 Ä

Ä

 Ä

TOP EDGE OF PLATEN GLASS

TEXT: RIGHT READING AS VIEWED FROM ABOVE

ARROWS POINTING TOWARDS TOP OF PLATEN

ENGINEER’S CALIBRATION CHART

TOP EDGE OF PLATEN GLASS

REGISTRATION EDGE

 

If the test transparency is not positioned and orientated correctly the test will fail. 6. Cl Clos osee th thee top top li lid. d.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

7.6.3

Ele lecctronic Repro Procedure 1. Run the the works workstatio tation n diagno diagnostic sticss (See (See Chapter Chapter 7). 2. From the Tests menu, ensure that Verbose is selected. 3. From the Tests menu, select Electronic Repro ⇒ Run.

7-35

4. If the lar large ge Engine Engineerin ering g Calibrati Calibration on Chart Chart is is used, used, check check the Calib. Slide box. If the Electronic Repro Transparency is being used, ensure that the Calib. Slide box is unchecked. 5. Select Select the appr appropri opriate ate scanne scannerr number number from from thos thosee made made available in dialog box. 6. Cl Clic ick k on on the the Go ic icon on..

7-36

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

7. Wait while while the the progress progress bar reache reachess its endp endpoint oint..  Note: This is at the end of the image scan.

8. Wait while while the the tests tests are being being perfor performed med on on the electr electronic onic repro image. 9. Read Read the the test test resu result. lt. If the the resu result lt is is Passed, the test has been completed successfully. If thedo result is Failed, look in the Scanner Log for the reason then the following: a) Examine Examine the imag imagee (repro[ (repro[scsi scsi id].t id].tif) if) by by selecti selecting ng Electronic Repro ⇒ Display then opening the image from the directory which appears. The image is located in the C-scan ⇒ Diagnostics ⇒ C-550 Lanovia ⇒ Mac folder. Ensure that TIFF files are displayed by selecting TIFF Files from the List Files of Type menu. The image should show six, thick, grey lines with diagonal lines between (see below). If no image appears, check that you positioned the image correctly on the platen as described in Section 7.6.2.

Figure Figur e 7.3 7.3 Elect Electronic ronic repro image

b) Re Repe peat at St Step epss 1 to to 3. 3.

 

c) If the the tests tests fai faill again again,, ensur ensuree that that the the Calib. Slide checkbox has the correct selection and change as required, see Step 4. If this was correct, double-click the icon to display the Scan Details window and ensure that the Slow and Fast Offsets have not been altered. They should be set as follows:

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-37 

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

Electr Ele ctroni onic c Repro Repro Tran Transpa sparen rency cy

Engine Eng ineer’ er’s s Calibr Calibrati ation on Chart Chart

Slow Offset

50

240

Fast Offset

35

35

If the selection or the parameters were incorrectly set, repeat Steps 1 to 3. d) Run the Diag Diagnost nostics ics tests tests,, see Sect Section ion 7.5. e) Rem Remov ovee the the elect electron ronic ic repro repro sli slide de.. f) Perform Perform the requ required ired alig alignmen nmentt proced procedures ures (refer to Section 6.4.2 for lightbar lightbar,, or Section 6.4.3 for differential focus). g) Rep Repeat eat Step Stepss 1 to to 8 of of this this sect section ion.. The data can be read using a simple text editor.

7-38

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

7.7

Downloading Fi Firmware to to th the Sc Scanner This procedure is required when new firmware has been supplied. It is not required as a part of the installation procedure procedure as firmware is loaded before delivery of the scanner. 1. Laun Launch ch user user diagno diagnostics stics as describ described ed in Sect Section ion 7.2. 7.2. 2. Cli Click ck on Do Downl wnloa oad d too tooll butt button. on.

The file selection window opens.

 

3. From From the the file file dire directo ctory ry,, find find the the C-scan3.1 fold  folder er (or late laterr level) then select Diagnostics ⇒ C-550 Lanovia ⇒ V1.2 (or later level)  ⇒  Appl .

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

4. Unless Unless alr alread eady y sele selecte cted, d, sel select ect Binary Files from the List Files of Type menu.

5. Highlight mrscan.bin and click Open. The Download Code window appears.

7-39

7-40

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

6. Selec Selectt the scan scanner ner you you want want to down download load the firmw firmware are to. to. 7. Set File type to Flash if required. Note that Flash is selected by default.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

8. Cl Clic ick k the the Go to tool ol bu butt tton on..

A slider moves to the right while the firmware data is downloading.

9. When the firmw firmware are has down download loaded, ed, the scan scanner ner automatically reboots. reboots. Note that this can take up to three minutes.

7-41

7-42

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

When the scanner has re-booted, Complete appears.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-43

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

10. Unless you have have to download download a new bootstrap bootstrap program, exit exit by clicking the Stop tool button.

11. If a new bootstrap program is required required to be downloaded, downloaded, use use the top menu to move back up to the v1_nn directory, highlight boot and click Open .

7-44

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

12.. Se 12 Sele lect ct S record files from the List Files of Type menu.

13. Hig Highli hlight ght mrscan.hex and click Open .

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

7-45

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

The Download Code window appears.

14. Select the scanner required required and select the Boot  radio button. Note that the Flash button is selected by default.

7-46

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Workstati orkstation on Diagnostics

15. Click the Go icon. icon. The sequence of of events is the same as for downloading downloadin g the scanner firmware. Note that if the Boot  button is not selected, a SCSI Check Condition  error message appears. If this message appears, click OK. Failed appears next to the selected scanner box. Ensure the Boot  button is selected and repeat the above procedure for downloading the bootstrap program.

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

Workstatio orkstation n Diagnostic Diagnosticss

7-47 

7-48

C-550 Lanovia Scanner 

 

8

Maintenance This chapter provides a general description of the maintenance  procedur  pro cedures es for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner Scanner..

8.1

Introduction The scanner has been designed with a minimum level of  necessary maintenance. maintenance. For example, the leadscrews do not need any form of lubrication. However, all equipment undergoes a change in performance over time and the produced images can be below an acceptable standard because the optical components have collected dust/dirt on their surfaces. It is important to follow all applicable safety and health instructions,, and to remove rings from fingers when cleaning instructions around the underside of the platen.

8.1.1

Maintenance and Service Normally, regular maintenance will be carried out by the customer (refer to C-550 Lanovia Scanner User’ User ’s Guide).

Maintenance is quick and easy to carry out. Service visits shall occur only when a modular unit is required to be replaced by another unit. Servicing and maintenance visits require the use of tools listed in Section 4.1. Certain diagnostic tests are accessible from the host workstation (see Terminal diagnostic testsport (seeonChapter only Chapter available7). via the RS232 diagnostic the side5)ofare the RFI box.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

8-1

 

 Maintenance

Field adjustments and alignments should be performed as part of  the replacement procedure of certain components. Appendix A provides the important electrical reference data and Appendix B provides some guidance on fault diagnosis. When required, the appropriate calibration procedures (see Chapter 6) should be performed after receiving no fault messages from the diagnostic procedures. Any software or firmware upgrades or fixes shall be installed by the customer, using workstation software. The final quality assurance test is the electronic repro test (see Section 7.6).

8.2

Safety Interlock Checks Remove the RFI box cover and identify the two large interlock  relays on the system board. These relays have an aperture in the top cover. This aperture shows red when the relay is energized. With the main and standby switches On, the safety interlocks are meant to operate when the following conditions exist: • With the lightbar fitted, the left-hand relay must be energized

when the lid is closed and de-energized when the lid is open. • With the lightbar removed, the left-hand relay must be

energized when the lid is open.  Note: If the relay is not not energized, energized, reset the protrusion protrusion height  of the lid interlocks (see Section 4.13.2).

• With the lightbar removed, and the main cover open, both

relays must be de-energized. With the main cover closed, the right-hand relay must be energized.  Note: If the relay is not not energized, energized, reset the protrusion protrusion height  of the main cover interlocks (see Section 4.13.1).

8-2

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Maintenance

8.3

Cleaning Procedures The optical components need cleaning no more than once per year. The environment for the scanner is defined as a Class M environment by BS5295 Part 1 1989.

8.3. 8. 3.1 1

Hand Ha ndli ling ng an and d Cle Clean anin ing g of of Opt Optic ical al Co Comp mpon onen ents ts Customer service engineers must understand the health and safety conditions for the techniques and materials to be used in the cleaning of optical components. The procedures, and use of approved materials and substances, for handling and cleaning optical components must minimize the risk of damage.

Recommended List of Tools The following tools items will be required for cleaning the optical components that are located in the scanner. • Protrusion height ruler, • Latex disposable gloves, • Squeeze bulb - without brush, • Repro wipes,

 

• Cotton buds without plastic stems, • Sable brush, • Glass polishing cloth, • System calibration target, • Electronic repro slide, • Selvyt cloth.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

8-3

 

 Maintenance

Approved Materials Approved materials and handling tools must be available for the cleaning operations before starting work. The following cleaning agents are recommended: • KAMI DC2001 - for removing tape adhesive from the topside

of the platen. • NILCO glass cleaner - for removing dirt from the platen. • Iso-propyl alcohol (IPA) - for use on the CCD-window, but

should not be extensively used. • Liquid paraffin (transparency mounting mounting oil) - for cleaning

scratched surfaces, but should not be extensively used.

CAUTION   Any cleaning, or handling  operation, of a delicate optical   component like a coated platen,  mirror,, lens, or CCD-window carries  mirror  a risk of causing damage to the  component.

Policy

Cleaning and handling procedures are both capable of inflicting damage on a delicate optical surface. Handling procedures must not be designed to only prevent direct damage, they must also prevent contamination which will need to be cleaned off later, risking further damage. Touching critical surfaces must be avoided. Packaging of optical components must ensure the minimum handling necessary when removing or unwrapping the component. This is just as important to the service engineer who may need to return the camera head sub-assembly to the factory. 8-4

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Maintenance

The overriding advice is Don’ is Don’tt clean unless you have to. to. It is only necessary to clean a surface if there is reason to think that the contamination is absorbing or scattering light. Clean according to the advised procedures, having regard to the materials of the component and the nature of the contamination. This risk can be minimized by using: • handling procedures which avoid contamination by dust,

fingermarks etc., • cleaning glass and coated surfaces only when this is

necessary, not as a routine operation, components, nts, • defined cleaning procedures for all delicate compone using materials and techniques which minimize the risk of  damage.

Visual Inspection The following are guideline procedures for general use: • Look at the optical component surface against a matt black 

background. • Obliquely illuminate the optical component from either the

front or rear.

Visual inspection may optionally use a low power (x3) magnifier lens. Contamination will be seen as dust particles, smears or streaks, or as a uniform grime coating. Often, this test can be

 

done in-situ, by inserting a matt black card on the opposite side of the component and illuminating the optical face with a torch. There is no definitive specification of when a lens needs to be cleaned. When there are no image defects (see Appendix B) in the output results, don’t clean an optical component just because it looks dirty.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

8-5

 

 Maintenance

Cleaning Processes The procedure to be adopted in cleaning an optical component depends on: • the nature of the contamination, • the material of the component - glass, plastic, metal etc., • whether the component is loose or mounted.

Dry dust adhering to an optical surface can be difficult to remove. A puff of air from a squeeze bulb will dislodge and re-distribute loose dust. Dusting with a dry brush or wiping with a lint-free cloth will only re-distribute the dust, and may add more if the brush is already contaminated from previous dusting operations. Dust is best removed by wiping the optical component with a recommended solvent followed by gently drying it with a clean repro wipe. A coated platen, mounted in a metal housing, is difficult to clean by any of the above methods. Dry cleaning with a soft cloth only re-distributes the dust and the platen coating may become scratched in the process. One method of cleaning dust, is to take a clean lens tissue, or a repro wipe and form it into a loose swab. Then, dampen the swab with the),approved notthe use acetone anywhere the system and gentlycleaner wipe it( do over surface. Finally, take aindry lens tissue and repeat the process, but in a different direction. direction. Repeat this process until no smudges or particles can be seen when being visually inspected.

8.3 .3..2

Cle lea anin ing g Prep Prepa arat atio ion ns an and Co Comple lettio ion ns The following preparations must be made. 1. Po Posi siti tion on mai main n carr carria iage ge for for Camera service (see Section 4.12). 2. Ope Open n the the main main cover cover (see (see Sect Section ion 4.1 4.11). 1). 3. Rem Remov ovee the ligh lightt table table (see (see Secti Section on 4.16 4.16). ).

8-6

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Maintenance

4. Prepa Prepare re solut solutions ions and tools tools for use use (see (see Section Section 4.1). 4.1). 5. Remove Remove rings rings from from fingers fingers and put put on a new pair of of latex latex gloves. 6. Per Perfor form m the neces necessar sary y cleanin cleaning g procedu procedures res.. 7. On compl completion etion re-fit the light light tabl tablee (see Secti Section on 4.16) 4.16).. 8. Clo Close se the the main main cover cover (see (see Secti Section on 4.1 4.11). 1). 9. Perform Perform the the scanner scanner healt health h (confid (confidence) ence) chec check k (see (see Section Section 8.4).

PLATEN

CCD-WINDOW MIRROR BAFFLE LENS

Figure Fig ure 8.1 8.1 Opt Optica icall compon component ents s

 

8.3.3

Platen Cleaning Procedures CAUTION   Do not use IPA IP A tothe Clean the platen  surfaces. Use only recommended   solvents.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

8-7 

 

 Maintenance

Topside Procedure 1. Use a clean repro wipe wipe,, dampen dampened ed with with Kami Kami DC20 DC2001, 01, to to remove local areas of tape adhesive. 2. Use a clean repro wipe wipe,, dampene dampened d with with Nilco Nilco cleane cleaner, r, to clean the topside of the platen. 3. Use a Selv Selvyt yt cloth cloth to polis polish h the the platen platen surfa surface. ce.

Underside Procedure  Note: Both sides of the glass have a special anti-reflective anti-reflective coating which is vital to the performance of the scanning operation. Ordinary glass does not produce the required  scan results.

CAUTION   Normally, the following procedure  should not be required. If it is  necessary, then do not attempt to  remove the platen. Any disturbance will affect the calibration profile.  Note: The light table should have have been removed removed during the cleaning preparation procedure (see Section 8.3.2).

1. Visua isually lly inspect inspect the the under-s under-surfac urfacee of the platen platen for for deposits deposits of  of  dust or dirt.  Note: If the under-surface under-surface is reasonably reasonably clean do not  perform any cleaning cleaning procedur procedure. e.

2. Mechanical Mechanically ly,, move move the main main carriage carriage to to the rightright-hand hand end (Park) position (see Section 4.12.3). 3. Use a repro repro wipe wipe,, dampene dampened d with with Nilco, Nilco, to clean the left-ha left-half  lf  of the under-su under-surface. rface.

8-8

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Maintenance

4. Use a repro wipe to dry dry the the under-s under-surfac urfacee of the left-h left-hand and side. 5. Mechanical Mechanically ly,, move move the main main carriag carriagee to the the left-hand left-hand end end (Camera service) position. 6. Repe Repeat at Steps Steps 3 and 4 for the the right-hal right-halff of the the under under-surf -surface. ace.

8.3.4

Mirror Cleaning Procedure 1. Visua isually lly inspect inspect the the surface surface of of the mirror mirror for for deposits deposits of dust dust or dirt.  Note: If the surface is reasonably reasonably clean do not not perform any cleaning procedure. 2. Use the the squeeze squeeze bulb bulb to to blow blow away any loose loose dust or dirt dirt and repeat Step 1. 3. Use a lens lens tissue tissue,, dampene dampened d with with IPA, IPA, to gently gently clean the surface of the mirror.  Note: Do not wipe the surface aggressively aggressively as this action could cause more damage.

8.3.5

Lens Cleaning Procedure 1. Visua isually lly inspect inspect the the surface surface of of the lens lens for deposi deposits ts of dust dust or dirt.

 

 Note: If the surface is reasonably reasonably clean do not not perform any cleaning procedure.

2. Use a lens lens tissue, tissue, soaked soaked in in IPA, IPA, to gentl gently y clean clean the surfac surfacee of  the lens.  Note: Do not use cotton buds which have have sharp pointed   plastic stems.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

8-9

 

 Maintenance

8.3 .3..6

CCD CD-W -Win ind dow Cl Cleeanin ing g Pr Pro oced edu ure  Note: This procedur proceduree cannot be performed performed while the CCD image sensor baffle is fitted. However, in the event of any accidental contact with the CCD-window, while the enlargement sensor is being replaced, use this cleaning  procedur  pro cedure. e.

1. Visua isually lly inspec inspectt the surface surface of of the CCD-wi CCD-window ndow for deposit depositss of dust or fingerprints.  Note: If the surface is reasonably reasonably clean do not not perform any cleaning procedure.

2. Use a lens lens tissue, tissue, dampen dampened ed with with IPA, IPA, to clean clean the the surface surface of  the CCD-window.

8-10

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

 Maintenance

8.4

Scanner He Health (C (Confidence) Ch Check This confidence check is performed to satisfy the customer that the scanner is performing according to the set parameters. The following procedures must be carried out:  Note: If any of the following procedur procedures es fail, perform the necessary fault diagnosis (see Appendix B) and replace the appropriate units (see Chapter 4) before trying again.

1. Perfo Perform rm the the clean cleaning ing proc procedur edures es (see (see Secti Section on 8.3). 8.3). 2. Chec Check k the the enclos enclosure ure fan filte filterr (see (see Sectio Section n 4.8) 4.8) 3. Perfo Perform rm a full full range range of diag diagnost nostic ic tests tests (see (see Section Section 5.3). 5.3). 4. Perfo Perform rm the the full rang rangee of calibr calibration ation tests (see Sectio Section n 6.5). 6.5). 5. Perfo Perform rm the the electro electronic nic repro repro test (see Secti Section on 7.6). 7.6).

 

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 

 Maintenance

8-11

8-12

C-550 Lanovia Scanner

 

Electrical Reference Data

A

This appendix shows the locations of the electrical modules and  their LEDs, fuses, connectors, test points, relays, links, and  switches for the C-550 Lanovia Scanner.

A.1

Module Lo Locations The electrical modules shown (see Figure A.1) A.1) are as follows: A.1 and Figure A.3), • Power Supply Unit (PSU) (see Figure A.1 • System Board (inside RFI Box) (see ( see Figure A.1 and

Figure A.3), • CCD Headboard (see Figure A.1 and Figure A.3),

A.1 and Figure A.3), • Digitizer Board (see Figure A.1 • Lamp Driver Board (see Figure A.1 A.1 and Figure A.5), A.5), • Lamp Detector Boards (3 off) (see Figure A.3 and

Figure A.5),

 

• RH Distribution Board. (see Figure A.4), • LH Distribution Board (see Figure A.4), A.4), • Display Board (see Figure A.4), • Flexicable Distribution Boards (see Figure A.2 and

Figure A.4), • 50-way Flexicable Loom (see Figure A.2), A.2),

A.2). • 62-way Flexicable Loom (see Figure A.2).

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-1

 

 Electrical Reference Data

DIGITIZER BOARD

CCD HEADBOARD

LAMP DRIVER BOARD RH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DISPLAY BOARD LH DISTRIBUTION BOARD

REFER TO Figure A.2 FOR FLEXICABLES

LAMP DETECTOR BOARDS  

PSU MAIN SWITCH

STANDBY SWITCH SYSTEM BOARD

VIEWED FROM FRONT

Figure A.1 Elect Electrical rical module locati locations ons

RFI BOX

 A-2

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.1.1

Flexicable Looms DIGITIZER CONNECTOR

DIGITIZER RFI COVER X-SLIDE MOTION

X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD TRAVERSE

MAIN CARRIAGE MOTION

DISTRIBUTION BOARD

LAMP DRIVER CONNECTOR

VIEWED FROM REAR

50-WAY FLEXICABLE

RFI BOX

62-WAY FLEXICABLE

Figure Figur e A.2 Arran Arrangement gement of flexicabl flexicables es

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-3

 

 Electrical Reference Data

RIBBON CABLE É

É 

É

É 

FLEXICABLE

CCD HEADBOARD

WIRE CABLE

SK1 É

SK1 É

DISPLAY BOARD

ENLARGEMENT DATUM SENSOR

 É

DIGITIZER BOARD É

É

PL1

PL1

ENLARGEMENT STEPPER MOTOR

PL2 PL3 PL4

FOCUS STEPPER MOTOR

 É

 É

 É

SK2 É

 É

É

 É

DIGITIZER FAN

PL2

DISTRIBUTION BOARD (RH) PL1

LAMP DETECTOR

X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

DISTRIBUTION BOARD (LH) PL6

MAIN CARRIAGE MOTOR

É

 É

É

 É

É

 É

SK1

TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD  É

BOARDS (x3)

 É

É

É

É

É

PL4

PL3

RFI BOX FAN FA N

PL1

SK2

LAMP DRIVER BOARD

 É

PL2

 É

 É

 É

 É

 É

 É

 É

SK1

 É

 É

SK3

SK4 SK5

DIAGNOSTICS

SW1

SCSI ADDRESS

PL3

SCSI & TERMINATOR CONNECTORS

SYSTEM BOARD PL2

RS232

INLINE CONNECTOR

REMOTE POWER SWITCH

PSU MAINS RFI BOX

SWITCH

DC POWER Figure A.3 Main system system interc interconnect onnections ions

 A-4

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

MAIN COVER INTERLOCK LH

LID INTERLOCK LH

DISPLAY BOARD

LID INTERLOCK RH

MAIN COVER INTERLOCK RH

PL1

PL2 PL3

Ä

Ä 

Ä 

Ä 

PL1

ENCLOSURE FAN Ä

Ä 

PL6

PL5

DISTRIBUTION BOARD LH

CARRIAGE REVERSE LIMIT SWITCH

PL4

CARRIAGE DATUM SENSOR

PL6

PL4 PL3

DISTRIBUTION BOARD RH

PL5 PL2

PL1

SYSTEM BOARD (PL1)

SYSTEM BOARD (SK1)

CARRIAGE FORWARD LIMIT SWITCH MAIN CARRIAGE MOTOR

X-SLIDE MOTOR

PL4

FOCUS DATUM SENSOR

PL4 X-SLIDE DATUM SENSOR

PL7

TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD PL6

PL5

X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

TRANSMISSION LIGHTBAR INTERLOCK

Figure A.4 Distri Distribution bution board board interco interconnecti nnections ons

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-5

 

 Electrical Reference Data LAMP DETECTOR BOARD

PL1

LAMP DETECTOR BOARD

PL1

REFLECTION COPY LAMPS x2

TRANSMISSION COPY LAMP

LIGHTBAR LOOPBACK

LAMP DETECTOR BOARD

PL1

LIGHT TABLE LAMPS x2

PL1 PL2 PL3 SK1 LAMP DRIVER BOARD PL4

FLEXICABLE TO TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD Figure Figur e A.5 Lamp driver driver board board interconnec interconnections tions

 A-6

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.2

Power Supply Unit (PSU) TO SYSTEM BOARD (PL2) (Table (T able A.2)

TO STANDBY SWITCH

MINIMUM LOAD (3R3) RESISTOR

TO RFI (Table able A.2) BOX FAN (T

CONNECTOR ON RFI BOX (Table (T able A.2)

TO PSU TO PSU REMOTE CONNECTOR (Table (T able A.2)

PSU FAN

PSU REMOTE CONNECTOR

Figure Fig ure A.6 PSU Lay Layout out

Table A.1 PSU AC-con AC-connectio nections ns From

To

Wire Colour

Mains Live Mains Neutral Mains Earth Mains Switch Mains Switch Earth Stud

Mains Switch Mains Switch Earth Stud PSU Live PSU Neutral PSU Earth

Brown Blue Green/Yellow Brown Blue Green/Yellow

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-7 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

Table A.2 PSU DC-con DC-connectio nections ns From  PSU

System PL2 Pin #

+5 V 0 V (D) +5 V 0 V (D) 0V 0V +24 V +24 V 0 V (A) +18 V 0 V (A) -12 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PSU

RFI Box Fan Conn

+24 V 0V

1 2

PSU Remote

Standby Switch

Connector

Connector

4 5 NC

1 2 3

 Note: 0 V (D) repre represents sents digital ground, ground, 0 V (A) repr represents esents analogue ground, and 0 V represents power ground.  A 3R3 resistor resistor is mounted to the metalwork of the RFI box and is connected from +5 V to 0 V(D) as a minimum load   for the PSU.

 A-8

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.3

System Board SW1 SK5 FS3

PL4

PL3

SK4

SK8 LK1

PL2

U82

U95

U81

U94

SK3

RL2

LK2

SK7

SK2

FS2 PL8 RL1

PL1

PL7 FS1

SW2

D6 D5

LK3 SK1

PL5

D4

PL6

SK6

Figure A.7 Syste System m board layout: layout: pre-Ki pre-Kicker cker

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-9

 

 Electrical Reference Data

SW1 SK5 FS3

PL9

PL3

SK4

SK8 U91 U78

PL2

U77 U90 SK3

PL10

DONGLE

RL2

SK7

RL1

PL8

PL1 SK2 SK1

FS2

PL1 PL7 FS1

DONGLE

LK3 SK1

PL5

PL6

SW2

D6 D5 D4 SK6

Figure A.8 Kicke Kickerr System System board board layout layout

 A-10

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.3.1

System Board Connectors Table A.3 Syste System m board board connectors connectors Port

Connections and Notes

PL1 SK1 SK2

25-way ribbon cable to LH distribution board. 15-way ribbon cable to RH distribution board. 25-way cable loom to servo motor and encoder of the main carriage drive. 50-way flexicable loom to Traverse distribution board. 62-way flexicable loom to Traverse distribution board. RS232 terminal diagnostics port (see Note). Factory use. Factory use. Factory use. DC-connector from PSU (see Note). Single ended SCSI / terminator double port (see Note). Not on Kicker board. Factory and R & D use only. Factory use. Factory use. Factory use. Factory use. Kicker board only. Factory and R & D use only. Kicker board only. Direct connection to Dongle board, SK1.

SK3 SK4 SK5 SK6 SK7 SK8 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 PL7 PL8 PL9 PL10

 Note: SK5 is an 8-way mini-DIN connector connector with the same  pinout as the serial interface for the Macintosh. Macintosh.  Note: For PL2, see Table Table A.2 for pinout connections. connections.

 Note: PL3, uses the standard standard pinout connections connections for a SCSI2 connector.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-11  A-1 1

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL1 to LH Distribution Board Table A.4 A.4 Syste System m board to LH distributi distribution on board connectio connections ns System PL1 Pin #

LHDist PL6 Pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Function

LED fault cathode LED ready cathode LED power cathode NC Enclosure fan (+24 V) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) NC Main cover interlocks loop LED fault anode LED ready anode LED power anode Enclosure fan (0 V) NC NC Spare sensor +5 V

22 23 24 25

18 20 22 24 26

+5 V Carriage forward limit sensor NC Main cover interlock (+24 V) NC

 A-12

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

SK1 to RH Distribution Board Table A.5 Syste System m board to RH distribution distribution board board connections connections System SK1 Pin #

RHDist PL1 Pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Function

Lid interlocks (+24 V) NC Spare +5 V Carriage reverse limit sensor Carriage datum NC Main cover interlock loop Lid return 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) 0 V (D) Main cover interlocks return NC

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-13

 

 Electrical Reference Data

SK2 to Main Carriage Servo Motor Table A.6 Syste System m board to main carriage carriage servo servo motor connections connections System SK2 Pin #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Function

Main carriage encoder A (+) NC Main carriage encoder B (+) NC Main carriage encoder index (+) NC Main carriage encoder +5 V NC NC NC Brush servo phase 1 Brush servo phase 2 Brush servo phase 2 Main carriage encoder A (-) NC Main carriage encoder B (-) NC Main carriage encoder index (-) NC Main carriage encoder 0 V Screen (encoder)

22 23 24 25

Screen (motor) Brush servo phase 1 Brush servo phase 1 Brush servo phase 2

 A-14

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

SK3 to Lamp Driver Board Table A.7 Syste System m board to traverse traverse distributi distribution on board to lamp driver board connections System SK3 Pin #

CarrDist LampDvr PL4 PL3 Pin # Pin #

Function

34 1 18 35

17 50 33 16

-

X-slide motor phase3 X-slide motor phase4 X-slide motor phase2 X-slide motor phase1

2 19 36 3 20 37 4 21 38 5 22 39

49 32 15 48 31 14 47 30 13 46 29 12

19 37 18

+5 V Focus datum sensor +5 V 0 V ( D) Lightbar interlock (-) Lightbar interlock (+) 0 V ( D) X-slide datum sensor 0 V ( D) Lamp SCLK cathode Lamp SCLK anode Lamp SDI cathode

6 23 40 7 24

45 28 11 44 27

36 17 35 16 34

Lamp SDI anode Lamp SDACEN cathode Lamp SDACEN anode Lamp SDO cathode Lamp SDO anode

41 8 25 42 9 26

15 33 14 32 13 31

10 43 26 9 42 25

Lamp LDAC cathode Lamp LDAC anode Lightbar trip return Lightbar trip Spare Lamp power OK cathode

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-15

 

 Electrical Reference Data

System board to traverse distribution board to lamp driver board connections (continued) System SK3 Pin #

CarrDist PL3 Pin #

LampDvr PL4 Pin #

43 10 27 44 11 28 45 12 29 46 13 30 47 14 31 48 15 32 49 16 33 50 17

8 41 24 7 40 23 6 39 22 5 38 21 4 37 20 3 36 19 2 35 18 1 34

12 30 11 29 10 28 9 27 8 26 7 25 6 24 5 23 4 22 21 3 2 20 1

Function

Lamp power OK anode NC NC Transmission Transmis sion lamp ON cathode Transmission Transmis sion lamp ON anode NC NC Temperature OK cathode Temperature OK anode Reflection lamps ON cathode Reflection lamps ON anode ADC DOUT cathode ADC DOUT anode Light table lamps ON cathode Light table lamps ON anode +24 V (return) +24 V (return) +24 V (return) +24 V +24 V (return) +24 V +24 V +24 V

51 52

51 52

38 39

Screen Screen

 A-16

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

SK4 to Digitizer Board Table A.8 Syste System m board to traverse traverse distribution distribution board to digitizer digitizer board connections System SK4 Pin #

CarrDist Digitizer PL2 SK2 Pin # Pin #

Function

21 42 62 20

21 42 62 20

22 1 43 23

Pixel demand clock (-) Pixel demand clock (+) Digitizer returned clock (-) Digitizer returned clock (+)

41 61 19 40 60 18 39 59 17 38 58 16

41 61 19 40 60 18 39 59 17 38 58 16

2 44 24 3 45 25 4 46 26 5 47 27

0 V (D) Start of line sync from system board +5 V (D) Start of line to system board 0 V (D) Exposure control RED Exposure control GREEN Exposure control BLUE +5 V (D) Digitizer data bit0 (lsb) 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit1

37 57 15 36 56

37 57 15 36 56

6 48 28 7 49

+5 V (D) Digitizer data bit2 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit3 +5 V (D)

14 35 55 13 34 54 12

14 35 55 13 34 54 12

29 8 50 30 9 51 31

Digitizer data bit4 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit5 +5 V (D) Digitizer data bit6 0 V (D) Digitizer data bit7 (msb)

33 53

33 53

10 52

+5 V (D) Reset signal from system board

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-17 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

System board to traverse distribution board to digitizer board connections (continued) System SK4 Pin #

CarrDist PL2 Pin #

Digitizer SK2 Pin #

11 32 52 10 31 51 9

11 32 52 10 31 51 9

32 11 53 33 12 54 34

0 V (D) Serial DAC enable Program enable Digitizer serial clock 0 V (D) Serial data in For programming

30 50 8 29 49 7 28 48 6 27 47 5 26 46 4 25

30 50 8 29 49 7 28 48 6 27 47 5 26 46 4 25

13 55 35 14 56 36 15 57 37 16 58 38 17 59 39 18

Serial data out 0 V (D) Mode bit0 Mode bit1 Mode bit2 0 V (D) PLL locked Input volts OK Temperature OK Enlargement datum sensor 0 V (D) +18 V

Function

+11.5 V -12 V -12 V 0 V (A)

45 3 24 44 2 23 43 1 22 63 64

45 3 24 44 2 23 43 1 22 63 64

60 40 19 61 41 20 62 42 21 63 64

 A-18

0 V (A) Enlargement motor phase1 Enlargement motor phase3 Focus motor phase4 Enlargement motor phase2 Enlargement motor phase4 Focus motor phase2 Focus motor phase3 Focus motor phase1 Screen Screen

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.3.2

Fuses Table A.9 Fuses on system system board board

A.3.3

Fuse #

Rating

FS1 FS2 FS3

1 A (fast) 1 A (fast) 1 A (fast)

Function

Interlock supply Enclosure fan supply SCSI terminator power

Switches Table A.10 Switc Switches hes on system board Switch #

SW1 SW2

A.3.4

Function

Sets SCSI address for system board Must be set at position 7 (factory use)

LEDs Table A.1 A.11 1 LEDs on on system system board board LED #

Colour

Function

D4 D5 D6

Green Red Green

Power (+5 V present) Fault Ready

 Note: These LEDs mirror mirror the three LEDs on on the display board, although the colours are different.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-19

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.3.5

Relays Table A.12 Relay Relays s on system system board

A.3.6

Relay #

Function

RL1 RL2

Main carriage motor interlock Lamp driver supply Enclosure fan supply Stepper motors interlock

Links Table A.13 Links on system system board board Link #

LK1 LK2 LK3

Setting

OFF OFF OFF

Notes

Not on Kicker board Not on Kicker board

 Note: All links are for factory factory use.

 A-20

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.4

CCD Headboard

CCD

SK1 TO DIGITIZER

Figure Fig ure A.9 CCD headb headboar oard d layout layout

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-21

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.4.1

CCD Headboard Connector

SK1 to Digitizer Board Table A.14 A.14 CCD headboard headboard to digitizer digitizer board board connections connections

 A-22

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

CCDHead SK1 Pin #

Digitizer SK1 Pin #

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 V (A) Buffer Amp output RED 0 V (A) Buffer Amp output GREEN 0 V (A) Buffer Amp output BLUE 0 V (A) +15 V Supply (ref to AGND) 0 V (D)

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

+7.2 V Supply (ref to DGND) Exposure control - RED +12 V Supply (ref to DGND) 0 V (D) Exposure control - GREEN 0 V (D) Exposure control - BLUE 0 V (D) Transfer Gate2 0 V (D) Transfer Gate1 0 V (D)

9 8 7 6

22 23 24 25

Reset Clock 0 V (D) Phase2B Clock 0 V (D)

Function

5 4 3 2 1

26 27 28 29 30

Phase1B Clock 0 V (D) Phase2A Clock 0 V (D) Phase1A Clock

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-23

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.5

Digitizer Board TP9 (GND)

SK1

TP8

PL4

TP2

TP10

TP5 TP3

TP6

TP11

TP4

TP1

TP7 SK2

PL2 PL3

PL1

Figure A.10 Digiti Digitizer zer board layout

 A-24

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.5.1

Digitizer Bo Board Co Connectors Table A.15 Digit Digitizer izer board board connect connectors ors Port

Connects to

PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 SK1

Enlargement datum sensor Enlargement motor Focus motor Power to digitizer fan CCD headboard

 Note: For SK1, see Table Table A.14 for pinout connections. connections.

PL1 to Enlargement Datum Sensor Table A.16 A.16 Enlar Enlargement gement datum datum sensor sensor connections connections Digitizer PL1 Pin #

Function

1

0 V (D)

2 3 4 5

NC Datum sensor NC +5 V

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-25

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL2 to Enlargement Motor Table A.17 A.17 Enlar Enlargement gement motor motor connecti connections ons Digitizer PL2 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4 5 6

NC NC Motor phase4 Motor phase3 Motor phase2 Motor phase1

PL3 to Focus Motor Table A.18 Focus motor connec connections tions Digitizer PL3 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4 5

NC NC Motor phase4 Motor phase3 Motor phase2

6

Motor phase1

 A-26

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL4 to Digitizer Fan Table A.19 Digiti Digitizer zer fan fan connections connections Digitizer PL4 Pin #

1 2

A.5.2

Function

0 V Fan +5 V Fan +

Test Points Table A.20 A.20 Digiti Digitizer zer board board test test points points Test Point

Function

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9

Offset DAC Video RGB Video RED X1 ADC Analogue GND Video GREEN Line Sync Diagnostic DAC Digital GND

Acceptable Signal Range  (with reference to TP9)

0 V to +4.1 V 0 V to -8 V 0 V to +8 V 0 V to +6.5 V +/- 100 mV 0 V to +8 V TTL -ve pulse 0 V to -5 V

TP10 TP11

Video BLUE X4 ADC

0 V to +8 V 0 V to +6.5 V

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-27 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.6

Lamp Driver Board TP6 TP5

SK1

TP4 TP3

PL4 D5

D15

PL3

TP2 TP1

PL2

PL1 Figure A.1 A.11 1 Lamp driver driver board board layout layout

 A-28

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.6 .6.1 .1

Lam amp p Driv iveer Boar ard d Co Con nnect cto ors Table A.21 A.21 Lamp driver driver board board connecto connectors rs Port

PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 SK1

Connects to

Reflection lamps Transmission lamp Light table lamps Traverse distribution board Lamp detector boards

 Note: For PL4, see Table Table A.7 for pinout connections. connections.

PL1 to Reflection Lamps Table A.22 Reflec Reflection tion lamps lamps connectio connections ns LampDvr PL1 Pin #

Function

1

Lamp1 cathode2

2 3 4 5

Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode1 Lamp1 cathode1 NC Lamp2 cathode2

6 7 8 9

Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode1 Lamp2 cathode1

 Note: To check lamp connections, connections, first disconnect PL1 and using using a multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across the connector pins. e.g. Pin 1 to Pin 2 which should be approx. 3.5 Ω. With PL1 connected and the scanner powered on, the lamp cathodes should glow in a darkened room.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-29

 

 Electrical Reference Data

 Alternatively, the glass at each end of the lamp should feel  Alternatively, METAL END CAPS. warm. DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL

PL2 to Transmission Lamp Table A.23 A.23 Tr Transmi ansmission ssion lamp lamp connections connections LampDvr PL2 Pin #

1 2 3 4

Function

Lamp cathode2 Lamp cathode2 Lamp cathode1 Lamp cathode1

 Note: To check lamp connections, connections, first disconnect PL2 and using using a multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across the connector pins. e.g. pin1 to pin2 which should be approx. 3.5 Ω. With PL2 connected and the scanner powered on for 15 minutes, heat should be felt at each end of the lightbar.

 A-30

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL3 to Light Table Lamps Table A.24 A.24 Light table table lamps lamps connectio connections ns LampDvr PL3 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode2 Lamp1 cathode1 Lamp1 cathode1

56 7 8 9

NC Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode2 Lamp2 cathode1 Lamp2 cathode1

 Note: To check lamp connections, connections, first disconnect PL3 and using using a multimeter, measure the cathode resistances across the connector pins. e.g. Pin 1 to Pin 2 which should be approx. 3.5 Ω. With PL3 connected and the scanner powered on, the lamp cathodes should glow in a darkened room.  Alternatively, the glass at each end of the lamp should feel  Alternatively, warm.  DO NOT TOUCH THE METAL METAL END CAPS.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-31

 

 Electrical Reference Data

SK1 to Lamp Detector Boards Table A.25 A.25 Lamp detector detector board board connecti connections ons LampDvr SK1 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

Transmission lamp detector anode Transmission +5 V (test) Transmission Transmis sion lamp detector cable screen Reflection lamp1 detector anode

56 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+5 V (test) lamp1 detector cable screen Reflection Reflection lamp2 detector anode +5 V (test) Reflection lamp2 detector cable screen NC NC NC Lightbar loop (+18 V to loopback) Transmission Transmis sion detector cathode 0V NC

17 18 19 20

Reflection lamp1 detector cathode 0V NC Reflection lamp2 detector cathode 0V

21 22 23 24 25

0V NC NC NC Lightbar loopback

 A-32

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.6.2

Test Points Table A.26 A.26 Test points points on lamp driver driver board board Test Point

Function

Acceptable Signal Range

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5

0 V (HT) +320 V (HT) +18 V +5 V +14 V

+2.9 V to+3.9 V (ref to TP1) +17 V to+19 V (ref to TP6) +4.75 V to+5.25 V (ref to TP6) +13.3 V to+14.7 V (ref to TP6)

TP6

0V

 Note: The voltage measured measured between TP2 and TP1 is the HT  voltage divided by 100.

A.6.3

LEDs Table A.27 LEDs on lamp driver driver board board LED #

D5 D15

Function

+24 V power present and soft inrush circuit working +320 V power present

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-33

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.6.4

Links Table A.28 LEDs on lamp driver driver board board Link

LK1

Function

DO NOT FIT

 Note: If fitted, the +320 V power supply is disabled.

A.6.5

Lamp Detector Boards

2

D1

1 PL1 Figure A.12 Lamp detecto detectorr board board layout layout

Lamp Detector Connections

Table A.29 Lamp detecto detectorr connection connections s Detect PL1 Pin #

Function

1 2

Detector cathode Detector anode

 A-34

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.7

RH Distribution Board

PL1 PL3

PL5

PL4

PL2 PL6

Figure A.13 RH distribut distribution ion board board layout layout

A.7 .7.1 .1

RH Dis Distr trib ibu uti tio on Bo Board Co Conn nneecto tors rs Table A.30 A.30 RH distributi distribution on board board connectors connectors Port

Type

Connects to

PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6

16-way 5-way 5-way 5-way 6-way 6-way

System board Spare Main carriage datum sensor Main carriage reverse limit sensor RH interlock - main cover Lid interlocks

 Note: For PL1, see Table Table A.5 for pinout connections. connections.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-35

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL3 to Main Carriage Datum Sensor Table A.31 A.31 Main carriage carriage datum datum sensor sensor connections connections RHDist PL3 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

0 V (D) LED anode Datum sensor LED cathode

5

+5 V

PL4 to Main Carriage Reverse Limit Sensor Table A.32 A.32 Main carriage carriage reverse reverse limit limit sensor connecti connections ons RHDist PL4 Pin #

Function

1

0 V (D)

2 3 4 5

LED anode Datum sensor LED cathode +5 V

 A-36

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL5 to Main Cover - RH Interlock Table A.33 A.33 Main cover cover RH interlock interlock connect connections ions RHDist PL5 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

Interlock (ret) Interlock loop NC NC

56

NC NC

PL6 to Lid Interlocks Table A.34 Lid interloc interlock k connections connections RHDist PL6 Pin #

1 2 3 4

Function

Return +24 V NC NC

NC NC

5 6

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-37 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.8

LH Distribution Board

PL4

PL3

PL6

PL5

PL1 PL2

Figure Figur e A.14 A.14 LH distributi distribution on board board layout layout

A.8 .8.1 .1

LH Dis Distr trib ibu utio ion n Bo Board Co Con nnect cto ors Table A.35 A.35 LH distributi distribution on board connect connectors ors Port

Type

Connects to

PL1 PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6

Enclosure fan Display board LH interlock - main cover Main carriage forward limit sensor Spare System board

6-way 10-way 6-way 5-way 5-way 25-way

 Note: For PL6, see Table Table A.4 for pinout connections. connections.

 A-38

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL1 to Enclosure Fan Table A.36 Enclos Enclosure ure fan fan connections connections LHDist PL1 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

Fan - 0 V NC NC NC

56

NC Fan +24 V

PL2 to Display Board Table A.37 Displa Display y board board connections connections LHDist PL2 Pin #

Display PL1 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

LED power cathode LED power anode LED ready cathode LED ready anode

5 6 7 8 9 10

LED fault cathode LED fault anode NC NC NC NC

5 6 7 8 9 10

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-39

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL3 to Main Cover - LH Interlock Table A.38 A.38 Main cover cover LH interlock interlock connect connections ions LHDist PL3 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

Loop +24 V NC NC

56

NC NC

PL4 to Main Carriage Forward Limit Sensor Table A.39 Main carriage carriage forward forward limit sensor sensor connections connections LHDist PL4 Pin #

1 2 3 4

Function

0 V (D) LED anode Forward limit LED cathode

5

+5 V

 A-40

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.9

Flexicable Distribution Boards PL7 X-SLIDE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

FLEXICABLE TO DIGITIZER BOARD

PL6 PL4 PL5 PL3 74LS14

TRAVERSE DISTRIBUTION BOARD

PL2

FLEXICABLE TO LAMP DRIVER BOARD Figure A.15 Flexi Flexicable cable distrib distribution ution boards boards layout layout

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-41

 

 Electrical Reference Data

A.9. A. 9.1 1

Flex Fl exic icab able le Dis Distr trib ibut utio ion n Boar Boards ds Con Conne nect ctor orss Table A.40 Connec Connectors tors on Traverse Traverse and X-slide X-slide distribution distribution boards boards Port

Type

PL2 PL3 PL4 PL5 PL6 PL7

62-way 50-way 6-way 5-way 5-way 5-way

Connects to

System board System board X-slide motor Lightbar interlock X-slide datum sensor Focus datum sensor

 Note: For PL2, see Table Table A.8 for pinout connections. connections. For PL3, see Table A.7 for pinout connections.

PL4 to X-slide Motor Table A.41 X-Sli X-Slide de motor motor connectio connections ns CarrDist PL4 Pin #

1 2 3

Function

NC NC Motor phase4

4 5 6

Motor phase2 Motor phase3 Motor phase1

 A-42

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL5 to Lightbar Interlock Table A.42 A.42 Lightb Lightbar ar interlock interlock connect connections ions CarrDist PL5 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

Lightbar interlock NC Lightbar interlock + NC

5

NC

PL6 to X-slide Datum Sensor Table A.43 A.43 X-sli X-slide de datum sensor sensor connecti connections ons CarrDist PL6 Pin #

Function

1

0 V (D)

2 3 4 5

NC Datum sensor NC +5 V

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 A-43

 

 Electrical Reference Data

PL7 to Focus Datum Sensor Table A.44 A.44 Focus datum datum sensor sensor connection connections s X-slide PL7 Pin #

Function

1 2 3 4

0 V (D) LED anode Datum sensor LED cathode

5

+5 V

A.1 .10 0 Display Board La Lay yout

PL1

D1

D2

D3

Figure A.16 LED displa display y board board layout layout

 Note: For PL1, see Table Table A.37 for pinout connections. connections.

 A-44

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

Fault Diagnosis

B

This appendix provides a definition of some image defects and  some fault diagnosis tables in support to the customer service engineer. At the end of this appendix, a numerical list is provided   for all available tests and checks.

B.1

Image Defects B.1.1

Introduction This section intends only to define certain types of image defects. Before checking for defects run the Repropak  transparency/reflection transparency/re flection copy and compare with the factory test films. Image defects are usually an indication of a fault which is too subtle for the diagnostics to detect as either a pass or fail state. An image defect can slow up the progress of an electronic repro test (see Section 7.6). Image defects can be classified into the following groups: • Lack of sharpness,

• Streaks, • Distortions, • Tonal problems, • Subtle colour errors, • Patterning, • Cropping errors, • Graininess/Lack of smoothn smoothness. ess.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 B-1

 

Fault Diagnostics

B.1.2

Lack of Sharpness Lack of sharpness is seen as a soft (out of focus) image with indistinct edges that should be sharp. If the lack of sharpness is only apparent over a part of the image area, the most likely explanation is that the original is not laying flat on the platen. If the lack of sharpness is all over the image, then the scanner may have failed to correctly autofocus on the subject. The scanner makes three attempts to focus, along lines at the quarter,, half, and three-quarter points of the area to be scanned. If  quarter there is no detail here, then autofocus may fail.  Note: Preview scans scans do not perform an autofocus, autofocus, and may look  unsharp if the copy is not mounted directly on the platen. This is not a problem. 

When focussing has failed, try turning the image by 90 , or try over-scanning slightly onto an original which has some strong detail. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 1 of Table B.4. Figure B.1 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a lack of sharpness.

Figure B.1 Lack of sharpness sharpness examp example le

B.1.3

Streaks There are two types of streaks. In both cases, the streaks will appear from top-to-bottom on the output scan, assuming that no image rotation has been specified and the image has been mounted heads right.

 B-2

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

Fault Diagnostics

Light Streaks Streaks seen in light and medium tones which are lighter than the surrounding area and are more than a single pixel wide may be caused by dirt or other marks on the: • CCD scan head window (glass plate covering the CCD image

sensors), • platen in the transmission white-balance white-balance area, • Reflection white-balance strip, • mirror.

 Note: When scanning negatives, negatives, this sort of streak appears appears dark rather than light.

Figure B.2 Examp Example le of a light light streak streak

Deep Streaks in Shadows

Streaks seen in deep shadow tones which are darker than the surrounding surroundin g area and are a single pixel wide. These are always present to a certain extent in CCD scanners but bad pixels should be removed by bad pixel elimination. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 2 of Table B.4.

B.1.4

Distortion Distortions include skews and compression, or stretching, of the image.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 B-3

 

Fault Diagnostics

Distortions are more easily seen while scanning a square grid.

Skew Skew is apparent when the vertical and horizontal lines are straight, but not perpendicular (at right angles) to each other. This can only be caused by serious damage to the camera head sub-assembly sub-assemb ly or the X-slide assembly (spec 0.1  max). 

Compression or Stretching Compression, or stretching, is when squares become rectangles Compression, by more than the specified size tolerances (0.3%). This type of image defect indicates any of the following problems: • a serious error in the main leadscrew drive, • a wrongly-setup scanner, or • the image was not focused properly (though it should then

look unsharp). Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 3 of Table B.4. Figure B.3 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a distortion problem.

Figure Fig ure B.3 B.3 Exa Exampl mple e of distor distortio tion n

 B-4

C-550 Lanovia Lanovia Scanner 

 

Fault Diagnostics

B.1.5

Tonal Problems Flare is when light areas break into adjacent dark areas. The most likely cause is dust on the mirror or lens. Loss of shadow detail may occur if the lamps are failing. In some cases, shadow detail may be reduced when very dark originals are scanned without masking the unused areas of the platen. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 4 of Table B.4. Figure B.4 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a tonal problem.

Figure Figur e B.4 B.4 Tonal probl problem em example example

B.1.6

Subtle Colour Errors Subtle colour errors are often related to ageing components. components. Small colour casts may occur, (e.g. a white area does not look  quite white).

Some possible causes of subtle colour errors are as follows: • discoloured reflection white balance target, • ageing lamps, • clear film covering the transmissio transmission n white-balance area, or • copy has been mounted using glass.

Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 5 of Table B.4.

 Engineer’s Reference Guide Guide 6700800002 6700800002

 B-5

 

Fault Diagnostics

B.1.7

Patterning Patterning is generally seen as either a series of repetitive lines in flat tint areas or as wavy edges, which normally should be smooth. Patterning is often faint, and with closely spaced lines. The lines may appear at any angle. On screened outputs, the angle is often different on the different screen angles. In addition when descreening, moiré patterning, often seen as diagonal bands, can be caused by using an incorrect filter. The chosen filter is not compatible with the screen ruling on the original. When viewing output films, the moiré may be seen on one or more separations and at different angles. The remedy is to use the correct filter. Fault diagnosis is given in Symptom 6 of Table B.4. Figure B.5 gives but one example of an image defect suffering from a patterning problem.

Figure Fig ure B.5 B.5 Exa Exampl mple e of pattern patterning ing